australian standard - roobuck 404… · as 4041—1998 australian standard™ pressure piping...

AS 4041—1998

Australian Standard™

Pressure piping

This Australian Standard was prepared by Committee ME/1, Pressure Equipment. Itwas approved on behalf of the Council of Standards Australia on 13 March 1998 andpublished on 5 July 1998.

The following interests are represented on Committee ME/1:

A.C.T. WorkCover

Australasian Corrosion Association

Australasian Institute of Engineering Inspection

Australian Aluminium Council

Australian Building Codes Board

Australian Chamber of Commerce and Industry

Australian Institute of Energy

Australian Institute of Petroleum

Australian Liquefied Petroleum Gas Association

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Manufacturers Association of Australia

Bureau of Steel Manufacturers of Australia

Department for Administrative and Information Services, S.A.

Department of Labour, New Zealand

Department of Training and Industrial Relations, Qld

Electricity Corporation of New Zealand

Electricity Supply Association of Australia

Institute of Metals and Materials, Australasia

Institution of Engineers, Australia

Institution of Professional Engineers, New Zealand

Metal Trades Industry Association of Australia

National Association of Testing Authorities, Australia

New Zealand Engineering Federation

New Zealand Heavy Engineering Research Association

New Zealand Institute of Welding

New Zealand Petrochemical Users Group

New Zealand Timber Industry Federation

Victorian WorkCover Authority

Welding Technology Institute of Australia

WorkCover N.S.W.

Work Health Authority, N.T.

Workplace Standards Authority, Tas.

WorkSafe Western Australia

Review of Australian Standards.To keep abreast of progress in industry, Australian Standards are subjectto periodic review and are kept up to date by the issue of amendments or new editions as necessary. It isimportant therefore that Standards users ensure that they are in possession of the latest edition, and anyamendments thereto.Full details of all Australian Standards and related publications will be found in the Standards AustraliaCatalogue of Publications; this information is supplemented each month by the magazine ‘The AustralianStandard’, which subscribing members receive, and which gives details of new publications, new editionsand amendments, and of withdrawn Standards.Suggestions for improvements to Australian Standards, addressed to the head office of Standards Australia,are welcomed. Notification of any inaccuracy or ambiguity found in an Australian Standard should be madewithout delay in order that the matter may be investigated and appropriate action taken.

This Standard was issued in draft form for comment as DR 97114.

AS 4041—1998

Australian Standard™

Pressure piping

Originated in part as part of AS CB15—1959.Previous edition AS 4041—1992.Second edition 1998.

Published by Standards Australia(Standards Association of Australia)1 The Crescent, Homebush, NSW 2140

ISBN 0 7337 1934 1

AS 4041 — 1998 2

PREFACE

This Standard was prepared by the Joint Standards Australia/Standards New ZealandCommittee ME/1, Pressure Equipment, to supersede AS 4041—1992,Pressure piping.

This Standard is the result of a consensus among representatives on the Joint Committee toproduce it as an Australian Standard. Consensus means general agreement by all interestedparties. Consensus includes an attempt to remove all objection and implies much more thanthe concept of a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. It is consistent with thismeaning that a member may be included in the Committee list and yet not be in fullagreement with all clauses of this Standard.

This Standard makes use of current American and British Standards such asANSI/ASME B31.3, Process piping, and BS 806, Specification for the design andconstruction of ferrous piping installations for and in connection with land boilers, as wellas Australian Standards. This has been done where practicable to align with internationalpractices to provide flexibility in design and to enable current proven computer programs foreither of the above Standards to be used to satisfy the design requirements of this Standard(see Clause 1.6).

Comparison of this Standard with ANSI/ASME B31.1,Power pipingand ANSI/ASME B31.3shows that for the same pressure and application, piping to this Standard may be thinner thanpiping to the two American Standards at low to medium temperatures. These two AmericanStandards have been consulted as a major source of material, but preference has been givento BS 806 for ferrous materials. Certain subject matter either unique to BS 806 or toocomplex to modify has been copied direct and the source acknowledged.

The extension of scope in this edition to embrace room-temperature-safe fluids brings intocontrast three different traditions of steel pipe engineering which exist side by side inAustralia. All are successful in their particular scope of application.

The first tradition is that of power and process piping using steam and other hazardous fluids.This tradition is noted for higher safety factors, thick pipe, and the greater use of pre- andpost-weld heat treatment and sophisticated quality assurance.

Another tradition is the non-code tradition for room temperature safe fluids. This is moreinfluenced by the third tradition than by the first. It uses thick or thin pipe and rarely appliespostweld heat treatment and only uses limited quality assurance.

The third pipe tradition is that of petroleum and natural gas pipelines. This tradition useslower safety factors, thin pipe, rarely applies preheat and rarely uses postweld heat treatmentbut has adequate quality assurance.

The extension of scope that joined tradition 1 and 2 (and possibly tradition 3 in special cases)presented the Committee with a difficulty in preventing unnecessary increases in costs for thepresent non-code piping systems in Australian while maintaining safety. The moreconservative requirements of tradition 1, represented by BS 806 and ANSI/ASME B31.3 arenot appropriate for applying these features to room-temperature safe fluids in modern lowcarbon equivalent pipe steels. Hence a four-tier pipe classification system is introduced toensure adequate safety, performance and economy of piping systems for the wider range ofindustrial applications from critical pipe used in power stations to low hazard piping foundin small industrial plant. In summary this edition will generally permit thinner steel pipe tobe used for a given pressure than previously. Also there is a change to some of its pressuretesting equations for steel pipe. The traditional value of 1.5 P for steel no longer applies butis replaced by the equivalent of 1.25 P.

3 AS 4041 — 1998

This Standard is arranged similarly to AS 1210,Pressure Vessels, including Supplement 1,Unfired Pressure Vessels—Advance design and construction (Supplement to AS 1210—1997),and its class system parallels that of these Standards. Without inferring equality of the safetyfactor, the alignment of classes is approximately as follows:

AS 4041Class

AS 1210Class

12A2P

3

1H2H—

3

Australian, American, and British material and component Standards which are used to aconsiderable extent in Australia have been listed. This Standard now provides for a widerrange of materials than previously covered. A basis for specifying non-metallic pressurepiping is given by reference to ANSI/ASME B31.3 but with provision for substitution ofequivalent Australian Standards.

The Standard follows in principle other Standards forming part of AS/NZS 1200,Pressureequipment, in providing guidance for owners, designers, manufacturers, inspection bodies andusers in the form of minimum engineering requirements for the safe design, fabrication,installation, testing, and commissioning of pressure piping based on world-wide advances andexperience. It also provides basic requirements and references for welding qualification,non-destructive testing, operation, maintenance and in-service inspection.

The principle objective of this Standard is clear uniform national requirements which willresult in reasonably certain protection of the general public, persons installing and operatingthe piping, and of adjacent property and environment, which give economic piping, andwhich show where a margin for deterioration may be necessary to give adequate and safeservice life. Additional requirements may be necessary to prevent damage from unusualconditions, third parties and abnormal forces.

The Standard provides an authoritative source of important principles, data, and practicalguidelines to be used by responsible and competent persons. It is not practicable nor indeeddesirable for the Standard to specify every aspect of piping design and fabrication. It isneither an instruction manual nor a complete design or construction specification. TheStandard does not replace the need for appropriate experience, competent engineeringjudgement, and the application of fundamental engineering principles.

Users of this Standard are reminded that it has no intrinsic legal authority, but may acquirelegal standing in one or more of the following circumstances:

(a) Adoption by a government or other authority having jurisdiction.

(b) Adoption by a purchaser as the required standard of construction when placing acontract.

(c) Adoption where a manufacturer states that piping is in accordance with this Standard.

Acknowledgment is gratefully made to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers andthe British Standards Institution for the considerable assistance provided by the abovereferenced national Standards.

Statements expressed in mandatory terms in notes to tables and figures are deemed to berequirements of this Standard.

The term ‘normative’ has been used in this Standard to define the application of the appendixto which it applies. A ‘normative’ appendix is an integral part of a Standard.

AS 4041 — 1998 4

CONTENTS

PageSECTION 1 SCOPE AND GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.2 RESPONSIBILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.3 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.4 CLASSIFICATION OF FLUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.5 SELECTION OF PIPING CLASS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.6 ALTERNATIVE STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141.7 DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141.8 NOTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171.9 NON-SI UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171.10 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171.11 REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171.12 NOT ALLOCATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.13 NOT ALLOCATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.14 NON-METALLIC PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.15 INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.16 NEW DESIGNS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS . . . . . . . 181.17 DIMENSIONAL AND MASS TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.18 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SECTION 2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS2.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.2 QUALIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.3 LIMITATIONS ON MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.4 PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.5 IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 242.6 LIMITATIONS ON APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242.7 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS FOR CORROSIVE SERVICE. . . . . . . 272.8 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.9 BACKING RINGS AND FUSIBLE INSERTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.10 BRAZING MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.11 MATERIALS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

SECTION 3 DESIGN3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493.2 DESIGN PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493.3 DESIGN TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493.4 DESIGN LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503.5 STATIC AND DYNAMIC LOADS AND FORCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503.6 RISK ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513.7 THERMAL EFFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513.8 EFFECTS OF MOVEMENT AT SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND

TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513.9 DESIGN PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE FOR PIPING ASSOCIATED

WITH STEAM BOILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513.10 DESIGN CRITERIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553.11 DESIGN STRENGTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563.12 DESIGN FACTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593.13 ALLOWANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603.14 WALL THICKNESS OF STRAIGHT PIPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5 AS 4041 — 1998

Page

3.15 PIPE BENDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633.16 REDUCERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683.17 BIFURCATIONS, SPECIAL FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . 693.18 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLIES. . . . . . . . 693.19 BRANCH CONNECTIONS AND OPENINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703.20 WELDED BRANCH CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853.21 DESIGN OF CLOSURES FOR PIPE ENDS AND BRANCHES. . . . . . . . . 853.22 DESIGN OF OTHER PRESSURE-RETAINING COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . 853.23 ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863.24 PIPING JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883.25 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO SPECIFIC PIPING. . . . . . . 1063.26 NOT ALLOCATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083.27 FLEXIBILITY, STRESS ANALYSIS AND SUPPORT DESIGN. . . . . . . . . 1093.28 PIPE SUPPORTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203.29 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243.30 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

SECTION 4 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION4.1 SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254.2 FABRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254.3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254.4 THERMAL INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264.5 IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

SECTION 5 WELDING AND ALLIED JOINING PROCESSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

SECTION 6 EXAMINATION AND TESTING6.1 SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286.2 RESPONSIBILITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES AND WELDERS. . . . . 1286.4 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286.5 ALTERNATIVES TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296.6 PRESSURE TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306.7 HYDROSTATIC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306.8 ALTERNATIVE TO HYDROSTATIC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316.9 TESTING PRESSURE-LIMITING DEVICES, RELIEF VALVES,

PRESSURE REGULATORS, AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . 1326.10 REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

SECTION 7 PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS AND DEVICES7.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337.2 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . 1337.3 PRESSURE RELIEF SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337.4 CORROSION PROTECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347.5 FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347.6 EARTHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347.7 PROTECTION FROM IMPACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347.8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.9 HUMAN CONTACT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.10 NOISE CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.11 ISOLATION PROTECTION (FOR INTERCONNECTED PIPING). . . . . . . 1357.12 NOT ALLOCATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357.13 PROTECTION AGAINST INTERFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

AS 4041 — 1998 6

Page

SECTION 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND INSPECTION8.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368.2 REVIEW OF DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378.3 MATERIAL AND COMPONENT INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378.4 GENERAL INSPECTION OF FABRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

SECTION 9 COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION9.1 COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389.2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

APPENDICESA LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139B NOMINAL SIZES AND OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150C NOT ALLOCATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153D MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS AND

TENSILE STRENGTHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154E LINEAR EXPANSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179F YOUNG MODULUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181G DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH FOR FLANGE BOLTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183H LODMAT ISOTHERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187I DETERMINATION OF DESIGN STRENGTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188J DESIGN PRESSURE FOR SAFETY VALVE DISCHARGE PIPING. . . . . . . 192K TYPICAL FORGED BRANCH FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196L REINFORCEMENT OF A BRANCH AND AN OPENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197M TYPICAL BRANCH WELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207N WELD DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215O FILLET-WELDED SOCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223P SLEEVE JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Q NOTES ON PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225R METHOD OF ASSESSING FLEXIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228S EXAMPLE OF STRESS CALCULATION IN A SECTIONALIZED PIPING

SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250T STANDARD PIPING DESIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260U EXAMPLES OF CALCULATION OF HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE . . . 264

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

© Copyright STANDARDS AUSTRALIA

Users of Standards are reminded that copyright subsists in all Standards Australia publications and software. Except where theCopyright Act allows and except where provided for below no publications or software produced by Standards Australia may bereproduced, stored in a retrieval system in any form or transmitted by any means without prior permission in writing fromStandards Australia. Permission may be conditional on an appropriate royalty payment. Requests for permission and information oncommercial software royalties should be directed to the head office of Standards Australia.

Standards Australia will permit up to 10 percent of the technical content pages of a Standard to be copied for use exclusivelyin-house by purchasers of the Standard without payment of a royalty or advice to Standards Australia.

Standards Australia will also permit the inclusion of its copyright material in computer software programs for no royaltypayment provided such programs are used exclusively in-house by the creators of the programs.

Care should be taken to ensure that material used is from the current edition of the Standard and that it is updated whenever theStandard is amended or revised. The number and date of the Standard should therefore be clearly identified.

The use of material in print form or in computer software programs to be used commercially, with or without payment, or incommercial contracts is subject to the payment of a royalty. This policy may be varied by Standards Australia at any time.

7 AS 4041 — 1998

STANDARDS AUSTRALIA

Australian Standard

Pressure piping

S E C T I O N 1 S C O P E A N D G E N E R A L

1.1 SCOPE This Standard sets out minimum requirements for the materials, design,fabrication, testing, inspection, reports and pre-commissioning of piping subject to internalpressure or external pressure or both. Specific requirements are given for piping constructedof carbon, carbon-manganese, low alloy and high alloy steels, ductile and cast iron, copper,aluminium, nickel, titanium and alloys of these materials. General requirements and referenceto Standards for non-metallic piping are included.

Piping complying with BS 806, ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME B31.3 andANSI/ASME B31.5 are deemed to meet the requirements of this Standard (see Clause 1.6).

This Standard applies specifically to pressure piping, i.e. piping which may present asignificant risk of injury to people, property or the environment owing to hazards arisingfrom—

(a) the effects of pressure, either as a result of internal pressure causing an explosion orprojectile, or as a result of external pressure causing buckling and collapse;

(b) release of contents which are lethal, toxic, harmful to human tissue (e.g. hot, cold,corrosive) flammable, combustible or are otherwise hazardous; or

(c) release of contents which directly or indirectly result in injury or damage e.g. pipingfor pollutants, fire-fighting purposes or cooling purposes.

This Standard is intended to apply to the following piping except when varied by the relevantStandard:

(i) Piping for land steam boilers, prime-movers, refrigerant and other industrial plantexcept where the piping forms an integral part of a boiler or pressure vessel and therequirements of AS 1210 or AS 1228 apply.

(ii) Hydraulic piping, water piping (including feed water piping), process piping, hot waterpiping exceeding 99°C and water piping forming part of a fire protection system (seeAS 3689 and AS 4118). See also Items (A) to (G) of this Clause.

(iii) Piping within boundaries of chemical manufacturing or processing installations,petroleum refineries, petrochemical plant, gas process plant, refinery tank farms,terminals and bulk handling plants.

(iv) Oil fuel piping within the scope of AS 1375, AS 1692 and AS 1940.

(v) Liquefied petroleum gas piping within the scope of AS 1596.

(vi) Anhydrous ammonia within the scope of AS 2022.

(vii) Low-temperature and refrigeration piping within the scope of AS 1677.

(viii) Piping for road tank vehicles within the scope of AS 2809.

(ix) Compressed air piping, the design pressure of which exceeds 70 kPa (internal) or32 kPa (external).

(x) Piping for low pressure gas systems complying with AG 601.

(xi) Other piping covered by Standards Australia Standards which require compliance withthis Standard.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 8

This Standard may be applied beyond the limits of application of Items (i) to (xi) wherespecified by the purchaser. Unless suitably referenced this Standard is not intended to applyto the following:

(A) Gas and liquid petroleum pipelines covered by AS 2885.

(B) Gas distribution pipelines covered by AS 1697 for Australia or NZS 5258 forNew Zealand.

(C) Liquid hydrocarbon pipelines with operating pressure less than 2 MPa which arecovered by AS 2018.

(D) Piping on shipping and aircraft.

(E) Piping used for roof or floor drains, plumbing services, sewers, domestic water and gasreticulation, and low pressure ventilation ducting.

(F) Mineral slurry pipelines which are covered by ANSI/ASME B31.11.

(G) Nuclear piping.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES This Standard assumes the basic responsibilities of those partiesnormally involved with pressure piping to be as follows:

(a) The owner . . . . . . . . theoverall responsibility for compliance with this Standard,and for the establishment of the requirements for design, manufacture, examination,inspection, testing, operation, and maintenance of the piping.

(b) The designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .responsible to the owner for assurance thatthe engineering design of piping is in compliance with this Standard and with anyadditional requirements specified by the owner.

(c) The manufacturer and fabricator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .responsible to the ownerfor assurance that materials, components, workmanship, examination, and testing arein compliance with this Standard and the engineering design. See also Clause 6.2.

(d) The owner’s inspector. . . . . . . . . . responsible to the owner for ensuring that therequirements of Section 8, and any additional responsibilities specified by the ownerare met.

(e) The inspection body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .responsible to the owner for carryingout inspections for piping to hazard level A and B to AS 3920.1 piping, and requiredcertification.

1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPING Metallic piping specified in this Standard isclassified according to the material, design, welding, examination and testing and inspectioncriteria given in Table 1.3. Non-metallic piping is not classified. Class 2 is subdivided intosubclasses 2A and 2P. Where the text refers to Class 2, Class 2A and 2P are included.

1.4 CLASSIFICATION OF FLUIDS Fluids are classified in Table 1.4.

COPYRIGHT

9 AS 4041 — 1998

TABLE 1.3

PIPING CLASSIFICATION (See Notes 1 and 2)

Item No. Description

Limit or requirement

Class 1piping

Class 2piping Class 3

piping2A 2P

1 MATERIAL - As permitted by Section 2

1.1 Steels designated for pressurepurposes

Any C,C-Mn

austenitic andferritic-austenitic

stainless steel,31/2% Ni,

1Cr-1/2Mo,21/4Cr-1Mo,

1/2Cr-1/2Mo-1/4V

C,C-Mn

C,C-Mn,

austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless

steel

Ductile iron See Table 2.6.3.4

Non-ferrous metals Any Any Not permitted Any

Structural pipe and structuralsteel

Not permitted Not permittedAny with

appropriate tests

1.2 Seamless, hot finished (HFS),or cold finished (CPS)

Both permitted

1.3 WeldedContinuous welded (CW)(In America this is called BW)

Not permittedPermitted(See Clause 2.6.10)

1.4 Electric resistance welded (ERW)Cold-drawn electric-resistance-welded (CEW)

Welds with filler metal added Pipe with weld joint factor listed in Item 2.3

2 DESIGN

2.1Design temperature (excludingmaterial limitations) °C:

(a) Maximum

(b) Minimum

None

≥ MDMT

400°C

≥ MDMT

99°C

0°C

180°C

≥ MDMT + 20°C;and ≥ − 100°C

2.2Design strength at roomtemperature for C and C-Mnsteels (See Note 5)

Lower of:

Re

1.5or

Rm

2.35

Lower of:

Re

1.5or

Rm

2.35

0.72 Re20

Lower of:

Re

1.5or

Rm

2.35

2.3Design factors (see Clause 3.12)

Class design factor, (M)Weld joint factor, (e)

11.0 min.

10.85 min.

0.60.6 min. (See

Clause 3.14.3(a))

2.4 Flexibility assessment or analysis(see Clause 3.27.2.2)

Required(See Clause 3.27.2.2)

Not normally required

2.5 Fatigue assessment or analysis(see Clause 3.4)

Required Required Not required

(See end of Table for Notes) (continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 10

TABLE 1.3 (continued)



Class 1piping


piping2A 2P

2.6 Welded branch connection

Minimum included angle60° (or 45° when

agreed)45°

External non-integralreinforcement

Not permitted withoutspecial analysis

Permitted

Partial penetration or fillet weldPermitted by agreement Permitted

(see Clause 3.24.2.6 )

2.7 Pipe joint (See Note 6)

Butt weld Permitted

Socket weld Permitted below DN 65 Permitted

Sleeve weld Not permitted Permitted

Bell and spigot Not permitted Permitted

Threaded couplingPermitted by

agreementPermitted

Flanged Permitted

Flared, flareless and compressionfittings

Permitted up to DN 25

Caulked Not permitted Permitted

Soldered Not permittedPermitted below

75°CNot permitted Permitted below 75°C

Brazed Permitted up to 200°C

2.8 Bend

Mitre Permitted

Cut and shut Not permitted Permitted

Wrinkle Not permitted Permitted

Ovality ≤10% ≤12%

2.9 Non-pressure attachment

Partial penetration or fillet weld Permitted when agreed Permitted

3 WELDING (See Note 3)

3.1 Personnel requirements Option 1 or Option 2 Option 1 or Option 2

Welder certification Required Not required Not required Required

Welder qualification Required Required Required Not required

Welding supervisor Not required Required Not required Not required

3.2 Welding procedure qualification Required (except as provided for in Item 3.3)

3.3 Prequalified welding procedurePermitted but be subject to partial re-qualification

e.g. welder qualification

3.4Permanent backing ring (seeClause 2.9)

Not permitted Permitted

3.5 Fit-up Close limits Medium limits Wide limits

3.6 Criteria for weld quality Very high High Reduced

3.7 Dissimilar joints Permitted

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

11 AS 4041—1998

TABLE 1.3 (continued)



Class 1piping


piping2A 2P

4 EXAMINATION AND TESTING

4.1 Visual 100%

4.2 Penetrant 0 to 100% 0 to 10% Not required

4.3 Magnetic particle 0 to 100% 0 to 10% Not required

4.4 Radiographic or ultrasonic20 to 100%

(see AS 4037)0 to 10%

(see AS 4037)Not required

4.5 Hydrostatic pressure test Normally required Alternative permitted

4.6 Pneumatic pressure test Permitted by agreement

4.7 Initial service testPermitted

(Clause 6.8.2)

4.8 Special leak testRequired where

specifiedNot required

4.9 Material test certificate Required Normally required Not required

4.10 Marking Required Normally required Not required

5 INSPECTION (Depends on hazardlevel)

Required Normally required Not normally required

6 CONTROLS

6.1 Pressure control tolerance +10% +15%

6.2 Design temperature controltolerance (see Note 4)

+ Half the appropriate temperatureinterval in Table D2 for the material

+ Double Class 1 and 2entry, i.e. 100% of

appropriate temperatureinterval

LEGEND:

MDMT = material design minimum temperature (see Clause 1.7)

Re (see Clause 1.7)

Rm (see Clause 1.7)

NOTES

1 This Table outlines the basic differences between the classes, and reference should be made to the text for full details.

2 Materials, design, welding, examination and testing and inspection are shown as ‘permitted’ on the basis that such items comply in allother respects with this Standard.

3 Welding is taken to include brazing and soldering unless otherwise specified. For detailed requirements, see AS 4458 and AS 3992.

4 Applies generally except as provided by Clauses 3.4, 3.9.5 and 3.10.3 for the creep range. Examples of the Class 1 upper temperaturecontrol tolerance for API 5L B pipe for the listed maximum temperatures are given below:

Maximum temperature°C

Class 1 tolerance°C

75405475

+25+ 5+ 5

5 See Appendix D design strength and Appendix I determination of design strength.

6 See Clause 2.6.2 for possible effect of joint in corrosion performance.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 12

TABLE 1.4

APPLICATION OF PIPING CLASSES FOR SERVICE CONDITIONS

Service conditions (see AS 3920.1 and thepublication — Fluids types and classes

for pressure piping systems*

Service limits for following classes

Class 1 Class 2A Class 2PClass 3

(see Note 1)

Designpressurefor fluidtype (seeNote 2)

1 LethalGas No service

limitProhibited

Liquid

2Veryharmful

Gas No servicelimit

10 MPa max. Prohibited 2 MPa max.

Liquid 10 MPa max.

3 HarmfulGas No service

limit

10 MPa max. Prohibited No service limit

Liquid No service limit No service limit

4 Non-harmfulGas No service

limitNo service limit No service

limit

No service limit

Liquid No service limit

Design temperature

Maximum No servicelimit

400°C 99°C 180°C

Minimum No servicelimit

No service limit 0°C −100°C

Nominal size All materialNo service

limitNo service limit

No servicelimit

No service limit exceptDN 150 max. for Type 2

fluid(see Note 3)

Nominal wallthickness

Max.

Carbon steelLow alloysteelHigh alloysteelNon-ferrousmetal

No servicelimit

See Table 3.14.2

Min.

Carbon steelLow alloysteelHigh alloysteelNon-ferrousmetal

See Clause3.14.2(a)

See Clause 3.14.2(b)

Ductile &cast iron

Prohibited No service limit

* Published by Tubemakers Piping Systems Australia 1995.

NOTES:

1 See Clause 3.24.2.6 for further relaxation for low hazard service.

2 As an example, steam above 90°C is fluid No. 3.

3 As an example, water not exceeding 90°C, at any pressure and in any size pipe, being fluid No. 4 may be designed in Class 1,2A, 2P and 3 piping.

1.5 SELECTION OF PIPING CLASS

1.5.1 Basic requirements The class of metallic piping selected for a particular applicationshall be determined in accordance with Table 1.4.

The requirements of Table 1.4 are intended to give a high level of assurance of reliableperformance and of adequate protection to life and property for the service conditions listed.

COPYRIGHT

13 AS 4041 — 1998

However, it is not practicable to include all details of the various service applications.Therefore in selection of the class of piping, the following shall be taken into account:

(a) The possibility of piping failure under expected service conditions.

(b) Consequence of failure of piping on human life, property and the environment.

(c) Proximity of the piping to members of the general public and workers.

(d) Properties of any released contents including temperature, corrosiveness, flammability,and toxicity and radioactive properties.

(e) Pressure energy (pressure times volume) of the contents.

(f) Service conditions.

(g) Design life.

(h) Adequacy of materials (e.g. weldability, corrosive resistance) adequacy of design,fabrication, installation, examination, testing, inspection, protection, operation, andmaintenance.

(i) Economics of carrying out repairs and replacements.

(j) Minimization of the number of classes of piping for the same conditions in any oneplant or for any one product.

(k) Where there is doubt about a precise classification, the classification is a matter ofagreement by the parties concerned.

1.5.2 Mixing classes Designers should nominate the class of pipe early in the designprocess. Classes may be mixed. Welds and components at the interface between differentclasses shall comply with the higher class.

A total piping system may be divided arbitrarily and the divisions given a different classnumber in accordance with Table 1.4 of this Standard and at the designer’s discretion.

1.5.3 Fast-track selection of class of piping Prepare a list of the proposed fluiddescription, the pressure, the temperature and the nominal size and consult Table 1.4 to selectone or two trial classes. Then consult Table 1.3 for details of the testing required for thechosen classes and then select the class most applicable. However, the designer may selecta higher class for all or part of the piping (observing the prohibitions of Table 1.4) at thedesigner’s discretion. For this Clause, Class 1 is a higher class than 2A, which is a higherclass than 2P, which is a higher class than 3.

Class 1 may be used for all conditions, fluids and services. Class 1 requires compulsorynon-destructive examination, fatigue assessment, flexibility assessment and more extensiverecords and there are limitations on materials. See also Clauses 1.11 and 6.10 on records.

Class 2 offers reduced levels of non-destructive examination in step with current practice inother fields. The text gives other concessions and exclusions.

Class 2A limits the design strength and uses the same thickness as Class 1. Class 2P may beused for steel piping for room temperature application with a reduced thickness determinedfrom a design strength of 72 percent yield stress at room temperature.

Class 3 gives concessions on non-destructive examination and other matters but uses67 percent extra design thickness above Class 1. This may not be a significant extra for steelpipe under DN 150 where the actual thickness is usually in excess of the calculated thickness.

Clause 2.11.4.1 requires piping for lethal fluids to be treated as low-temperature pipe andonly materials having an MDMT of 0°C or lower may be used.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 14

1.6 ALTERNATIVE STANDARDS Piping complying with the following alternativeStandards is deemed to comply with this Standard, according to their particular scope,provided that any requirement of this Standard nominated by the owner is complied with:

(a) Piping for power plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS 806 orANSI/ASME B31.1.

(b) Piping for chemical plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ANSI/ASME B31.3.

(c) Piping for refrigeration plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ANSI/ASME B31.5.

Mixing the content of application Standards is not permitted except where agreed by theparties concerned. The materials, design, construction, testing and inspection of thealternative specification shall be used in full unless otherwise agreed.

1.7 DEFINITIONS For the purpose of this Standard, and unless stated otherwise, thedefinitions below shall apply.

1.7.1 Accessory—a component of a piping system, other than a pipe, valve, or fitting, butincluding a relief device, pressure-containing item, pipe support, and any other item necessaryto make the piping operative whether or not these items are specified in the Standard.

1.7.2 Agreed and agreement—agreed by or agreement between the parties concerned.

1.7.3 Cold spring—the forcing into position of a component that has been fabricated to alength shorter or longer than its nominal length, so that it is stressed in the installedcondition, with the intention of compensating for the change in length produced by anincrease or decrease in temperature. (Also called ‘cold pull’ or ‘cold push’).

1.7.4 Component—a part of a piping system, including a pipe, valve, fitting, and anaccessory.

1.7.5 Corrosion—the wastage of a metal, because of a reaction with its environment,including oxidation, scaling, mechanical abrasion, erosion, and all other forms of wastage.

1.7.6 Design—drawings, calculations, specifications, models, and all other informationnecessary for the complete description of the fabrication and installation of the piping.

1.7.7 Designer—the person or organization responsible to the owner for the assurance thatthe engineering design complies with this Standard and any additional requirements specifiedby the owner.

1.7.8 Design strength—the maximum stress specified for material and which is to be usedin equations in this Standard. (Quantity symbol:f.)

1.7.9 Extruded outlet—an outlet in a pipe or piping component where a lip has beenformed at the outlet so that the lip height above the surface of the main pipe is not less thanthe radius of curvature of the external contoured portion of the outlet, i.e.ho ≥ ro (seeFigure 3.19.9.2).

1.7.10 Fabrication—the forming and joining of piping components which includes cutting,bending, threading, welding, and any other operation on these components which is not partof installation.

NOTE: Fabrication may be carried out in the workshop or on site.

1.7.11 Fitting—a component, including a bend, a tee, a flange, a bolt, or a gasket, usedto join pipes, to change the direction or diameter of a pipe, provide a branch, or terminatea pipe.

1.7.12 Fluid—any vapour, liquid, gas, or mixture thereof or fluidized solid, e.g. slurry andpowdered material. (See AS 3920.1 for fluid classification.)

COPYRIGHT

15 AS 4041 — 1998

1.7.13 Hydrostatic test—a pressure test that exerts a pressure uniformly with a liquid fora specified period, and is used to prove the integrity and the leaktightness of the piping.

1.7.14 Inspection—the examination and verification, carried out by the owner or theinspection body, of materials, design, fabrication, installation, examinations, tests, certificates,documents and records to determine compliance with this Standard.

1.7.15 Inspection body—a body corporate or firm responsible for the inspection ofpressure equipment and certification of inspection results.

1.7.16 Installation—the complete installation of a piping system in the locations and onthe supports given by the engineering design including any field assembly, fabrication,examination, and testing of the system as specified in this Standard.

1.7.17 May—indicates the existence of an option.

1.7.18 Mitre bend—a bend consisting of one or more mitre joints.

1.7.19 Mitre joint —a joint formed by two straight sections of pipe that are matched andjoined by welding on a plane bisecting the angle of junction so that the change in directionexceeds three degrees.

1.7.20 Nominal pressure—a numerical designation which is a convenient rounded numberfor reference purposes. All equipment of the same nominal size (DN) and designated by thesame PN number should have compatible mating dimensions.

NOTES:

1 The maximum allowable pressure depends on material, design and temperature and should beselected from the tables of pressure/temperature ratings given in the appropriate Standard. Steelpipe Standards commonly do not have tables of nominal pressure.

2 Nominal pressure is designated ‘PN’ followed by an appropriate number and unit.

1.7.21 Nominal size—a numerical designation of size which is common to all componentsin a piping system other than components designated by outside diameters or by thread size.It is a convenient round number for reference purpose and is only loosely related tomanufacturing dimensions (see Appendix B).

NOTES:

1 Nominal size is designated ‘DN’ followed by an appropriate number.

2 The nominal size cannot be subjected to measurement, tolerances or used for purposes ofcalculation and has no units.

3 Not all components are designated by nominal size, e.g. steel tubes are designated by outsidediameter and thickness.

1.7.22 Owner—the person or organization having the overall responsibility for compliancewith this Standard and the engineering design, and for the establishment of the requirementsfor design, construction, examination, inspection, testing, operation and maintenance whichwill govern the entire fluid handling or process system of which piping is a part.

NOTE: For the purpose of this Standard, the term ‘owner’ includes the purchaser or hirer.

1.7.23 Parties concerned—the purchaser, designer, fabricator, manufacturer, designverifier, inspection body, supplier, installer and owner as appropriate.

1.7.24 Pipe—a pressure-tight cylinder used to convey a fluid or to transmit a fluid pressure,ordinarily designated ‘pipe’ in the applicable material specification.

NOTE: For the purpose of this Standard, the term ‘pipe’ is synonymous with ‘tube’ except whereotherwise noted.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 16

1.7.25 Pipe support—an accessory consisting of fixtures and attachments as follows:

(a) Fixtures which transfer the load from the pipe or structural attachment to the supportingstructure or equipment. They include fixtures of the hanging type, such as hanger rods,spring hangers, sway braces, counterweights, turnbuckles, struts, chains, guides andanchors, and fixtures of the bearing type, such as saddles, bases, rollers, brackets, andsliding supports.

(b) Attachments which are welded, bolted, or clamped to the pipe. These include clips,lugs, rings, clamps, clevises, straps, skirts, and anchor attachments.

1.7.26 Pressure piping—an assembly of pipes, pipe fittings, valves and pipe accessoriessubject to internal pressure and used to contain or convey fluid or to transmit fluid pressure.It includes distribution headers, bolting, gaskets, pipe supports and pressure-retainingaccessories.

1.7.26.1 Control piping—piping used to convey pneumatic or hydraulic pressure tocontrolling apparatus and between instrument transmitters and receivers.

1.7.26.2 Instrument piping—piping used to connect instruments to main piping, to otherinstruments and apparatus, or to measuring equipment.

1.7.26.3 Sampling piping—piping used for the collection of samples from the contents ofthe main piping.

1.7.27 Pressure, design—the pressure used to determine the wall thickness of a pressurecontaining component, being that pressure at the most severe condition of temperature andcoincident internal or external pressure expected during normal operating conditions.(Quantity symbol:p.)

NOTE: Unless otherwise stated, pressure is expressed in kilopascals or megapascals aboveatmospheric pressure, i.e. gauge pressure.

1.7.28 Proprietary components—components made or marketed by a company having theright to manufacture and sell them. Technical data and experience may also be proprietary,i.e. not in the public domain.

1.7.29 Service conditions—the range of pressure, temperature and other conditions towhich the piping is subject during its design life.

1.7.30 Shall—indicates that a statement is mandatory.

1.7.31 Should—indicates a recommendation.

1.7.32 Socket welded joint—that joint formed from the end of a pipe entering the socketend of a socket-welding fitting and the pipe and socket being joined by means of a filletweld.

1.7.33 Strength

1.7.33.1 Specified minimum tensile strength—the minimum tensile strength specified in theStandard to which the material or component is made. (Quantity symbol:Rm.) It may bequalified by the test temperature.

1.7.33.2 Specified minimum yield strength—the minimum yield strength specified in theStandard to which the material or component is made. (Quantity symbol:Re.) It is qualifiedby the test temperature.

1.7.34 Temperature

1.7.34.1 Temperature design—the metal temperature at the coincident design pressure, usedto select the design strength and to determine the dimensions of the part under consideration(see Clause 3.3).

COPYRIGHT

17 AS 4041 — 1998

1.7.34.2 Material design minimum temperature (MDMT)—a characteristic minimumtemperature of a material. It is used in design to select material with sufficient notchtoughness to avoid brittle fracture and to select the temperature at which the material can beused at full design strength (see Clause 2.11.2.2).

1.7.34.3 Maximum operating temperature—the highest metal temperature to which thepiping under consideration is subjected under normal operation. It is determined by thetechnical requirements of the process. (To avoid confusion with the following definition itis never reduced to an acronym.)

1.7.34.4 Minimum operating temperature (MOT)—the lowest mean metal temperaturethrough the thickness to which the piping under consideration is subjected under normaloperation. It is determined by the technical requirements of the process, or lower temperaturewhere specified by the purchaser.

1.7.35 Testing—the assessment of the properties of materials or components by the use ofmechanical methods, pressure testing or other destructive or potentially destructive methodsto ensure compliance with specified requirements.

1.7.36 Thickness

1.7.36.1 Actual thickness—the actual wall thickness of the material or a component usedin the piping, which is the measured thickness or, when the material is not measured, thenominal thickness less the greatest negative tolerance specified in the Standard to which thematerial or component was made.

1.7.36.2 Pressure design thickness—the wall thickness calculated according to the equationsto resist pressure, but which does not include an allowance for loss of thickness due tocorrosion, forming, threading, grooving, and other action.

1.7.36.3 Required thickness—the sum of the pressure design thickness and the allowancefor corrosion, forming, threading, grooving, and other actions.

1.7.36.4 Nominal thickness—the wall thickness nominated on the purchase order and towhich the manufacturer’s tolerances on wall thickness are applicable.

1.7.37 Verification—confirmation by examination and provision of evidence that specifiedrequirements have been met.

1.7.38 Weld joint factor—an arbitrary quality ratio of the allowable stress across alongitudinal or spiral welded joint to that allowed in the adjacent parent material.

1.8 NOTATION Symbols used in equations in this Standard are defined in relation to theparticular equations in which they occur.

1.9 NON-SI UNITS Where units other than SI units are used in nominated Standards, theconversion to SI units shall be made in accordance with AS 1376.

1.10 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS The documents referred to in this Standard arelisted, with titles, in Appendix A.

1.11 REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES

1.11.1 Manufacturer’s data report After the piping has been completed, tested andinspected, the fabricator shall complete a manufacturer’s data report for hazard level A and Bpiping and where specified by the owner, the report shall briefly identify the piping, andcertify that the piping has been designed, fabricated, installed and tested in partial orcomplete compliance with the requirements of this Standard.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 18

Where the design of piping to hazard level A and B of AS 3920.1 piping has not been carriedout by the fabricator, the designer shall provide a report certifying partial or completecompliance of the design with the Standard.

In most cases, this is adequate certification but, when requested, the following documentsmay be included in the manufacturer’s data report:

(a) Materials test certificates.

(b) Welding procedure and welder qualification test results.

(c) Heat treatment reports.

(d) Non-destructive examination reports.

(e) Other testing reports.

1.11.2 Copies Reports complying with Clause 1.11.1 shall be given to —

(a) the owner when required by the design (and hence at the owner’s option);

(b) the inspection body, if requested; and

(c) ‘to whom it may concern’, if required by law or regulation.

1.12 NOT ALLOCATED

1.13 NOT ALLOCATED

1.14 NON-METALLIC PIPING Non-metallic piping and piping lined with a non-metallicmaterial shall—

(a) comply with requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.3 or an equivalent National Standard;

NOTE: Equivalent Australian Standards may be applied in lieu of material Standards referredto in ANSI/ASME B31.3 e.g. AS 1460, AS/NZS 4129(Int) and AS/NZS 4130.

(b) comply with the engineering design; and

(c) be agreed by the parties concerned.

1.15 INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS See AS/NZS 1200 for interpretation ofStandards.

1.16 NEW DESIGNS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS This Standarddoes not prohibit the use of materials or methods of design or construction which are notspecifically referred to herein. (See AS/NZS 1200 for guidance).

1.17 DIMENSIONAL AND MASS TOLERANCES Piping to this Standard uses pipe andother components complying with listed or recognized specifications. Some of thesespecifications have wide or indeterminate dimensional and mass tolerances. Any dimensionalor mass requirements on drawings beyond that found in the component specifications areoutside the scope of this Standard.

1.18 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF ACCESSORIES Any accessory (see Clause 1.7) ina piping system may be made from standard pipe and standard fittings at the designer’soption. Such an accessory is deemed to be piping and may be designed as either piping oras a pressure vessel.

COPYRIGHT

19 AS 4041 — 1998

S E C T I O N 2 M A T E R I A L S A N D C O M P O N E N T S

2.1 GENERAL Materials and components which are to be used for piping shall be—

(a) suitable and safe for fabrication and the service conditions under which they are used;and

(b) qualified for the conditions of their use by compliance with the nominated Standards(Clause 2.2.1) and any additional requirements of this Standard.

2.2 QUALIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Materials and components complying with nominated Standards Materials andcomponents which comply with the following Standards may be used for appropriateapplications, as specified and limited by this Standard (for limits of materials seeAppendix D), without further qualification. Material and components permitted by AS 1210,BS 806, ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ANSI/ASME B31.3 are permitted by this Standard. Item (a)to (m) cover metallic materials and Item (n) covers plastic and non-metallic materials.

For limitation on use of materials listed in this Clause 2.2.1, reference should be made toother relevant Clauses in this Standard, e.g. Clauses 2.2.4 and 2.6.10.

(a) Pipes

AS 1074AS 1432AS 1569AS 1572AS 1579AS 1751

AS/NZS 1866AS/NZS 1867AS/NZS 1571AS/NZS 2280

ASTM A 53ASTM A 106ASTM A 135ASTM A 178ASTM A 179ASTM A 199ASTM A 209ASTM A 210ASTM A 213

ASTM A 249ASTM A 250ASTM A 268ASTM A 269ASTM A 312ASTM A 333ASTM A 334ASTM A 335ASTM A 358ASTM A 369ASTM A 376ASTM A 423ASTM A 430ASTM A 452ASTM A 524ASTM A 587ASTM A 672ASTM A 688ASTM A 691ASTM A 789ASTM A 790

ASTM B 42ASTM B 75ASTM B 88ASTM B 111ASTM B 161ASTM B 163ASTM B 165ASTM B 167ASTM B 210ASTM B 221ASTM B 241ASTM B 315ASTM B 337ASTM B 338ASTM B 395ASTM B 407ASTM B 423ASTM B 444ASTM B 514ASTM B 515ASTM B 516

ASTM B 517ASTM B 535ASTM B 619ASTM B 622ASTM B 626

BS 1387BS 1471BS 1474BS 2871BS 3059BS 3601BS 3602BS 3603BS 3604BS 3605

API 5L

ISO 9329ISO 9330

(b) Plates

AS 1548AS 1566

AS/NZS 1594AS/NZS 1734AS/NZS 3678

ASTM A 203ASTM A 204

ASTM A 240ASTM A 302ASTM A 353ASTM A 387ASTM A 516ASTM A 517

ASTM B 96ASTM B 127

ASTM B 162ASTM B171ASTM B 333ASTM B 409ASTM B 424ASTM B 434ASTM B 435ASTM B 443ASTM B 575

BS 1501, Part 3

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 20

(c) Rods, bars and sections

AS/NZS 1567AS/NZS 1865AS/NZS 1866AS/NZS 3679

ASTM A 479ASTM B 160ASTM B 164ASTM B 166

ASTM B 211ASTM B 408ASTM B 425ASTM B 446

BS 1502

(d) Castings

AS 1565AS 1830AS 1831AS 1832

AS 1833AS 1874

ASTM A 216

ASTM A 217ASTM A 276ASTM A 351ASTM A 352

BS 1490BS 3071

(e) Forgings

AS 1448

ASTM A 105

ASTM A 181ASTM A 182ASTM A 336

ASTM A 350

ASTM B 381

ASTM B 564

BS 1503

(f) Fittings

AS 3672AS 3673AS 3688

AS/NZS 2280AS/NZS 2544

ANSI/ASMEB16.9


ASTM A 420

BS 143BS 1640BS 1740BS 3799

MSS SP 97

(g) Pressure gauges

AS 1349

(h) Valves

AS 1271AS 1628

ASTM A 182

API STD 600API STD 602API STD 603

API STD 606

ANSI/ASME B16.10ANSI/ASME B16.34

BS 1414BS 1868BS 1873

BS 1963BS 5150BS 5151BS 5152BS 5153BS 5154BS 5155BS 5156

BS 5157BS 5158BS 5159BS 5160BS 5352BS 5353BS 6759

(i) Flanges

AS 2129AS 4087

AS/NZS 4331


BS 1560BS 3293

MSS SP-44

(j) Bolting and gaskets

AS 2528

AS/NZS 1111AS/NZS 1112


ASTM A 108ASTM A 193

ASTM A 194ASTM A 307ASTM A 320ASTM A 325ASTM A 449

BS 4882

(k) Welding consumablesAny welding consumables complying with AS/NZS 3992.

COPYRIGHT

21 AS 4041 — 1998

(l) Any valve of fitting complying with Standards acceptable to ANSI/ASME B31.1 andB31.3 and BS 806.

(m) Refrigeration system components

Valves, fittings and controls acceptable to ANSI/ASME B31.5.

(n) Plastic and non-metallic components

AS 1460 AS/NZS 1477 AS/NZS 4129(Int) AS/NZS 4130

2.2.2 Materials and components complying with Standards not nominated in thisStandard Where a material conforming to one of the Standards in Clause 2.2.1 is notavailable, then, subject to acceptance by the parties concerned where specified on the order,alternative materials and components not complying with a Standard listed in Clause 2.2.1may be used provided that they comply with the requirements of a relevant specification ofthe British Standards Institution (BSI), the American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME), Euronorm, or other specification for material of equivalent grade and quality.

2.2.3 Alternative product form Where there is no Standard for a particular product formof a wrought material but there is a nominated Standard for other product forms, that productform may be used, provided that it is in compliance with the following:

(a) The chemical, mechanical and physical properties, heat treatment requirements, and anyrequirements for deoxidation or grain size conform to those in the nominated Standard.The design strength values to be used shall be those for the nominated Standard in theappropriate thickness range.

(b) The manufacturing procedures, tolerances, tests, and marking are in accordance witha nominated Standard for the same product form of a similar material.

(c) The nominated Standards in Item (a) and Item (b) are compatible in all respects, e.g.testing and welding requirements in the one form are appropriate for the materialspecified in the other form.

(d) The manufacturer’s test reports shall make reference to the Standards used to producethe material, and shall make reference to this Clause (2.2.3).

(e) The thickness range is comparable with the nominated Standard.

2.2.4 Limitations for the application of pipe and steel identified by specification orlabel as structural only Pipe or steel, identified by specification or label as structural maybe used for pressure containment in accordance with the applicable Clauses of this Standardfor Class 3 and as follows:

(a) The actual tensile strength shall be lower than 560 MPa and tensile properties shall bemeasured transversely if pipe diameter is greater or equal to DN 250.

(b) The actual analysis (or ladle analysis if available) shall be less than the following:

Element PercentageC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.25P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.04S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.04Carbon equivalent (Clause 2.4.6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.45

(c) Mechanical and chemical tests shall be recorded on test certificates identified with theproduct.

(d) If pipe, it shall have been pressure tested at the shop prior to fabrication to 60%Re.

(e) The steel shall be free from lamination.

(f) Plate used for flanges shall not be thicker than 40 mm.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 22

Pipe or steel identified by specification or label as structural may be used for non-pressurecontainment in accordance with this Standard, provided that the carbon equivalent is lessthan 0.45.

Compliance with pipe specification given in Clause 2.2.1 overrides any structuralidentification.

2.2.5 Components, other than pipe, for which there are no Standards A component,other than pipe, for which there is no Standard shall be qualified.

NOTE: Components may be qualified by tests or investigations (or both) that demonstrate to thesatisfaction of the parties concerned that the component is suitable and safe for the proposedservice.

2.2.6 Reclaimed components complying with a nominated StandardA reclaimedcomponent may be re-used provided that the component—

(a) was manufactured to a nominated Standard, and for Class 1 and 2 piping its materialcertificate is available; or

(b) upon inspection, is found to—

(i) have adequate thickness and shape and be free of unacceptable imperfections;and

(ii) have all welds, other than the longitudinal or spiral weld in pipe, complyingwith this Standard; and

(c) its use is accepted by the parties concerned.

Pipe shall be cleaned and inspected to determine its acceptability, freedom from deleteriouscorrosion, distortion, and mechanical or metallurgical damage.

A component, other than pipe, shall be cleaned and examined and, if necessary,reconditioned, and tested to ensure that it is sound, free of unacceptable imperfection, andsuitable for the proposed service.

An assessment shall be made of the effects of any adverse operating conditions, e.g. creepor high stress reversals (both thermal and mechanical), under which the component has beenpreviously used. Where this assessment shows that the component is not adversely affected,the component may be used, provided that it is hydrostatically tested (see Clause 2.2.9).

2.2.7 Material and components not fully identified A material or component whichcannot be fully identified with a nominated Standard may be used for pressure provided thatit can be demonstrated that the material or component—

(a) has the chemical composition and the mechanical properties specified in a nominatedStandard;

(b) has dimensions comparable with a nominated Standard;

(c) has been inspected;

(d) has been hydrostatically tested where practicable (see Clause 2.2.9); and

(e) is suitable for the proposed service, and for welding if appropriate; and

(f) is acceptable to the parties concerned.

2.2.8 Unidentified materials and components A material or component which cannot beidentified with a nominated Standard or by a manufacturer’s test certificate may be used fornon-pressure parts (i.e. parts not subject to stress due to pressure, such as supporting lugs)provided that each item is otherwise suitable for the intended service.

COPYRIGHT

23 AS 4041 — 1998

Where an unidentified material or component is to be welded directly onto apressure-containing component, it shall be capable of being welded satisfactorily withoutimpairing the properties of the pressure-containing component. (See also Clause 2.11.1.)

NOTE: Where tests are required to demonstrate this, the type, method and criteria of acceptanceshall be subject to agreement between the parties concerned.

2.2.9 Hydrostatic test A hydrostatic test (or non-destructive examination) shall be carriedout on components, the strength of which may have been reduced by corrosion or otherdeterioration, and on pipe or components manufactured to a Standard which does not specifythe manufacturer’s hydrostatic test. The test may be carried out either on the individual itemin a test similar to a manufacturer’s test or, when the item has been incorporated into thepiping system after erection, to at least the test pressure required to establish the maximumdesign pressure for which the item will be used in service. Where appropriate, the hydrostatictest may be replaced either by 100 percent radiography or ultrasonic testing where agreedbetween the parties concerned.

2.2.10 Specially tested materials Material which does not comply with this Clause (2.2)may be used provided that—

(a) the material is shown by special tests to be equally suitable for the particularapplication as a similar material which complies with a nominated Standard;

(b) the type, method, and criteria of acceptance of any special test shall be agreed betweenthe parties concerned; and

(c) the use of specially tested materials is agreed between the parties concerned.

NOTES:

1 These special tests may include chemical analysis, mechanical tests, and non-destructiveexamination.

2 See also Clause 2.2.2, Clause 2.2.3, Clause 2.7 and Clause 2.8.

2.3 LIMITATIONS ON MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

2.3.1 General A material or a component which is in compliance with a nominatedmaterial or component Standard shall be used within the limitations specified in the Standardand the design. The grades or types of material shall be limited to those shown inClause 2.2.1 and Appendix D, and the application shall be limited in accordance withClauses 2.6, 2.7, 2.11, and 3.14.2 and Appendix D, and any other limitation of this Standard.

2.3.2 Ductile iron pipe and fittings Ductile iron pipe to AS/NZS 2280 is given a pressurerating in its material Standard. Its use is covered in Clause 2.6.3.4 and is not listed inAppendix D.

2.4 PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

2.4.1 General Physical, mechanical and other relevant properties of material used for thedesign and fabrication shall be as specified in this clause. Materials are allocated a base metalgroup number. This base metal group number facilitates specification of welding, heattreatment and non-destructive examination requirements. For details see AS/NZS 3992 andAS 4037.

2.4.2 Mechanical properties Mechanical properties of materials nominated in thisStandard shall be as shown in the material Standard (see also Appendix D) or, where aproperty is not shown or material is not included, reference shall be made to an appropriateStandard or an authoritative source or it shall be determined by test.

2.4.3 Thermal expansion The change in length due to thermal effects shall be as shownin Appendix E or, for materials not included, shall be obtained by reference to anauthoritative source.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 24

2.4.4 Young modulus Young modulus shall be as shown in Appendix F, or for materialsnot included, shall be obtained by reference to an authoritative source.

2.4.5 Poisson ratio Poisson ratio shall be taken as 0.3 for all metals at all temperatures,but a more accurate figure may be used if this is available or required. For other materials,reference shall be made to an authoritative source.

2.4.6 Weldability Material for Classes 1 and 2 piping, which is to be welded, shall besupplied with a certificate identifying the pipe batch and showing the chemical analysis and,for carbon and carbon manganese steels, the carbon equivalent. The carbon equivalent shallbe calculated using the following equation:

. . . 2.4.6

where C, Mn, Cr, Mo, V, Ni and Cu represent the percentage by weight of theparticular element.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS The identification ofmaterials and components shall be in accordance with AS 4458.

2.6 LIMITATIONS ON APPLICATION

2.6.1 General Materials and components specified for piping shall be suitable for thespecified pressure, temperature, fluid, and other service conditions and for the method offabrication.

Materials and components shall be used within the limitations shown in this Clause (2.6),Clause 2.3, and Appendix D.

NOTE: Materials may be used at temperatures higher or lower than those specified in this Standardonly by agreement between the parties concerned and after appropriate examinations or tests, orboth, have established that the material is safe for the service conditions and provides the samelevel of safety implied in this Standard.

2.6.2 Deterioration of materials and components An assessment shall be made on thedeterioration of materials or components during the design life. Materials and componentsshall be selected so that they are suitable for the service conditions. Attention shall be givento the adverse effects of creep, fatigue, stress corrosion, erosion, corrosion, products ofcorrosion, and other forms of deterioration resulting from the effect of service conditions.Consideration should be also given to internal weld bead or other shape changes and fluidvelocity for possible effect on corrosion.

2.6.3 Materials for ambient and high temperature service

2.6.3.1 General Materials shall be suitable for ambient and high-temperature serviceconditions. The temperature of application shall not exceed the highest value for which adesign stress is given in Appendix D, except as provided for in Clauses 2.6.1 and 3.4.

NOTE: This Clause (2.6.3) notes, among other things, some of the difficulties that may beencountered when materials are used at high temperatures.

2.6.3.2 Carbon and low and medium alloy steelsCarbon, carbon-manganese and low andmedium alloy steels shall be used only after suitable provision has been made in the designfor the following:

(a) During long-term exposure above 425°C, the possible conversion of carbides tographite, in carbon steel, carbon-manganese steel, manganese-vanadium steel,carbon-silicon steel, and low alloy nickel steels.

(b) During long-term exposure at temperatures above 470°C, the possible conversion ofcarbides to graphite in carbon-molybdenum steel, manganese-molybdenum- vanadiumsteel and chromium-vanadium steel.

(c) Above 480°C, the advantages of silicon or aluminium killed carbon steel.

COPYRIGHT

25 AS 4041 — 1998

(d) At high temperatures, the loss of thickness due to scaling.

(e) The susceptibility to undesirable intercrystalline penetration of steel particularly undersimultaneous presence of applied or residual tensile stress and molten metal contactsuch as zinc, lead, tin or copper and their compounds at similarly elevatedtemperatures. Refer to Clause 2.7 for components in corrosive service.

(f) 100% radiographic examination of the weld in alloy longitudinal welded pipe to beoperated in the creep range.

(g) The need to consider the requirements of AS/NZS 3788 for in-service inspection ofpiping in the creep range.

2.6.3.3 High alloy steels High alloy steels shall be used only after suitable provision hasbeen made in the design for the following:

(a) The susceptibility to intercrystalline corrosion of austenitic steels, following exposureat temperatures between 425°C and 870°C, unless stabilized or low carbon grades areused.

(b) The susceptibility to brittleness of ferritic stainless steels at temperatures above 370°C.

(c) The possibility of stress-corrosion cracking of austenitic stainless steels when exposedto chlorides and other halides either internally or externally in the presence of appliedor residual tensile stress, e.g. salt contaminated water used for hydrostatic testing whichis subsequently heated above approximately 70°C. Such corrosion can result from theincorrect selection or misapplication of thermal insulation.

(d) The susceptibility of undesirable penetration of ferritic and austenitic steels on contactwith zinc, lead or copper above their melting points or with many lead, zinc, andcopper compounds at similarly elevated temperatures.

NOTE: For guidance, see WTIA TN 13.

2.6.3.4 Ductile iron and other iron castings Pipe and pressure retaining components madefrom ductile iron, grey iron or malleable iron shall comply with the thickness limits ofClause 3.14.5 and ductile iron shall comply with Table 2.6.3.4.

2.6.3.5 Copper and copper alloysCopper and copper alloys shall be used only aftersuitable provision has been made in the design for the following:

(a) The possibility of dezincification of brass alloys.

(b) The susceptibility to stress-corrosion cracking of copper-based alloys in certainenvironments.

(c) The possibility of unstable acetylide formation when alloys having more than 70%copper are exposed to acetylene.

2.6.3.6 Aluminium and aluminium alloysAluminium and aluminium alloys shall be usedonly after suitable provision has been made in the design for the following:

(a) Above 65°C, the susceptibility of aluminium alloys 5083, 5086, 5154 and 5456 toexfoliation or intergranular attack.

(b) Above 350°C, the susceptibility of some aluminium and aluminium alloys toembrittlement.

(c) The possibility of corrosion from concrete, mortar, lime, plaster or other alkalinematerials used in buildings or structures.

(d) The compatibility of compounds used to prevent seizing and galling in aluminiumthreaded joints.

(e) The low resistance to fire of unprotected aluminium and aluminium alloys.

(f) The susceptibility to sustained load cracking of some aluminium alloys, e.g. 6351and 6061 under some conditions.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 26

Extruded aluminium pipe for Class 1 piping shall have been made by the mandrel methodonly.

2.6.3.7 Nickel and nickel alloys Nickel and nickel alloys shall be used only after suitableprovision has been made in the design for the following:

(a) At temperatures above 315°C, the susceptibility to grain boundary attack of nickel andnickel-based alloys not containing chromium when exposed to even small quantities ofsulfur during fabrication or service.

(b) At temperatures above 595°C, under reducing conditions and above 760°C underoxidizing conditions, the susceptibility to grain boundary attack of nickel-based alloyscontaining chromium.

(c) The possibility of stress-corrosion cracking of nickel-copper alloy (70Ni-30Cu) inhydrofluoric acid vapour if the alloy is highly stressed or contains residual stressescaused by or resulting from forming or welding.

TABLE 2.6.3.4

LIMITS OF APPLICATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND COMPONENTS

Material Application

Maximumdesign

pressureMPa

Design temperature °C

Min.(Note 1)

Max.

Ductile iron(Nodular spheroidal)

SME ≥ 15%(see Note 2)

1 Lethal fluid or Class 1 piping Not permitted2 Flammable, toxic, harmful to

human tissue (except steam andhot water)

7 −30 230

3 Steam and hot water 7 −30 3504 Gases which are non-flammable,

non-toxic and non-harmful tohuman tissue

7 −30 350

5 Low hazard liquids 10 0 50

Ductile iron(Nodular spheroidal)

SME ≥ 15%(see Note 2)

1 Lethal fluid or Class 1 piping Not permitted2 Flammable, toxic, harmful to

human tissue (except steam andhot water)

1.1 −30 150

3 Steam and hot water 1.8 −30 2504 Gases which are non-flammable,

non-toxic and non-harmful tohuman tissue

1.8 −30 250

5 Low hazard liquids 4 0 506 Severe cyclic or shock service Not permitted

NOTES:

1 Austenitic ductile iron conforming to AS 1833 or ASTM A 571 may be used below −30°C down to thetemperature of the impact test conducted to AS 1833 or ASTM A 571, but not below −196°C.

2 SME = Specified minimum percentage elongation measured on gauge length = 4√So or equivalent.

2.6.3.8 Titanium and titanium alloys Titanium and titanium alloys shall be usedabove 315°C only after suitable provision has been made in the design for the possibility ofdeterioration of these materials.

COPYRIGHT

27 AS 4041 — 1998

2.6.4 Fittings A threaded, flanged, socket-welding or butt-welding fitting which complieswith a nominated Standard may be used within the material, size, pressure and temperaturelimitations of that Standard.

2.6.5 Valves

2.6.5.1 General A valve which complies with a nominated Standard shall be used withinthe material, pressure, and temperature limitations of that Standard except where otherwisepermitted in this Standard (see Clause 2.6.3).

2.6.5.2 Valve bodies For fluid types 1 and 2 grey cast iron, malleable cast iron, andspheroidal or nodular graphite cast iron with an elongation of less than 15% on a gaugelength L = 5.65√So shall not be used in valve bodies.

Where the design pressure does not exceed 7 MPa, a valve having body components madeof spheroidal or nodular graphite cast iron may be used at pressures up to 80% of designpressure for comparable steel valves at their listed temperatures.

Any spheroidal or nodular graphite or grey cast iron part of a valve shall not be subjected towelding.

2.6.5.3 Drain valves Valves for drain piping should be of the straight-through type or bespecifically designed for the purpose.

2.6.5.4 Valve trim Valve trim shall be suitable for the temperature range and the fluid.

2.6.5.5 Valve spindles Valves with inside screw spindles should not be used in corrosiveservice or where deposits may develop.

2.6.5.6 Bypasses A bypass (where required) may be integral with the valve or connectedto the piping adjacent to the valve. The materials and components of the bypass shall besuitable for the same design conditions as the valve.

2.6.6 Flanges For limitations and requirements of flanges. See Clause 3.24.4.

2.6.7 Bolting for flanges for limitations and requirements of bolting for flanges. Seeclause 3.24.4.5.

2.6.8 Gaskets See Clause 3.24.4.4.

2.6.9 Material for forming and bending Material that may be subjected to forming andbending shall be suitable for these processes, and shall comply with the relevant requirementsof AS 4458.

2.6.10 Limit of application of pipe made by the CW (BW) process Pipe made by theCW(BW) process, i.e. continuous weld and furnace butt weld (see Table 1.3) to AS 1074 orany other specification is limited by this code to Class 3 and only Medium and Heavy pipesare permitted. The minimum thickness may be calculated using the appropriate stress valuefrom Table D2, a joint factor of 0.6 and a class design factor of 0.6. Alternatively this codeassigns to Medium and Heavy a pressure rating of 2 MPa up to 250°C.

2.7 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS FOR CORROSIVE SERVICE In the selectionof material and components for corrosive service, consideration shall be given to thepossibility of general or local wastage, corrosion, stress corrosion and corrosion fatigue.Suitable provisions shall be made in the design for the following:

(a) At temperatures above approximately 50°C, the susceptibility to stress-corrosioncracking of steels on contact with ammonia, chlorides, amines, hydrogen sulfide orother solutions. Refer to NACE Standard MR 0175 for H2S cracking.

NOTE: Consideration should be given to the benefit of postweld heat treatment to reduce thepossibility of stress corrosion cracking when welded steel is used.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 28

(b) The possibility of hydrogen damage when piping is exposed to hydrogen or to aqueousacid solutions under certain temperature and pressure conditions.

(c) Where the fluid is alkaline or caustic, the possibility of embrittlement, particularly inconditions where concentration by evaporation can occur.

(d) Where the fluid is diesel oil, the possibility of deterioration of galvanized pipe orcomponents.

(e) Anhydrous ammonia may cause stress corrosion cracking of steel in the presence ofspecific quantities of oxygen and other gases.

Anhydrous ammonia may be carried in all steel pipes listed in Appendix D except thehigh tensile pipe quenched and tempered to ASTM A 517. However, this grade maybe used satisfactorily if the ammonia has 200 p.p.m. of water minimum added.

It is good practice to stress relieve all welds in ammonia piping irrespective of the steelstrength.

2.8 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS Mitigation of corrosion due to electrolytic reaction andstress due to the different thermal expansions shall be considered when adjacent piping ofdissimilar materials are being specified.

2.9 BACKING RINGS AND FUSIBLE INSERTS

2.9.1 Permanent backing rings Permanent backing rings (i.e. those that are not removedafter welding) made from bar, strip or pipe shall be compatible with the parent material.

For high alloy steels with special metallurgy this means using the parent material e.g. 9% Cr,12% Cr, stainless steels, 3% Ni and 9% Ni. For high temperature steam pipe of 21/4 Cr andlower grades, a backing ring one grade lower than the parent material is acceptable.

2.9.2 Temporary backing rings Temporary backing rings (i.e. those that are removedafter welding) shall be made from pipe, bar or strip, and the material shall have a similarchemical composition to that of the parent material; or for carbon and alloy steel with alloysless than 3 percent, shall be made from carbon steel with a carbon content not greater than0.26 percent and a sulfur content not greater than 0.04 percent.

However, backing rings made from dissimilar non-ferrous or non-metallic materials may beused provided that the welding procedure is qualified.

2.9.3 Fusible inserts Fusible inserts should be made from materials having chemicalcompositions such that, when fused with the material, they will produce weld metal that isof similar chemical composition to that of the parent material.

2.10 BRAZING MATERIALS See Clause 3.24.8.

2.11 MATERIALS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE

2.11.1 General Materials and components for pressure parts, and for non-pressure partswelded directly to pressure parts, for low temperature service or where it is required to guardagainst brittle fracture, or where the fluid is lethal, shall comply with the appropriaterequirements of this Clause (2.11).

If the operating temperature in normal service or due to malfunction is lower than 0°C, thedesign shall comply with this Clause (2.11).

These requirements need not apply to non-pressure parts such as supports if they are notattached to a pressure part by welding nor otherwise an integral part of a pressure-containingcomponent.

COPYRIGHT

29 AS 4041 — 1998

In this Clause (2.11), ‘all forms’ means plates, strip, seamless and welded pipe, bars, castingsand forgings; but bolting and weld metal are excluded.

Untested steel permitted by this Clause (2.11) shall have a carbon content of less than0.30 percent. For impact tested steel, the impact test result supersedes the need for specialcarbon limit.

This Clause also requires steel when tested to possess minimum of 27J, 31J, or 40J or0.38 mm lateral expansion according to the tensile strength (see Table 2.11.2). For pipe toASTM A 333 and A 334 (pipe for low temperature service), higher Charpy energyrequirements than specified in those Standards apply.

Piping to Class 3 shall be designed as if for use at 20°C below the design minimumtemperature (see Clause 2.11.4) by adjustment to the MDMT.

NOTE: AS/NZS 3992 specifies requirements for impact testing for the heat-affected zone and weldmetal as part of welding procedure qualification tests for welds between parts for which thisStandard requires impact testing.

2.11.2 Selection of suitable material for low temperature service

2.11.2.1 General Suitable material may be selected for each component in the pipingsystem by the provisions given in the following:

(a) Carbon, carbon-manganese steel in all forms except bolting and weld metal (materialGroups A1, A2 and A3) which are treated as one group (see Clause 2.11.2.2).

(b) Alloy steels and non-ferrous metals (see Clause 2.11.2.3).

(c) Small diameter heat exchanger tubing and very thin steel pipes and tubes (seeClause 2.11.2.4).

(d) Cast iron and ductile iron (see Clause 2.11.2.5).

(e) Steel bolting (see Clause 2.11.2.6).

(f) Non-metallic pipe and components (see Clause 2.11.2.7).

2.11.2.2 Material Groups A1, A2 and A3 Figure 2.11.2(A) relates MDMT to materialreference thickness and testing temperature for these steels in the as-welded condition.

Similarly, Figure 2.11.2(B) relates MDMT to material reference thickness and testingtemperature for these steels in the postweld heat treated condition.

To qualify for application to one of the curves, the steel must comply with Table 2.11.2(A)and its foot notes, and, Table 2.11.2(B).

Curve +20°C materials are exempt from impact tests. Additionally, API 5L X42 and X52steel pipe may be exempt from tests for curves 0°C and minus 10°C, respectively, within thelimits imposed by Table 2.11.2(A).

In the case of a steel (Rm > 470) which does not have the required 40J but has a measuredvalue greater than 27J, a curve 10°C higher may be used or the steel rejected.

For pipe and component specifications with Charpy requirements other than 27J, 31J or 40J,if the achieved value is between 20J and 50J, an equivalent test temperature may be assignedby adjustment on the basis of 1.5J per kelvin.

Example 1:

Pipe tested to 21J on Rm 400 MPa steel at −20°C. This may be regarded as equivalent to 27Jat −16°C.

Example 2:

ASTM A 333, Grade 6 (Rm 415) which calls for 18J and achieves 19J at −45°C cannot beadjusted to 27J at −39°C.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 30

Suitable material may be selected by the following procedure—

(a) determine the required MDMT by reference to Clause 2.11.4;

(b) determine the material reference thickness (Tm) by reference to Clause 2.11.5;

(c) enter the values obtained in Steps (a) and (b) above, in Figure 2.11.2(A) orFigure 2.11.2(B) as appropriate. The curves at, or below, the intersection of thesevalues gives the permitted steels (and any necessary impact tests); and

(d) from Table 2.11.2(A) and Table 2.11.2(B) select the steel type or pipe specification forthe curve noted in Step (c).

When Table 2.11.2 exempts steel from impact tests, the material reference thickness(Clause 2.11.5) and the assigned curve give the lowest MDMT permitted which must not bewarmer than that required in Clause 2.11.4.

TABLE 2.11.2(A)

QUALIFYING CONDITIONS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE APPLICATION—STEEL ALL FORMS (EXCEPT BOLTING AND WELD METAL)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Curve (SeeFigure 2.11.2)

Standardimpact

temperature

Standard impact test value (J)Limits of

steelMaximumthickness

Carbonequivalentmax. (cast

orproduct)

Tensile strength, MPa

°C °C

Specified min.,Rm ≤ 450(Note 8)

Specified min.,Rm > 450 ≤ 470

(Note 9)

Specified min.,Rm > 470(Note 10) mm

+20 No test No test No test No test None None —

0 No test No test No test Not applicable X42 Finegrained

75 0.36

0 0 27 31 40 None None —

−10 No test Not applicable No test Not applicable

X52 Finegrained

and microalloyed

13 0.27

−10 −10 27 31 40 None None —

−20 −20 27 31 40 None None —

−30 −30 27 31 40 None None —

−40 −40 27 31 40 None None —

−50 −50 27 31 40 None None —

Columns 3, 4, 5, 6—J values are minimum average values.

Column 3— additionally an actual maximumRm limit of the lesser of 560 MPa and any maximumRm in the productspecification applies.



Column 6— fine grained steels produced to fine grained practice (AS 1733 grain size 7 or finer) include the following:

(a) Fully killed (Si-A1 or A1) steels.

(b) Controlled rolled steels.

(c) Steels with grain refining elements added, e.g. API 5L X52.

Column 8— see Clause 2.4.6 for carbon equivalent equation

COPYRIGHT

31 AS 4041 — 1998

TABLE 2.11.2(B)

MATERIAL DESIGN MINIMUM TEMPERATURES (ALL FORMS EXCEPTBOLTING AND WELD METAL) FOR CARBON AND CARBON

MANGANESE STEEL PIPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ASME IXP

No.

Steelgroup

Generaltype

Specific-ation

Grade

Rm

min.

Material design minimum temperature (MDMT)

If not impact tested If impact tested on10 × 10 mm

specimenMPa Curve Steel restrictions

1 A1, A2& A3

All Any Any — + 20° C% = 0.30 max. Not applicable

1 A1 C, C-Mn API 5L X42 413 0°C Fine grainedt ≤ 75 mm

Not applicable

1 A1 C, C-Mn API 5L X42 413 Notapplicable

Not applicable Curve testtemperature for 27J

1 A2 C, C-Mn ASTMA 106

C 485 Notapplicable


— A3 C, C-Mn API 5L X52 455 −10°C Fine grained,micro alloyed

t ≤ 13 mm CE%≤ 0.27

Not applicable

— A3 C, C-Mn API 5L X52 455 Notapplicable

Not applicable Curve −10°C and31J

— A1 C, C-Mn BS 3603 410 410 Notapplicable

Not applicable Curve −50°C and27J

— A1 C, C-Mn ASTMA 333

and A 334

1 380 Notapplicable


— A1 C, C-Mn ASTMA 333

and A 334

6 415 Notapplicable


LEGEND:

CE = Carbon equivalent (see Clause 2.4.6).

t = thickness

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 32

FIGURE 2.11.2(A) CARBON AND CARBON-MANGANESE STEELS FORLOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE—AS-WELDED

(See also Tables 2.11.2(A) and (B))

COPYRIGHT

33 AS 4041 — 1998

FIGURE 2.11.2(B) CARBON AND CARBON-MANGANESE STEELS FORLOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE—POSTWELD HEAT TREATED

(See also Tables 2.11.2(A) and (B))

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 34

2.11.2.3 Alloy steels and non-ferrous metals (all forms excluding bolting and weldmetal The MDMT for alloy steels and non-ferrous metals (all forms excluding bolting andweld metal) is given in Table 2.11.2(C).

Suitable material for this subgroup may be selected as follows:

(a) With test

(i) Determine the minimum operating temperature (MOT) for the component byreference to Clause 2.11.3; and

(ii) select permitted material (and any necessary impact tests) having a MDMT notwarmer than MOT, by reference to Table 2.11.2(C).

(b) Exempt from tests

(i) Where Table 2.11.2(C) specifies a curve, refer to the curve in Figure 2.11.2(A)or (B), enter the appropriate graph at the material reference, thickness(Clause 2.11.5) to determine the warmest MDMT permitted and compare it tothat determined from Table 2.11.2(C).

(ii) Where Table 2.11.2(C) specifies an MDMT numeral, this is compared directlywith the required MDMT from Clause 2.11.4 and Figures 2.11.2(A) or (B) donot apply.

2.11.2.4 Very thin steel pipes and tubes (including small heat-exchanger tubes)Wherethere is insufficient thickness to obtain a 2.5 mm Charpy V notch specimen, that materialmay be used at a temperature either—

(a) greater than or equal to that permitted for an non-impact tested material of theequivalent type; or

(b) qualified by test on an equivalent but thicker material.

NOTE: The material may be qualified by an agreed non-standard test.

Alternatively, impact testing is not required for C and C-Mn steels 10 mm and thinnerprovided that the required MDMT is not lower than the corresponding values inTable 2.11.2.4. Welding in this Table applies to both welding in fabrication and welding inpipe manufacture.

TABLE 2.11.2.4

MATERIAL DESIGN MINIMUMTEMPERATURE—THIN MATERIALS*

Thickness As weldedPostweld heat

treatedUnwelded

mm °C °C °C

10 −15 −30 −70

8 −20 −35 −75

6 −25 −40 −80

4 −40 −55 −95

≤2 −55 −70 −110

* Taken from BS 5500

COPYRIGHT

35 AS 4041—1998

TABLE 2.11.2(C)

MATERIAL DESIGN MINIMUM TEMPERATURE (MDMT) FOR ALLOY STEELS, NON-FERROUS METALS AND CAST IRONS(ALL FORMS) EXCEPT BOLTING AND WELD METAL)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PNo.

Steelgroup General type Specification Grade Rm

min.

MDMT

If not impact tested If impact tested(10 mm × 10 mm specimen)

Low alloy steels with obligatory Charpy testing (pipe specifications listed)1/4 Ni ASTM A 333 10 550 Not applicable Test at −45°C for 40J

9B E 21/2 Ni ASTM A 333 and A 334 7 450 Not applicable Test at −70°C for 27J

ASTM A 333 and A 334 9 435 Not applicable Test at −70°C for 27J

3 Ni ASTM A 333 and A 334 3 450 Not applicable Test at −100°C for 27J

1 Ni-1 Cr ASTM A 333 4 415 Not applicable Test at −90°C for 27J

11A F 9 Ni ASTM A 333 and A 334 8 690 Not applicable Test at −195°C for 0.38 mmlateral expansion

E 31/2 Ni BS 3603 503 440 Not applicable Test at −100°C for 27J

F 9 Ni BS 3603 509 490 Not applicable Test at −196°C for 40J

Low alloy steels (unlisted product specifications)

E 3 Ni Any Any — Curve, −30°C Test temperature giving 27, 31,40J depending onRm

B, C, D1, D2 Various Any Any — Curve + 20°Cbut MDMT

≥ 0°C

Test temperature giving 27, 31,40J or 0.38 mm lateralexpansion

High alloy steels (product specification listed)

11B G Quenched and tempered ASTM A 517 All 795 Not applicable Test temperature giving0.38 mm lateral expansion

6 H Martensitic ASTM A 268 409410

380415

Curve + 20°Cbut MDMT

≥ −30°C

Test temperature giving 27J on10 × 10

7 J Ferritic ASTM A 268 405430

415415

Curve + 20°Cbut MDMT

≥ −30°C

Test temperature giving 27J on10 × 10

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 36

TABLE 2.11.2(c) (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PNo.


min.

MDMT


High alloy steels (product specification listed)(continued)

8 K Austenitic (seamless) or welded pipesolution heat treated)

ASTM A 312 304 515 −255°C

Test temperature giving40J or 0.38 mm lateralexpansion

ASTM A 312 304L 485 −255°C

ASTM A 312 347 515 −255°C

ASTM A 312 321 515 −200°C

ASTM A 312 316 515 −200°C

ASTM A 312 316L 485 −200°C

ASTM A 312 317 515 −200°C

ASTM A 312 310S 515 −200°C

ASTM A 312 309S 515 −200°C

There is no temperature limit for these austenitic steels if the operating stress is less than 50 MPa

L High chromium ASTM A 268 446 485 Not applicable Test temperature giving 40J

M Ferritic austenitic ASTM A 789 S31803 620 Not applicable Test temperature giving 40J

High alloy steels (unlisted product identification)

— H Martensitic Any 405, 410, 429 —Curve + 20°Cbut MDMT ≥−30°C

Test temperature giving27, 31, 40J or .38 mmlateral expansiondepending ofRm

J Ferritic Any 410S —

M Ferritic austenitic Any 31803 —

K Austenitic stainless steel C > 0.1% Any Any — −30°C Test temperature giving 40J

K Austenitic stainlessHeat treated below 900°C

Any Any — Not applicable Test temperature giving 40J

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

37 AS 4041—1998

TABLE 2.11.2(c) (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PNo.


min.

MDMT


Non-ferrous metals

— — Aluminium alloys — wrought — — — MDMT −270°C Not applicable

Aluminium alloys — cast — — — MDMT −198°C Not applicable

Copper, copper alloys — — — MDMT −198°C Not applicable

Nickel, nickel alloys — — — MDMT −198°C Not applicable

Titanium, zirconium ASTM B 265 — — MDMT −60°C Test temperature for20J on 10 × 10

Cast irons

— — Ductile iron AS 1831 Any — −30°C Not applicable

Austenitic ductile AS 1833 Any — −30°C Test temperature giving 20J

Austenitic ductile ASMT A 571 Any — −30°C Test temperature giving 20J

Grey iron AS 1830 Any — −30°C Test temperature giving 20J

Malleable iron AS 1830 Any — −30°C Test temperature giving 20J

Cast irons — galvanized — all castirons

— — — −10°C Test temperature giving 20J

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 38

2.11.2.5 Cast iron The MDMT for cast iron is given in Table 2.11.2(C).

Ductile iron pipe to AS/NZS 2280 is not recommended for temperatures below 0°C. Victaulicjointing systems and similar systems using cast iron couplings should be used only in thetemperature range recommended by the manufacturers of the total system.

2.11.2.6 Bolting materials For bolting materials—

(a) determine the MOT by reference to Clause 2.11.3; and

(b) select material permitted for bolting having a listed minimum operating temperature nothigher than MOT by reference to Table G1 in Appendix G.

For bolting to operate at temperatures lower than the listed MOT, the testing requirementsshall include impact testing, which shall comply with the requirements given inTable 2.11.2(B) and Table 2.11.2(C) for the equivalent material type strength and thicknessat the minimum operating temperature.

2.11.2.7 Non-metallic materials Non-metallic pipe and materials that include bolting, partsof valves, gaskets, packing and similar parts used for low temperature service shall besuitable for service at the MOT. Allowance shall be made for any handling, ageing orembrittlement.

2.11.3 Minimum operating temperature For non-ferrous metals, alloy steels and bolting,the MOT shall be the lowest mean metal temperature through the thickness of the part underconsideration during normal operation, including fluctuations that may occur during normalprocess operations and during start-up and shutdown and malfunction.

The MOT shall be the lowest of the following:

(a) For piping that is thermally insulated externally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . theminimumtemperature of the fluid within the pipe.

(b) For piping that is not thermally insulated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thelower of—

(i) the minimum temperature of the fluid within the pipe; and

(ii) 10°C above the lowest one day mean ambient temperature (LODMAT) wherethe metal may be subjected to this temperature while the piping is underpressure.

Appendix H provides LODMAT data.

Where there is evidence to show that because of radiation, adiabatic expansion or othereffects, Items (a) and (b) will not provide a reliable estimate of minimum operatingtemperature, the method to be used in assessing that temperature shall be agreed andallowance shall be made for any sub-cooling during pressure reduction.

2.11.4 Required material design minimum temperature

2.11.4.1 Lethal fluids Where the contents of piping is lethal, the required MDMTdetermined under this rule shall not exceed 0°C.

2.11.4.2 Class 3 piping The class design factor of 0.60 for Class 3 increases the wallthickness considerably, and the concessions for non-destructive examination require Class 3piping to have an additional margin of −20°C when determining MDMT for Class 3 pipe.

2.11.4.3 MDMT for steel groups A1, A2 and A3The required MDMT for these steels shallbe determined as follows:

(a) General The MDMT for use in Figures 2.11.2(A) and 2.11.2(B) shall be the lowestvalue of the following, adjusted where necessary by reference to Items (b), and (c)below:

COPYRIGHT

39 AS 4041 — 1998

(i) The lowest temperature occurring coincidentally with process condition whichresults in the calculated membrane stress

where

f = design tensile strength at ambient temperature (see Appendix D);design factor is given in Table 1.3, Item 2.3.

(ii) A temperature 10°C warmer than the lowest temperature occurringcoincidentally with process conditions which result in the calculated membranestress being

≥50 MPa but < × class design factor

(iii) A temperature 50°C warmer than the lowest temperature occurringcoincidentally with process conditions which result in the calculated membranestress being <50 MPa for average stress and <100 MPa for peak stress.

The stresses calculated in Item (iii) shall take into account all loadings, such as internaland external pressures, static head, self-weight, thermal stress, bending stress, andexternal loads. Where the piping is likely to be subject to a higher pressure at highertemperatures, e.g. in refrigeration systems with liquefied gases, the material and designshall be suitable for all expected combinations of operating temperatures and pressures.

(b) Adjustment for partial postweld heat treatmentFor Class 1 piping, where the pipelengths contain branches, welded supports, or other welded attachments and the pipecircumferential welds are not postweld heat treated, the MDMT obtained from Item (a),applied to as-welded parts, may be raised a further 15°C, subject to all of thefollowing:

(i) The welded attachment as a subassembly is postweld heat treated prior tocircumferential butt-welding to the pipe.

(ii) Circumferential butt joints are more than 150 mm from attachment welds.

(c) Material for piping subject to shockFor ferritic steels used for piping on transportablevessels or in other applications which may be subjected to severe shock, impact orplastic deformation, an additional margin of −15°C shall be added in the determinationof MDMT.

2.11.4.4 MDMT for all other materials For all other materials, the required MDMT isequal to or less than the MOT (adjusted if appropriate for lethal fluids and Class 3 margin).

2.11.5 Material reference thickness Except for castings the reference thickness (Tm) usedin applying Figure 2.11.2(A) and Figure 2.11.2(B) shall be that thickness designated inFigure 2.11.5, based on the nominal thickness, including any integral cladding or weldoverlay. For castings, the reference thickness shall be the largest actual thickness.

The reference thickness listed in Figure 2.11.5(a), (b), (e), (i) and (j) for the thinner part,branch, or attachment shall extend along the branch or attachment for at least the distanceshown in the figures.

The reference thickness for weld neck flanges, plate and slip-on (or hubbed) flanges, and flatends shall be the greater of one-quarter the thickness of the flange or the flat end, or thethickness of the branch or shell attached thereto (see Figure 2.11.5).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 40

If the distance from the flange, or flat end to the butt weld is not less than four times thethickness of the butt weld, the reference thickness for the as-welded condition shall be thethickness at the edge of the weld preparation.

2.11.6 Impact tests

2.11.6.1 Where required Impact testing of parent metal of pressure parts, and non-pressureparts welded directly to pressure parts, shall apply as follows:

(a) Where the MDMT thickness in Figures 2.11.2(A) and 2.11.2(B) require impact testing.

(b) Where specified in Tables 2.11.2(B) and 2.11.2(C).

See AS/NZS 3992 for impact testing requirements of weld procedure tests.

The longitudinal weld of pipes complying with an appropriate pipe specification for theminimum operating temperature is exempt from impact testing of the weld metal.

Where the pipe is not supplied to such a pipe specification, the weld in welded pipe shall alsobe qualified when Charpy testing of the pipe body is required. The test pieces for SAW pipeshall be transverse to the weld with the base of the notch at the weld centre line with asecond test piece, with the base of the notch in the HAZ (see Figure 2.11.6(A)). The testpieces for ERW pipe may either be transverse as for SAW or longitudinal with the base ofthe notch at the weld centreline (see Figure 2.11.6(B)). In all cases, the base of the notch isto be perpendicular to the pipe surface.

COPYRIGHT

41 AS 4041 — 1998

FIGURE 2.11.5 (in part) MATERIAL REFERENCE THICKNESS (Tm)FOR SELECTION OF MATERIAL

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 42


COPYRIGHT

43 AS 4041 — 1998


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 44


COPYRIGHT

45 AS 4041 — 1998

FIGURE 2.11.6(A) CHARPY TEST PIECE LOCATION AND ORIENTATIONFOR SAW PIPE WELD

FIGURE 2.11.6(B) CHARPY TEST PIECE LOCATIONAND ORIENTATION FOR ERW PIPE

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 46

Certified reports of satisfactory impact tests made by the material manufacturer shall beaccepted as evidence that the material complies with the requirements of this Clause,provided that—

(i) during or following fabrication, the test pieces are representative of the materialsupplied and the material is not subjected to heat treatment or forming operation whichwill materially reduce its impact properties; or

(ii) the materials from which the test specimens were removed were heat treated andformed separately so that they are representative of the materials in the finished state.

If the manufacturer omits the required impact tests, they may be made by the fabricator.

2.11.6.2 Test method Impact tests shall be performed in accordance with AS 1544.2,except as follows:

(a) Lateral expansion tests shall be in accordance with ASTM A 370 (see Table 2.11.2(B)and 2.11.2(C) for use).

(b) Dropweight tests to determine nil-ductility transition temperature (NDTT) shall be inaccordance with AS 1663.

(c) Other tests shall be agreed between the parties concerned.

2.11.6.3 Test specimensThe selection number and location of test specimens shall be asfollows:

(a) Number of Charpy V-notch test specimensThe number and location of CharpyV-notch test specimens shall be selected to represent adequately the material used, andthe selection shall be in accordance with one of the following Standards appropriate tothe product form:

(i) Pipes and tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS3603, ASTM A 333 and A 334.

(ii) Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS1548, AS/NZS 3678.

(iii) Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ASTM A 350 (see Note to Clause 2.11.6.4).

(iv) Castings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ASTM A 352.

(v) Steel bolting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ASTM A 320.

(vi) Pipe fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ASTM A 420.

For quenched and tempered steels (group F), and 9% nickel steels (group G), at leastthree Charpy V-notch test specimens (see Clause 2.11.6.6 for retests and requirementsfor additional test specimens) shall be made from each plate as heat treated, or fromeach heat of bars, pipe, rolled sections, forged parts, or castings included in any oneheat treatment lot. The specimens for plate shall be oriented transverse to the finaldirection of rolling; for circular forgings, the specimens shall be oriented tangentiallyto the circumference, and for pipes, the specimens shall be oriented longitudinally.

For wrought material, unless elsewhere specified three or more Charpy V-notch testspecimens shall be cut with the specimen parallel to the direction of principal hotworking, except as otherwise approved.

The manufacturer of small cast or forged components, other than bolting, may certifya lot of not more than 20 duplicate parts by reporting the results of tests taken on oneset of impact specimens taken from one such component selected at random, providedthat the same specification and heat of material and the same process of production,including heat treatment, were used for all of the lot.

COPYRIGHT

47 AS 4041 — 1998

(b) Charpy V-notch test specimen dimensionsThe standard test specimen shall be 10 mmsquare in cross-section and 55 mm long.

Where the nominal thickness of the material is not less than 20 mm, the machiningshall give the 10 mm thickness from the middle of the material and shall remove allmaterial within 3 mm of the original surfaces.

Where the nominal thickness of the material is less than 20 mm, machining shall givethe 10 mm thickness from the middle and shall remove all material within 1 mm of theoriginal surfaces.

Where the standard test specimen cannot be obtained from the available material, asubsidiary test specimen shall be used; rectangular cross-section and of nominaldimensions 7.5 mm, 5 mm, 2.5 mm or the full nominal thickness which may bemachined to remove surface irregularities, 10 mm wide, and 55 mm long, and havingthe notch cut in one of the narrower faces. The greatest possible thickness shall beobtained.

(c) Dropweight tests The number of dropweight tests shall be as follows:

(i) For plate or pipe thickness of 16 mm and over, one dropweight test (twospecimens) shall be made for each plate that has been heat treated.

(ii) For pipe forgings or castings of 16 mm thickness and over, one dropweight test(two specimens) shall be made for each heat in any one heat treatment lot, usingthe procedure specified in ASTM A 350 for forgings, and ASTM A 352 forcastings.

2.11.6.4 Impact requirements The impact requirements shall be as follows:

(a) Wrought steel The average impact energy value of the set of three 10 mm by 10 mmCharpy test specimens shall be not less than the values given in Table 2.11.2(A), andthe values for individual test specimens shall be not less than 70% of the specifiedminimum average value.

NOTE: The impact energy at a particular temperature is appreciably lower for test specimenscut transverse to the grain (i.e. transverse to the direction of principal hot working) than forpieces cut in the direction of the grain. Where test specimens must be cut transverse to thegrain, the specified minimum impact energy should be reduced. Where appropriate values arenot given in material Specifications, requirements for transverse specimens should be a matterfor agreement between the parties concerned. A multiplier of 0.67 is suggested. Theclassification longitudinal or transverse is particularly difficult to apply to flanges. Test piecelocation at the hub or the rim may be preferred, depending upon relative dimensions but theoriginal rolling direction may be changed in forging. The raw material for forging stock maybe circular, bar or plate. The forging action may be to bend up the hub or to bend up the rim.

Where lateral expansion values are specified, each test piece shall have a minimumlateral expansion opposite the notch of not less than 0.38 mm. This applies regardlessof specimen size.

(b) Attachments The minimum impact energy for non-pressure attachments weldeddirectly to a pressure component shall be not less than that required for the pressurecomponent to which it is attached.

2.11.6.5 Charpy test requirements for subsidiary test specimensFor subsidiary Charpy testspecimens, the energy shall be not less than values given in Table 2.11.2(A) multiplied bythe appropriate equivalent energy factor given in Table 2.11.6.5.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 48

TABLE 2.11.6.5

EQUIVALENT ENERGY FACTORS FOR SUBSIDIARYTEST SPECIMEN FOR IMPACT TESTS

Thickness of test specimenmm

Equivalent energy factor(see Note)

10 (standard) 1.0

7.5 0.8

5.0 0.7

2.5 0.35

NOTE: For thickness between 10 mm, and 2.5 mm, other than shown in theTable, the equivalent energy factors are obtained by linear interpolation.

2.11.6.6 Retests Retest shall apply as follows:

(a) Failure of one test specimenIf the average result of the three Charpy impact testsexceeds the specified minimum average value specified in Table 2.11.2(A) but one testspecimen fails to give the specified minimum individual value, three additional testpieces from the original sample shall be tested. The result shall be added to thosepreviously obtained and a new average calculated. If the average value of six tests isnot less than the specified minimum average, and not more than one result of the sixtests is below the specified individual test value, then the product complies with thisClause (2.11.6 ).

(b) Failure of average tests If the average result of the three impact tests fails to attainthe specified minimum average energy value, or if two of the tests fall below thespecified minimum individual value, the material represented shall be deemed not tocomply with this Clause (2.11.6).

(c) Failure due to test specimen defect or procedure errorWhere failure is the result ofa defect in the specimen or to an error in the test procedure, the result shall bediscarded and another specimen taken and tested.

(d) Failure in lateral expansion test If the value of lateral expansion for one specimenis less than 0.38 mm but not less than 0.25 mm, a retest of three additional specimensmay be made, each of which shall be equal to or exceed 0.38 mm. Such retest shall bemade only when the average value of the three specimens equals or exceeds 0.38 mm.If the required values are not obtained in the retest or if the values in the initial test arebelow the minimum required for retest, the material shall be rejected or may besubmitted to a further heat treatment. After such reheat treatment, three specimens shallbe tested, and the lateral expansion for each shall be not less than 0.38 mm.

(e) Failure in dropweight test If one of the two test specimens fails to meet the no-breakcriterion, two new specimens shall be taken and tested. Both of these specimens shallmeet the no-break criterion or the material shall be rejected. Rejected material may besubmitted to further heat treatment. After such heat treatment, two specimens shall betested and the no-break criterion shall be met.

COPYRIGHT

49 AS 4041 — 1998

S E C T I O N 3 D E S I G N

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 Basis for determining size of pipe This Standard only deals with the mechanicaldesign of the piping system and assumes that a piping and instrument diagram with pipingdiameter is available to the designer.

Where the piping and instrument diagram is not available any assumptions made by thedesigner are to be specified and agreed to by the parties concerned.

A design specification covering service requirements, hazard level and other essentialrequirements shall be agreed by the owner and designer for Class 1 and 2A piping

Wherever possible, to facilitate interchangeability, reduce stock, and increase availability, theoutside diameter and wall thickness of pipe should be selected from that specified in thenominated Standard and sizes which are readily available.

Appendix T provides a method of selecting standard piping components without the need forspecific design calculations.

3.1.2 Design against failure Piping shall be designed to withstand the most severecondition likely to occur during the design life, without failure by bursting, excessive plasticdeformation, buckling, metallurgical deterioration, creep rupture, fatigue cracking, brittlefracture, corrosion or by any other means.

NOTE: Factors which contribute to the most severe condition may include ambient effects,operating pressure, operating temperature, dynamic effects, mass effects, movements of supports,cyclic loading and thermal effects.

3.1.3 Other design methods Pressure vessel design methods given in AS 1210 may beused. Methods and equations of the ANSI/ASME B31 series of Standards and BS 806 maybe used for the determination of calculated stresses due to thermal expansion and fordisplacements. Results shall be in SI units. Calculations may be manual, or by a validatedcomputer program.

3.2 DESIGN PRESSURE The design pressure shall be the highest differential betweeninternal and external pressure that will occur in normal operation, including provision for anyunintended pressure changes.

The design pressure of piping for steam boilers shall comply with Clause 3.9.

Provision shall be made to contain or safely relieve any excessive pressure or vacuum.

NOTE: Causes of excessive pressure or vacuum may include improper operation, failure of controldevices, and influence of ambient effects.

3.3 DESIGN TEMPERATURE

3.3.1 General The design temperature of piping for steam boilers shall comply withClause 3.9.

3.3.2 Uninsulated piping Where the temperature of the fluid in uninsulated piping is lessthan 40°C, the design temperature of the piping material shall be taken to be the temperatureof the fluid.

Where the temperature of the fluid in uninsulated piping is not less than 40°C and a differentaverage temperature has not been determined by test or calculation, the design temperatureof the piping material shall be taken to be as follows:

(a) Average metal temperature determined by test or calculation; or

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 50

(b) For valves, pipe fittings and components having a wall thickness comparable to that ofthe pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .≥95% of fluid temperature (°C).

(c) For flanges and flanged fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .≥90% of fluid temperature (°C).

(d) For bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .≥80% of fluid temperature (°C).

3.3.3 Externally insulated piping The temperature of externally insulated piping materialshall be taken as the temperature of the fluid where a different average temperature has notbeen determined by test, calculation or measurement during operation.

3.3.4 Internally insulated piping The temperature of internally insulated piping materialshall be determined by test or calculation.

3.3.5 Heated piping The effect of any piping heating shall be considered in thedetermination of the design temperature using the average wall temperature as a basis.

3.4 DESIGN LIFE Components within a system may have different design lives.Replaceable components may be designed for a shorter life than the life expectancy of thesystem.

A design life (expressed in hours or number of cycles of pressure or temperature fluctuation)shall be agreed between owner and designer for the following:

(a) A component for which the design temperature is such that the design strength as givenin Appendix D is time-dependent.

(b) A component for service requiring a cyclic design factor.

Appendix D provides for design strength values which allow for either specific designlifetimes or indefinite design lifetimes for components subject to elevated temperatures.

3.5 STATIC AND DYNAMIC LOADS AND FORCES Piping shall be designed towithstand the effects of the following static and dynamic loads and forces:

(a) Dead loads due to the mass of the piping components, insulation and othersuperimposed permanent loads.

(b) Temporary loads due to the mass of the cleaning or pressure test fluid.

(c) Live loads due to the mass of the fluid within the pipe, the mass of snow and ice onthe pipe and other superimposed temporary loads.

(d) Other significant static loads including the effect of prestressing.

(e) Earthquake loads as calculated using AS 1170.4. See Clause 3.27 for requirements andmethod of application.

(f) Impact forces caused by external or internal conditions, including hydraulic shock,pressure surges, and water hammer.

(g) Reactions due to blowdown or discharge of fluids.

(h) Vibration, which may arise from sources such as impact, pressure, pulsation, resonance,or wind.

(i) Wind loads, determined using AS 1170.2. See Clause 3.27 for requirements and methodof application. For calculations of the adequacy of design for the hydrostatic test,75% of the normally applied wind load shall be considered to act simultaneously withother loads except earthquake loads.

(j) Other significant dynamic loads.

(k) Pressure thrust due to pressurizing expansion joints.

(l) Loads due to possible accidents, e.g. dropping objects.

COPYRIGHT

51 AS 4041 — 1998

3.6 RISK ANALYSIS

3.6.1 Hazard and operability study (HAZOP) A HAZOP should be considered forClass 1 piping containing fluid Type 1 or 2. This study would provide a systematicexamination of the design by an interdisciplinary specialist team.

3.6.2 Other methods Failure mode and effect analysis (FEMA), fault tree analysis (FTA),hazard analysis (HAZAN) and other systematic methods may be conducted when required.

3.7 THERMAL EFFECTS Piping shall be designed to withstand the effects of thefollowing:

(a) Heating or cooling where this is expected to change the pressure in the piping from thedesign pressure. Piping shall be designed to withstand the pressure variation, or thereshall be provision for the excess pressure or vacuum to be relieved.

(b) Cooling due to a rapid loss or controlled reduction of pressure.

(c) Movement on expansion joints.

(d) Where the minimum operating temperature is less than 0°C, icing and atmosphericcondensation on moving parts of valves, relief devices, vents or discharge piping,guides and other components.

(e) Forces resulting from differential thermal expansion due to combined or joinedmaterials of different coefficients of expansion.

(f) Forces resulting from stress due to large and rapid temperature changes, or uneventemperature distribution in a pipe wall.

(g) Forces and movements where anchors or restraints restrict free movement of the pipingdue to thermal or other effects.

(h) Forces and movements resulting from solar heating.

(i) Condensation and oxygen enrichment where operating temperatures in ambient air areless (i.e. colder) than −191°C.

(j) Other significant thermal effects.

3.8 EFFECTS OF MOVEMENT AT SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND TERMINALSPiping shall be designed to withstand, for the design life, the effects of movement of pipingsupports, anchors and connected equipment which may result from one or more of thefollowing:

(a) Earthquake, settlement and other geophysical effects (see also Clause 3.5(e)).

(b) Thermal expansion or contraction of supports or connected equipment.

(c) Wind.

(d) Vibration.

NOTE: Crevice corrosion and abrasion induced by thermal expansion may cause significant lossof pipe wall thickness at anchors and pipe supports.

3.9 DESIGN PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE FOR PIPING ASSOCIATED WITHSTEAM BOILERS

3.9.1 Design pressure for main steam piping The design pressure for piping downstreamof the steam stop valve shall be either—

(a) the design working pressure of the boiler; or

(b) for piping where design stresses are time-dependent and the total capacity of the safetyvalves on the super heater is not less than 20% of the evaporative capacity of theboiler, the lowest pressure at which any super heater safety valve is set to lift.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 52

3.9.2 Design pressure for reheat piping

3.9.2.1 Time-independent In reheat systems where the design stresses of the piping aretime-independent, the design pressure shall be the highest pressure at which any safety valveon the reheat system is set to lift. When no safety valves are mounted at the reheater inlet,the design pressure of the reheater inlet piping shall be the highest pressure at which anyreheater outlet safety valve is set to lift, increased to take account of the pressure dropthrough the reheater corresponding to the most severe conditions of operation.

3.9.2.2 Time-dependent In reheat systems where the design stresses of the piping aretime-dependent, the design pressure shall be the lowest pressure to which any safety valveon the reheat system is set to lift. When no safety valves are mounted at the reheater inlet;the design pressure of the reheater inlet piping shall be the lowest pressure at which anyreheater outlet safety valve is set to lift, increased to take account of the pressure dropthrough the reheater corresponding to the most severe conditions of operation.

3.9.3 Design pressure for piping for reduced pressure systemsFor reduced pressuresystems, it is permissible for the pressure to be controlled at a value below that in theoriginating piping system by reducing valve or by the pressure drop across a fixed restrictionsuch as an orifice or the blading of the turbine.

Where a protective device consisting of a safety valve or valves or a suitable appliance forautomatically cutting off the supply of steam at a predetermined pressure is fitted, the designpressure for piping systems, whose design stresses are time-independent, shall be that towhich the pressure under the most arduous condition is limited by the proper operation ofsuch a device. Where similar provisions are made on piping systems whose design stressesare time-dependent, the design pressure shall be the highest controlled operating pressure,provided that the average pressure in any one year does not exceed that pressure and that thefluctuations in controlled pressure at no time exceed the design value by more than 20%.

Where no protective device is fitted, the design pressure shall be the greatest pressure thereinattainable under the most arduous operating condition, i.e. with the originating piping systemoperating at its design pressure, with the upstream valves (including any reducing valves orrestrictions) fully open, and with the downstream valves (other than non-return valves) fullyclosed.

The relieving capacity of safety valves (as determined in accordance with fitted downstreampressure reducing valves shall be such that the operating pressure limitation shall not beexceeded by more than 10% if the reducing valve fails in the open position with thedownstream valves (other than non-return valves) fully closed.

3.9.4 Design temperature for steam piping The design temperature for main and reheatsteam piping for a land boiler shall be taken as the design temperature at the followingpoints:

(a) For non-superheated main steam piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . at theboiler stop valve.

(b) For superheated main steam piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at thesuperheater outlet.

(c) For reheater outlet steam piping (hot reheat). . . . . . . . . at theboiler reheater outlet.

(d) For reheater inlet steam piping (cold reheat). . . . . . . . . at theturbine high pressurecylinder exhaust outlet, or turbine steam by-pass system outlet, whichever is thegreater.

(e) For by-pass systems, the piping for a length of 5 diameters after the high pressureby-pass valve should be designed for both—

(i) the cold reheat pressure and temperature; and

COPYRIGHT

53 AS 4041 — 1998

(ii) the condition of cold reheat pressure and a temperature 50°C less than the mainsteam temperature. Recognizing the intermittent operation, a fraction of theboiler design life is appropriate and 30 000 hours is recommended.

The design temperature for other than main steam piping shall be the highest ratedtemperature at the higher temperature end of the piping.

The design temperature may be exceeded during the design life of the piping where at designpressure, the annual average operating temperature does not exceed the design temperature;and—

(i) for ferritic piping having a design temperature equal to or less than 380°C, variationabove the design temperature is not greater than 10 percent of the design temperature;or

(ii) for ferritic piping having a design temperature greater than 380°C—

(A) normal variations above the design temperature is not greater than 8°C of thedesign temperature; and

(B) abnormal variation above the design temperature is not greater than thefollowing in any one year:

(1) 20°C for a maximum of 400 h.



When a piping system is operated above these limits, the design life shall bereduced.

For piping material not provided for above, see Clause 3.10.3.

Where the above temperature limitations are expected to be exceeded, the design temperatureshall be increased appropriately.

3.9.5 Design pressure and temperature for boiler feed water piping The piping shallbe designed for both—

(a) the shut-off pressure of the boiler feed pump when pumping water at 15°C and a designtemperature of 15°C; and

(b) the most arduous combinations of temperature and pressure that can occur in operationfor each section. If a protective device is fitted, the design pressure shall be the setpressure of the device.

Specific allowance shall be made for water hammer if it results in pressure surges of20 percent over the design pressure.

3.9.6 Design pressure for blowdown and drain systems

3.9.6.1 Upstream design pressureThe design pressure upstream and including any shutoff valve, control valve, or trap shall be that of the upstream component to which they areconnected, but not less than 700 kPa if the system is handling a flashing liquid.

Where a control or restriction orifice is fitted, then this shall be considered as a control orshut off valve.

3.9.6.2 Downstream design pressureThe design pressure downstream from the last shutoff valve, control valve, trap or restrictor treated as a control in accordance withClause 3.9.7.1 shall also comply with Clause 3.9.7.1, except that where—

(a) the downstream pipe has a cross-sectional area of not less than 2.5 times the combinedsimultaneous areas that can discharge into it; and

(b) further that this downstream pipe discharges freely into an adequately vented receiver;

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 54

then the design pressure may be taken as one-half of the upstream pressure specified inClause 3.9.7.1 but shall not be less than 700 kPa if the system is handling a flashing liquid.

3.9.6.3 Blowdown and drain vessels design pressureThe design pressure of blowdownvessel or a drain vessel shall be the maximum pressure that can be imposed upon it inoperation but not less than the lower value of 700 kPa or 25% of the maximum permissibleworking pressure of the boiler. See Clause 3.25.2 for specific design requirements.

3.9.7 Design temperature for blowdown and drain systems

3.9.7.1 Upstream design temperatureThe design temperature for systems described underClause 3.9.6.1 shall be that of the upstream component.

NOTE: Where the design stress is time-dependent, the design lifetime will be the same as that ofthe upstream component except where a control or restriction orifice is fitted between the last valveand the drain discharge point when for that section of pipe between the last valve and the orificea reduced design lifetime may be used if the drain is used intermittently.

3.9.7.2 Downstream design temperatureThe design temperature for systems describedunder Clause 3.9.6.2 shall be the greater of—

(a) the design temperatureT (in °C) determined from:

. . . 3.9.8.2

where

Ts is the design temperature (in °C) of the component from which the drain orblowdown system originates; and

(b) the saturation temperature at the design pressure of the system derived fromClause 3.9.6.1.

NOTE: The reduced time design life for intermittent use is also applicable to the systems coveredby this subclause.

3.9.7.3 Blowdown and drain vessel design temperatureThe design temperatureT (in °C)of a blowdown vessel, or drain vessel, or atmospheric vent shall be determined from:

. . . 3.9.8.3

where

Ts is the design temperature (in °C) of the component from which the drain orblowdown system originates.

The design temperature shall neither be higher than the highest design temperature of anypipe discharging into the vessel nor lower than saturation temperature at the vessel designpressure.

3.9.8 Design conditions for safety valve discharge piping

3.9.8.1 Design pressure The design pressure of the discharge piping shall be the maximumpressure which can be imposed upon it, but in no case less than 350 kPa. See Appendix J forcalculation method. ANSI/ASME B31.1 provides an alternative method.

3.9.8.2 Capacity of safety valveThe capacity of the safety valve for the purpose ofcalculation shall be 1.11 times the certified discharge capacity as defined in BS 6759.1.

NOTE: The discharge piping system should be such as not to create a built up back pressure,measured at the safety valve outlet connection, of more than 12% of the set pressure of the safetyvalve, subject to a maximum of 1700 kPa. If the discharge piping system gives rise to a higher builtup back pressure, the design should be referred to the safety valve manufacturer for agreement thatthe safety valve performance will not be adversely affected.

COPYRIGHT

55 AS 4041 — 1998

3.9.8.3 Design temperature The design temperatureT (in °C) of safety valve dischargepiping shall be:

. . . 3.9.9.3

where

Ts is the temperature (in °C) of steam at the safety valve body inlet.

NOTE: For the purpose of calculating the thermal expansion of the discharge pipe, a temperature25°C higher than this design temperature should be assumed.

3.9.9 Design temperature for structural attachments The design temperature forstructural attachments shall be as follows:

(a) Welded to pipe:T = Tf − 10°C.

(b) Clamped to pipe:T = Tf − 20°C.

(c) Insulated pipe, outside insulation:T = 80°C

where

T = design temperature

Tf = fluid design temperature.

3.10 DESIGN CRITERIA

3.10.1 Pressure-temperature design criteria

3.10.1.1 Components having specified ratingsThe pressure-temperature rating of apressurized component complying with a nominated Standard shall not be exceeded.

3.10.1.2 Components not having specified ratingsA pressurized component complyingwith a nominated Standard that does not specify a pressure-temperature rating but doesspecify the nominal thickness and the material, may be rated as seamless pipe of the samenominal thickness as determined by Clause 3.12 for material of the same type having thesame design strength.

NOTE: The design pressure of pipe with a design strength complying with Clause 3.12 may belimited by other clauses in this Standard.

3.10.2 Normal operating conditions Piping is considered safe for normal operation if thecoincident pressure and temperature on a component do not exceed the design pressure anddesign temperature or the pressure-temperature rating of that component.

3.10.3 Variations in normal operating conditions Occasional variations in pressure andtemperature during the design life of ferrous piping are acceptable within the followinglimits:

(a) Where the fluid is steam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .shall not exceed those specified inClause 3.9.4.

(b) Where the fluid is boiler feed water. . . . . . . . . shall not exceed those specified inClause 3.9.5.

Where the fluid is other than steam or boiler feed water, a piping system shall be consideredsafe during those variations when all the following conditions are fulfilled:

(i) The piping does not contain pressurized components made from cast iron or othernon-ductile material.

(ii) For piping not in the creep range, the hoop stress is not more than the hot yieldstrength at the highest temperature occurring during the variation.

(iii) The number of significant variations, or cycles of pressure during the design life, is notmore than 7000. In this requirement a pressure variation of greater than ±20% of thedesign is significant.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 56

(iv) The highest pressure occurring during the variation is less than the hydrostatic testpressure.

(v) Occasional variations above the design pressure and temperature comply with thefollowing:

(A) The period of the variation is less than 10 h at any one time and the sum of theperiods is less than 100 h in a year. The pressure rating of a component or theyield strength at the highest temperature during any of the variations may beincreased by not more than 33 percent.

(B) The period of the variation is less than 50 h at any one time and the sum of theperiods is less than 500 h in a year. The pressure rating of a component or theyield strength at the highest temperature during any of the variations may beincreased by not more than 20 percent.

(vi) An evaluation of the combined effects of the sustained and cyclic variations on thedesign life of all components is made and the results of the evaluation are agreedbetween the parties concerned.

3.11 DESIGN STRENGTH

3.11.1 Design strength for pressure-retaining componentsThe value of the designstrength for a pressure-retaining component in tension shall be appropriate for the material,design temperature and design life. Design strength values for piping to Classes 1, 2A and 3are given in Appendix D. Tables of design strength in Appendix D are independent of weldjoint factor (Clause 3.12.2).

Because of the many popular pipe specifications nominally covering the same pipe butperhaps with slightly differing specified mechanical properties, Table D3 deems the listedpipe to take the values of design strength of BS 3601, Grade 320 in Table D2. SimilarlyTable D4 deems the listed pipe to take the values of API 5L B in Table D2. Design strengthfor Class 2P are not listed but are 0.72 of the specified room temperature yield stress (seeAppendix I). Values at intermediate temperatures may be obtained by linear interpolation.

The design strength value determined in accordance with Appendix I may be used withoutverification of theReT values provided that the heat treatment of the completed pipe complieswith the material standard and is as given in AS 4458.

Allowance shall be made for any degradation of the properties of the material which couldreduce design strength of the piping due to the methods used during fabrication, e.g. hotbending.

NOTE: Clause 2.11 specifies design strength requirements for a material selected for lowtemperature application.

The design strength for unlisted materials shall be in accordance with Appendix I unlessotherwise agreed between the parties concerned.

3.11.2 Compressive stressThe value of the stress in compression shall be appropriate forthe material and design temperature, and shall not exceed the design strength in tension.

3.11.3 Shear stress The value of any primary shear stress shall be appropriate for thematerial and design temperature. It may be noted that AS 1210 quotes 60% of the tensiledesign stress for vessels and ANSI B31.1 quote 80% for piping.

3.11.4 Bearing stress The value of the stress in bearing shall be appropriate for thematerial and design temperature, and shall not exceed 160 percent of the design strength intension.

COPYRIGHT

57 AS 4041 — 1998

3.11.5 Sustained longitudinal stress The sustained longitudinal stress (fL), being the sumof the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other sustained loads, shall be notgreater than 100 percent of the design strength listed in Appendix D at the temperature underconsideration.

3.11.6 Longitudinal stress due to sustained and occasional loadsThe longitudinal stressdue to the sum of the sustained loads (fL) as defined in Clause 3.11.5 and the occasional loads(fo) (due to wind, earthquake and the like) shall be less than 1.33 times the allowable designstrength from Appendix D.

It is recommended that design strength values be limited to 75% of the Appendix D valuesor two thirds of the yield strength at design temperature, whichever is the least, at flangedjoints or where slight deformation can cause leakage.

3.11.7 Design stress rangeThe design stress range (fa), being the maximum displacement(expansion or contraction) stress range permitted for the displacement stress range calculatedin accordance with Clause 3.27, shall be determined from one of the following equations asappropriate:

fa = F(1.25fc + 0.25fh) . . . 3.11.7(1)

or, wherefh > fL,

fa = F[1.25(fc + fh) − fL] . . . 3.11.7(2)

where

fa = design stress range, in megapascals

F = stress-range reduction factor (see Table 3.11) for the total number ofdisplacement cycles over the design lifetime

fc = design strength at the minimum metal temperature expected during operation

or shutdown. In no case shall the valve exceed the minimum of and

at minimum metal temperature (see Appendix D), in megapascals

≤

fh = design strength at maximum metal temperature expected during operation orshutdown (see Appendix D), in megapascals

fL = sustained longitudinal stress, in megapascals.

In the determination offa, the value of the weld joint factor (e) shall be taken as unity.

3.11.8 Creep-fatigue interaction For creep-fatigue interactions the following Standardsmay be used:

TRD 300, DesignTRD 301, DesignTRD 301 Design, Annex 1TRD 508 Annex 1Code Case N 47 of ANSI/ASME BPV-III.

NOTE: TRD documents may be obtained from TUV Germany.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 58

TABLE 3.11

STRESS RANGE REDUCTION FACTOR

Total number of full temperaturecycles during the design life

(N)

Stress range reductionfactor (F)

(Notes 1, 2 and 3)

>7 000>14 000

≤7 000≤14 000≤22 000

1.00.90.8

>22 000>45 000

>100 000

≤45 000≤100 000

0.70.60.5

NOTES:

1 F applies to uncorroded piping. Corrosion may severely reducecycle life, therefore corrosion-resistant materials, environmentimprovement, or lower stress are appropriate where a large numberof high stress cycles is expected.

2 The fatigue life of material operating within the creep range will bereduced.

3 Where the range of temperature varies, the equivalent fulltemperature cycles,N, may be determined from the followingequation:

. . . 3.11.7(3)

where

NE = number of cycles of full temperature change∆TE for which displacement stress-range (fe)has been calculated.

fE = (fb2 + Ft

2)1/2

fb = resultant bending stress, in megapascals

ft = torsional stress, in megapascals

N1, N2 ... Nn = number of cycles of lesser temperature change∆T1, ∆T2, etc.

r1, r2 ... rn = ratios of lesser temperature cycles to that forwhich fc has been calculated, i.e.

COPYRIGHT

59 AS 4041 — 1998

3.12 DESIGN FACTORS

3.12.1 General The design factors shall not exceed the values specified in thisClause (3.12).

3.12.2 Weld joint factor A weld joint factor (e) shall be applied to pipe, to recognize thequality of the welding process, mill quality control, and non-destructive examination of thelongitudinal or spiral weld.

NOTE: The weld joint factor is not intended to apply to circumferential welds.

The value of weld joint factor (e) to be used in Equation 3.14.3 (1) and Equation 3.14.3(2)for various classes shall be as follows:

e Piping class

(a) For seamless pipe with hydrostatic test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 Any

(b) For welded pipe with NDE equivalent to API 5L examinationand with hydrostatic test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 Any

(c) For welded pipe with no obligatory NDE. . . . . . . . . . . .0.85 2A, 2P, 3

(d) For CW (BW) welded pipe irrespective of NDE withhydrostatic test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 3

(e) For welded pipe with NDE and no hydrostatic test. . . . . 0.85 2A, 2P, 3

(f) For brazed pipe to AS 1751. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 Any

For common pipe specifications these rules have been used to create Table 3.12.2.

Pipe made by non-continuous (workshop) methods shall take the weld joint efficiency factorappropriate by treating the pipe as a pressure vessel and using AS 1210.

3.12.3 Class design factor A class design factor (M) shall be assigned to piping torecognize the overall quality control of the piping construction process.

The value (M) used in Equation 3.14.3(1) and 3.14.3(2) and Equation 3.14.5 shall be asshown in Table 3.12.3.

3.12.4 Casting quality factor A casting quality factor (N) shall be assigned to a castingto recognize the type of examination carried out on that casting.

The value (N) used in Equation 3.14.5 shall be as shown in Table 3.12.4. For weldedcastings, the product ofe andN shall be used.

TABLE 3.12.2

WELD JOINT FACTOR EXAMPLES

SpecificationManufacturing

methodWeld joint factor

(e)

API 5LASTM A 53ASTM A 106

ERWERW

Seamless

1.001.001.00


SeamlessWeldedWelded

1.000.850.85

ASTM A 334ASTM A 587AS 1074AS 1074

WeldedWelded

CWERW

0.851.000.600.85

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 60

TABLE 3.12.3

CLASS DESIGN FACTOR

Piping class Class design factor (M)123

1.01.00.6

TABLE 3.12.4

CASTING QUALITY FACTOR

Type of examination Casting quality factor(N)

RadiographicUltrasonicOthers specified in AS 1210All other

1.01.01.00.8

3.13 ALLOWANCES3.13.1 General The pressure design wall thickness (tf) for a pipe or a pressure-containingcomponent manufactured from pipe shall be increased by an amount equal to the allowance(G) to compensate for a reduction of thickness due to corrosion, erosion, threading, orgrooving, or to add mechanical strength and any other necessary parameters. Where a pipeis to be bent, an allowance to compensate for thinning may be required. For castings, anallowance may be required to compensate for shrinkage, core-shift and distortion.

Allowances for separate items are not always additive, e.g. allowances for corrosion andthreading.

3.13.2 Manufacturing tolerances Where a pipe or fitting is manufactured to a Standardthat specifies an under-thickness tolerance on the wall thickness, the allowance shall includean amount equal to the tolerance. This allowance is not included inG, but is appliedin 3.14.2.

3.13.3 Corrosion or erosion Where corrosion or erosion or both are expected theallowance (G) shall include an amount equal to the loss in wall thickness expected during thedesign life.

3.13.4 Threading, grooving, or machining Where a component is to be threaded,grooved, or machined, the allowance (G) shall include an amount equal to that which will beremoved and, where a tolerance on the depth of cut is not specified, the allowance shall beincreased by 0.5 mm.

3.13.5 Mechanical strength If the pressure design wall thickness is not sufficient toenable the pipe to withstand expected loads other than those resulting from hoop stress, theallowance (G) shall include an amount that would provide the required wall thickness, e.g.to compensate for bending between supports or loads or damage during handling orconstruction (see Clause 3.11.6).

Where it is impracticable to increase the wall thickness, or where an increased wall thicknesswould cause excessive load stresses, other means shall be taken to protect the piping. Thesemeans include the use of additional supports, the provision of protective barriers, and therelocation of the piping.

Consideration should be given to the mechanical strength of small bore piping connections,such as that for instrument, sampling and control lines, particularly at the point of connectionto the main pipe.

Lagging, coating, or lining shall not be considered to add strength to the pipe.

COPYRIGHT

61 AS 4041 — 1998

3.14 WALL THICKNESS OF STRAIGHT PIPE

3.14.1 Required wall thickness The required wall thickness (tm) of straight pipe or apressure-containing component made from pipe shall be determined from the followingequation:

tm = tf + G . . . 3.14.1

where

tm = required wall thickness, in millimetres

tf = pressure design wall thickness, in millimetres

G = summation of appropriate allowances (see Clause 3.13), in millimetres.

3.14.2 Nominal wall thickness The nominal wall thickness (tn) shall be—

tn = tm + pipe manufacturing under tolerance but in no case shall be less than thatgiven in Item (a) or (b) as follows:

(a) For Class 1 . . . equal to or greater than the required wall thickness (tm) and should benot less than the thinnest wall thickness appropriate to the diameter nominated in theappropriate pipe standard or 1 mm.

(b) For Class 2 and Class 3 . . . equal to or greater than the required wall thickness (tm)and not greater than that shown in Table 3.14.2 for respective class.

Where the pressure design wall thickness or the nominal wall thickness is greater than thatspecified in Table 3.14.2, the piping shall be fabricated to the requirements of Class 1 orClass 2, as appropriate.

TABLE 3.14.2

MAXIMUM WALL THICKNESS FOR CLASS 2 AND CLASS 3 PIPING

MaterialWall thickness, mm

Class 2piping Class 3 piping

Steel group Type tn* and tf† tn* tf†A1, A2 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel 32 20 12A3 High yield strength C-Mn steel 16 12 12B Low alloy steel (alloy <3/4) 20 12 10

C Cr-Mo steel (3/4 ≤ total alloy < 3) 16 10 10D Vanadium and medium Cr-Mo steel

(3 ≤ alloy < 10%)0 0 0

E 31/2 nickel steel 16 10 10

F, G 9 nickel and QT steel 0 0 0H Martensitic chromium steel 0 0 0J Ferritic high chromium steel 0 0 0

K Austenitic Cr-Ni steel 32 20 12L High chromium steel 0 0 0M Ferritic austenitic steels 32 10 5

— Non-ferrous alloys 10 6 6

* tn = nominal wall thickness at any weld

† tf = pressure design wall thickness

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 62

3.14.3 Pressure design wall thickness for pipe, under internal pressureThe pressuredesign wall thickness (tf) for cylindrical pipe, or pressurized components, under internalpressure, shall be determined as follows:

(a) Where the pressure design wall thickness is less thanD/6, the pressure design wallthickness, under internal pressure, shall be determined from the following equations:

(i) Where outside diameter is used as the basis of calculation:

. . . 3.14.3(1)

(ii) Where inside diameter is used as the basis for calculation:

. . . 3.14.3(2)

where

D = outside diameter, in millimetres

M = class design factor (see Clause 3.12.3 and Note below)

d = inside diameter, in millimetres

e = weld joint factor (see Clause 3.12.2 and Note below)

= N for castings (see Clause 3.12.4)

f = design strength (see Clause 3.11), in megapascals

p = design pressure, in megapascals

tf = pressure design wall thickness, in millimetres

The product ofe andM need not be taken as less than 0.6.

NOTE: e relates primarily to hoop stress across a longitudinal weld and percentage NDE.Nrelates primarily to hoop stress in casting and percentage NDE.M relates primarily tolongitudinal stress and percentage of NDE. The use of 0.6 minimum avoids doubly penalizinglongitudinal joints.

(b) Where the pressure design wall thickness is equal to or greater thanD/6 or d/4, orwhere p/fe orp/fM is greater than 0.385, consideration shall be given to the design andchoice of material. If such thick pipe must be used, the use of a thick wall equation isrecommended and the value of the pressure design wall thickness shall be agreed. Thepossibility of failure due to fatigue and thermal stress shall be investigated and thefindings of the investigation shall be agreed.

3.14.4 Wall thickness of pipe under external pressure The pressure design wallthickness (tf) and any stiffening requirements for straight cylindrical pipe under externalpressure shall be determined in accordance with AS 1210, except that whereD/t < 10 the

calculated hoop stress shall be the lesser of—

(a) 1.5 × (the lesser of the design strength given in Appendix D at design metal

temperature and

(b) 0.9 × specified minimum yield strength at design metal temperature.

3.14.5 Pressure design wall thickness of cast pipeThe pressure design wall thickness(tf) of ductile pipe, other than ductile iron, shall be determined from Equation 3.14.5 but shallbe not less than 10 mm.

COPYRIGHT

63 AS 4041 — 1998

. . . 3.14.5

where

N = casting quality factor (see Clause 3.12.4)

M, d, f, p and tf have the meanings given in Clause 3.14.3(a).

The product ofN andM need not be taken as less than 0.6. (See Note to Clause 3.14.3(a)(ii).)

3.15 PIPE BENDS

3.15.1 General Bends may be continuous, wrinkle, mitre or cut and shut, as prescribedin this Clause.

3.15.2 Continuous bends

3.15.2.1 Method of manufacture Continuous pipe bends may be made by cold bending, hotbending, induction bending or by welding together halves pressed from plate. The designthickness ovality and wrinkle requirements are the same for all processes.

Elbows are not included in the requirements for continuous bends. Elbows for piping to thisStandard require a pressure and temperature rating in the elbow specification or if not to begiven by the manufacturer.

3.15.2.2 Minimum thickness of bendsThe minimum thickness of bends shall comply withthe following:

(a) Except as specified in Items (b) and (c), pipe bends shall have a minimum wallthickness oftf. No additional thickness tolerance is applicable:

tf = calculated minimum thickness for straight pipe

(b) Where the design stress is time-dependent, i.e. derived from creep data, and the bendcentreline radius is less than three times the inside diameter, the intrados thicknesst1

(in mm) shall not be less than that calculated from the following:

. . . 3.15.2.2(1)

(c) Where the design stress is time-independent and the bend radius is less than 1.5 timesthe inside diameter, the intrados thicknessti shall not be less than that calculated fromthe following:

. . . 3.15.2.2(2)

where

R = the radius of the bend, in millimetres

r = the mean radius of the pipe, in millimetres

ti = intrados thickness, in millimetres

Equation 3.15.2.2(3) and 3.15.2.2(4) and Table 3.15.2.2 are provided as a guide to initialthickness of straight pipe for hot bends. Other methods may require a greater or less initialthickness to finally comply with Items (a), (b) and (c).

For pipes 219.1 mm OD and below bent to any radius and for pipes above 219.1 mm ODbent to the radius listed in column 2 of Table 3.15.2.2, a suggested starting thickness is givenby—

tb = 1.125 tf . . . 3.15.2.2(3)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 64

For pipes above 219.1 mm OD and wheretf is 35 mm or more, and where the more are bentto the radii of column 4 in Table 3.15.2.2, a suggested starting thickness is given by—

tb = 1.1 tf . . . 3.15.2.2(4)

The radii inferred in Table 3.15.2.2 may be considered typical of tight radius bends for therespective thicknesses and special techniques will be required for tighter radii.

3.15.2.3 Ovality Ovality (out-of-roundness) of continuous bends shall be calculated inaccordance with the following requirements:

. . . 3.15.2.3(1)

where

Dmax. = the maximum outside diameter in the bent section of the pipe, inmillimetres

Dmin. = the minimum diameter of the bent section of the pipe measured at thesame cross-section asDmax., in millimetres

Ds = the average outside diameter in the straight, in millimetres

For Class 1 and Class 2 piping, the ovality of continuous bends shall not exceed 10 percentfor pipe designed for internal pressure, or 3 percent for pipe designed for external pressure.

For Class 3 piping, the ovality of continuous bends shall not exceed 12 percent for pipedesigned for internal pressure, or 5 percent for pipe designed for external pressure.

Ovality greater than that specified in this Clause (3.15.2.3) may be acceptable subject toanalysis of stress, fluid flow and internal corrosion.

For lines using pigs for internal cleansing, and or other special cases, tighter ovalitytolerances may be specified.

TABLE 3.15.2.2

TIGHT BENDING RADII FOR HOT BENTWROUGHT STEEL PIPES

1 2 3 4 5

Outside diameterRadii measured to centreline of pipe (R)

tb = 1.25 tfall thickness

tb = 1.1 tftb = 35 mm or above

mm R mm R/D R, mm R/D26.933.742.4

6575

100

2.42.22.4

48.360.376.1

115150190

2.42.52.5

88.9101.6114.3

230265305

2.62.62.7

139.7168.3193.7

380460630

2.72.73.3

219.1244.5273.1

710810

1 020

3.23.33.7

1 1401 270

4.74.7

323.9355.6406.4

1 2201 5001 730

3.84.24.3

1 5201 7802 030

4.75.05.0

457.0 2 030 4.4 2 280 5.0

COPYRIGHT

65 AS 4041 — 1998

3.15.3 Wrinkle (or crease) bends A wrinkle bend shall not be used for Class 1 or 2piping. For Class 3 piping a wrinkle bend may only be used where stress corrosion orcorrosion fatigue is unlikely to occur.

3.15.4 Mitre bends

3.15.4.1 Application A mitre bend may be used for change of direction.

For Class 1 piping, the angle of cut shall be 15° or less.

The ratio of the nominal inside diameter to the nominal wall thickness of a mitre bend shallbe not less than 20:1 and not more than 200:1.

The effective radius of a multiple mitre bend, for use in Equation 3.15.4.3(2) is defined asthe shortest distance from the centre-line of the pipe to the point of intersection of the planesof adjacent mitre joints (see Figure 3.15.4), and may be calculated by the following equation:

R = B cot θ + D/2 . . . 3.15.4.1

where

B = half the length of straight pipe at the outside surface of the intrados, but notless than the length given in Table 3.15.4.1, in millimetres

θ = angle of cut, in degrees

D = outside diameter of the pipe, in millimetres

R = effective radius of a mitre bend, in millimetres.

TABLE 3.15.4.1

MINIMUM VALUE OF B FOR MITRE BENDS

millimetres

t – c * B

≤12 25

>12 ≤22 2(t – c)

>22 0.67(t – c) + 30

* Symbols t andc are as given in Equation 3.15.4.2

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 66

FIGURE 3.15.4 DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS FOR MITRE BENDS

COPYRIGHT

67 AS 4041 — 1998

3.15.4.2 Single mitre bends The internal design pressure for a mitre bend whichcomprises one mitre joint with an angle of cut greater than 22.5° shall be determined fromthe following equation:

. . . 3.15.4.2

where

D = outside diameter of pipe, in millimetres

p = internal design pressure, in megapascals

c = corrosion and erosion allowance (see Clause 3.13.3), in millimetres

d = inside diameter of pipe, in millimetres

e = weld joint factor, see Clause 3.12.2

f = design strength, see Appendix D, in megapascals

r = mean radius of pipe (nominal dimensions), i.e. , in millimetres

tn = nominal wall thickness of pipe, in millimetres

t = wall thickness of pipe (measured or minimum per purchase specification), inmillimetres

θ = angle of cut, in degrees.

The internal design pressure, for a mitre bend which comprises one mitre joint with an angleof cut equal to or less than 22.5° shall be as that for a multiple mitre bend.

3.15.4.3 Multiple mitre bends The internal design pressure for a mitre bend whichcomprises one or more mitre joints with an angle cut of not more than 22.5° shall be thelesser value determined from the following equations:

. . . 3.15.4.3(1)

and

. . . 3.15.4.3(2)

where

R = effective radius of mitre bend but not less than that given by Equation 3.15.4.1when the minimum value of B is used from Table 3.15.4.1, in millimetres.

All other symbols are as for Equation 3.15.4.2.

3.15.4.4 Mitre bends subject to external pressureThe wall thickness for a mitre bendsubject to external pressure shall be determined in accordance with Clauses 3.14.1 and 3.14.4using an effective length equal to the running centreline length between any two suitablystiffened sections.

3.15.4.5 Distance between mitre jointsThe distance between mitre joints (Lm), being thatdistance measured axially along the centre line of the pipe (see Figure 3.15.4), shall be notless than each of the following:

(a) The value of 2B, where the value ofB is given in Table 3.15.4.1.

(b) For Class 1 and Class 2 piping, the value determined from the following equation:

Lm(min) = minimum of 2.5 (rt)1/2 + r tan θ, andR tan θ . . . 3.15.4.5

where

Lm(min) = extent of mitre bend thicknesst.


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 68

3.15.4.6 Continuation of thicknessThe thickness (t − c) shall be maintained for a distancenot less thanLm on either side of the mitre joint when measured along the centre line of thepipe (see Figure 3.15.4).

3.15.4.7 Branch connections to mitre bends for Class 1 and Class 2 pipingFor Class 1and Class 2 piping, a branch pipe connecting to straight pipe forming a mitre joint shallcomply with the requirements of Clause 3.19 and the following:

(a) The ratio of the inside diameter of the pipe to the inside diameter of the branch pipeshall be in accordance with the following:

db ≤ d/10

(b) The distance (l) between intersection of the internal diameter of the branch and straightpipe forming a mitre joint to the nearest mitre joint when measured along the inside ofthe pipe shall be not less than the greater of:

. . . 3.15.4.7(2)

and

. . . 3.15.4.7(3)where

d = inside diameter of the straight pipe, in millimetres

db = inside diameter of the branch pipe, in millimetres

γ = angle between the branch pipe and the straight pipe, in degrees.


3.15.4.8 Branch connections to mitre bends for Class 3 pipingFor Class 3 piping, abranch pipe connecting to straight pipe forming a mitre joint shall comply with therequirements of Clause 3.19.

3.15.4.9 Attachments to mitre bendsAttachments for supports and other purposes may bewelded to a mitre bend.

Where an attachment is made across one or more mitre joints (see Figure 3.15.4); the distancefrom the edge of the attachment to the centre-line of the next mitre joint measured along theoutside of the pipe shall be not less than the value determined from the following equation:

. . . 3.15.4.9

where the symbols are as for Equation 3.15.4.2.

For Class 1 and Class 2 piping, where an attachment is made across a mitre joint, specialconsideration shall be given to the flexibility factor and stress intensification factor.

3.15.5 Cut-and-shut (gussetted) bendsFor Class 1 and Class 2 piping, a cut-and-shutbend (see Figure 3.15.5) shall not be used.

For Class 3 piping, a cut-and-shut bend (see Figure 3.15.5) shall have the angle of cutdisposed equally about a line at right angles to the axis of the pipe. A hole not less than5 mm in diameter shall be drilled and countersunk at each apex of the wedge before bendingand shall be welded up after bending.

3.16 REDUCERS A reducer fitting which complies with a nominated Standard shall beconsidered suitable for use at the pressure-temperature ratings specified in that Standard.

Reducers not complying with a nominated Standard shall comply with Clause 3.22 or bedesigned to AS 1210 using design strengths from Appendix D.

COPYRIGHT

69 AS 4041 — 1998

NOTE: Maximum change of centre-line at each cut is 30°

FIGURE 3.15.5 CUT-AND-SHUT (GUSSETTED) BEND

3.17 BIFURCATIONS, SPECIAL FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS The design of acast, forged, wrought, welded bifurcation fitting, and connections not complying with anominated Standard, shall comply with Clause 3.19, Appendix L or if neither of these apply,Clause 3.22.

3.18 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLIES

3.18.1 Expansion fittings These include expansion bellows and expansion joints whichabsorb angular, rotational and axial movement. Designers should be aware that thesecomponents have the potential to generate large pressure thrusts which require balancing andthe components, at times, require guiding, restraining, or both, to ensure stability.

Expansion fittings shall comply with the following:

(a) They shall be suitable for the service conditions.

(b) The installation shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations and complywith the American Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Standard or other equivalentStandard.

(c) An internal liner or sleeve where fitted shall be fitted at the inlet end.

(d) Where end thrust is not restrained within the assembly the adjacent piping shall beadequately anchored and guided to withstand such thrusts.

(e) The bellows shall withstand vacuum conditions if this can occur in service.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 70

Expansion fittings should comply with the following:

(i) The annulus between an internal sleeve and a bellows should be drained.

(ii) An internal liner should be fitted.

(iii) For fluid types 1 and 2 multiply-bellows with interply-leak monitoring should beconsidered.

(iv) For fluid type 2 using slip or gland type fitting safeguards should be taken to preventaccidental leakage.

3.18.2 Flexible hose assembliesThe design of a flexible metal hose assembly shallcomply with Clause 3.1.2. The service conditions and geometry shall be within the limitationsrecommended by the manufacturer.

NOTE: A flexible hose assembly may be used to provide flexibility in a piping system, to isolateor control vibration, or to compensate for misalignment.

3.19 BRANCH CONNECTIONS AND OPENINGS

3.19.1 Application This Clause (3.19) is applicable to the design of branch connectionsand openings subject to internal or external pressure where—

(a) the axes of the branch or the opening and the main pipe intersect; and

(b) the smaller angle between the axes of the branch and the main pipe is not less than—

(i) for Class 1 piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60°, or 45° when agreed between theparties concerned; or

(ii) for Class 2 or Class 3 piping. . . . . . . 45°.

(c) The rules in Clauses 3.19.7 to 3.19.9, inclusive, are minimum requirements, valid onlyfor branch connections in which (using notations of Figure 3.19.8.2)—

(i) the run pipe diameter-to-thickness ratio (Doh/th) is less than 100 and branch-to-run diameter ratio (Dob/Doh) is not greater than 1.0; and

(ii) for run pipe with (Doh/th) > 100, the branch diameterDob is less than one-halfthe run diameterDoh.

Where the provisions of Items (a), (b) and (c) are not met, design pressure shall be qualifiedas required by Clause 3.22.

Where the axes of the branch or openings and the main pipe do not intersect, or where theangle between the axis is less than 60°, the design shall comply with Clauses 3.22 and 3.24,but the requirements of this Clause (3.19) may be used as a guide.

NOTE: Due to the difficulty involved in making a satisfactory welded joint at the intersection ofa main pipe and a branch pipe not at right angles, it is recommended that where practicable, therequired angle between the main pipe and the branch be obtained by making a straight connectionat right angles to the main pipe and joining a bent length of branch pipe, a bend, or elbow to thestraight connection.

3.19.2 Types of branch connections A branch shall be connected to the main pipe by theuse of one of the following:

(a) A flanged fitting such as a tee, cross, 45° lateral, true Y, or double branch elbow asspecified in a nominated Standard.

(b) A welding fitting, being a factory-made wrought steel butt-welding fitting such as a teeor a cross as specified in a nominated Standard, or a forged steel socket-welding orthreaded fitting such as a tee, a cross, coupling or half-coupling as specified in anominated Standard.

COPYRIGHT

71 AS 4041 — 1998

(c) A reinforced fitting such as the typical integrally reinforced set-on or set-in branchfittings shown in Appendix K.

(d) Welding directly to the main pipe with or without added reinforcement as specified inthis Clause (3.19).

(e) Socket-welding or threading to attach the branch pipe directly to the main pipe withor without added reinforcement.

(f) An integrally reinforced extruded outlet as specified in this Clause (3.19).

3.19.3 Shape of opening Where the shape of the opening is other than circular, themaximum value for area to be compensated (A7 Figure 3.19.8.2) may not be on thelongitudinal plane of the pipe or header.

NOTE: For the calculation of A7 on a plane other than the longitudinal plane see AS 1210.

3.19.4 Size of branches and openingsNo limit is specified for the size of a branch andan opening, however, the size of the branch determines the need for additional reinforcement.See Clause 3.19.7 for branches not requiring additional reinforcement and Clause 3.19.8 forbranches requiring additional reinforcement.

3.19.5 Location of unreinforced branch connections A branch connection should belocated so the distance from the outside diameter of the branch from any longitudinal spiralor circumferential weld in the main pipe is not less than 4 times the nominal thickness of themain pipe. If the weld cannot be avoided, Clause 3.5.1.3 of AS 1210—1997 shall becomplied with.

3.19.6 Material for branches and reinforcement Material for a branch pipe and thereinforcement for a branch and its opening shall be compatible with the main pipe (seeClause 3.19.8.5 for requirements for reinforcement in material of strength different to thatof the main pipe). It is recommended that in austenitic steel pipes at high temperatures, onlyforged tees be used.

3.19.7 Branches or openings not requiring additional reinforcement

3.19.7.1 General Certain branches or openings, by virtue of the material, design andmethod of manufacture of the branch or main pipe, have adequate pressure strength andintegral reinforcement and do not require additional reinforcement.

It may be assumed that a branch connection has adequate strength to withstand the internaland external pressure without additional reinforcement where it complies with thisClause (3.19.7).

3.19.7.2 Fitting A flanged fitting, welded fitting, 45° lateral, reducer, true Y, or doublebranch elbow shall be used within the pressure-temperature rating specified in the nominatedStandard, provided that the nominal wall thickness of the fitting is not less than thatdetermined in accordance with Clause 3.14.2.

3.19.7.3 Coupling A threaded or socket-welding coupling, or half-coupling, weldeddirectly to the pipe may be used, provided that the nominal size of the branch pipe is notlarger than the greater of—

(a) DN 50; and

(b) one quarter of the outside diameter of the main pipe.

Figures 3.19.7 (f) to (k) apply to Items (a) and (b) above.

The minimum wall thickness of a coupling in the reinforcement zone shall be not less thanthat of the unthreaded branch pipe. The wall thickness of a threaded coupling shall bemeasured from the root of the thread to the minimum outside diameter.

For set on fittings, the diameter of the hole in the main pipe shall be not greater than theinside diameter of the coupling, and shall be concentric with the coupling.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 72

3.19.7.4 Reinforced fitting An integrally reinforced set-on or set-in branch connectionfitting (see Appendix K), or a welding outlet fitting of proved design, intended to be weldedto the main pipe, shall comply with Clause 3.19.8.

The hole in the main pipe shall be concentric with the hole in the fitting.

3.19.7.5 Small bore branch The nominal size of a small bore branch welded directly tothe main pipe shall be the smaller of—

(a) DN 25; and

(b) one quarter of the outside diameter of the main pipe.

A small bore branch should not be welded if the pipe is formed by cold expansion exceeding1.5 percent, of the outside diameter or is subjected to work hardening.

3.19.7.6 Threaded connectionA threaded connection made by drilling and tapping themain pipe and threading the branch pipe shall comply with the following:

(a) The nominal size of the branch pipe shall be the smaller of DN 50 or one quarter ofthe outside diameter of the main pipe.

(b) The length of thread in the main pipe shall be not less than that shown inTable 3.19.7(A), and Figure 3.19.7.

(c) The minimum diameter of any welded-on or integrally cast connecting boss used toprovide the required length of engagement for the branch pipe shall be not less thanthat shown in Table 3.19.7(B), and Figure 3.19.7(c).

(d) See Clause 3.24.3 for limitations on threaded connections.

TABLE 3.19.7(A)

THREAD LENGTH FOR THREADED CONNECTIONmillimetres

Nominal size of branch, DN 10 15 20 25 32 40 50

Thread length (l t) min. (see Note) 8 12.5 12.5 16.0 18.5 18.5 18.5

NOTE: The thread lengths specified in this table are equal to the effective thread length specified in AS 1722.1.

TABLE 3.19.7(B)

DIAMETER OF WELDED-ON OR INTEGRALLY-CAST CONNECTION BOSSmillimetres

Nominal size of branch, DN 10 15 20 25 32 40 50

Diameter (Db) min. 35 40 45 55 65 70 85

3.19.7.7 Socket-welded connectionA socket-welded connection made by drilling andcounter-drilling the main pipe and fillet welding the branch pipe shall comply withFigure 3.19.7 and the following:

(a) The maximum nominal size of the branch pipe shall be the smaller of 50 mm and onequarter of the outside diameter of the main pipe.

(b) The minimum diameter and minimum depth of the socket shall be in accordance withTable 3.19.7(C).

(c) The minimum thickness of the drilled portion in the main pipe after counter-drillingshall be 1.5 mm (see Figure 3.19.7(b)).

COPYRIGHT

73 AS 4041 — 1998

Where necessary, a welded-on connecting boss of weld metal shall be used to provide theminimum length of 1.5 mm. The diameter of a welded-on connecting boss shall be not lessthan that shown in Table 3.19.7(B).

TABLE 3.19.7(C)

DIAMETER AND DEPTH OF SOCKET-WELDING CONNECTION

millimetres

Nominal size of branch, connection, DN 10 15 20 25 32 40 50

Diameter of socket (A) min. 17.5 22 27 34 43 50 62

Depth of socket (B) min. 5 5 7 7 7 7 8

3.19.7.8 Gamma-ray boss and plugA gamma-ray boss shall be—

(a) of a diameter not less than that shown in Table 3.19.7(B);

(b) located not more than 150 mm from the weld to be radiographed; and

(c) perpendicular to the main pipe.

The material for a gamma-ray boss and plug shall comply with Table 3.19.7(D), or shall beagreed between the parties concerned.

Figure 3.19.7.8 illustrates a typical gamma-ray boss and plug.

TABLE 3.19.7(D)

GAMMA-RAY BOSS AND PLUG

Pipe materialBoss and plug material—

bar or forging

Carbon steel orcarbon-manganese steel

Carbon steel or carbon-manganese steel

1Cr-1/2Mo steel Carbon steel, or carbon-manganese steel or samematerial as the pipe

11/4Cr-1/2Mo steel Carbon steel, carbon-maganese steel, 1Cr-1/2Mo, or thesame material as the pipe

21/4Cr-1Mo steel 1Cr-1/2Mo, 11/4Cr-1/2Mo or the same material as the pipe

1/2Cr-1/2Mo-1/4V steel 21/4Cr-Mo or the same material as the pipe

Materials not listed above Same as pipe

3.19.8 Branch connections or openings requiring reinforcement

3.19.8.1 General Where there is inadequate inherent reinforcement in the components ofa branch connection (see Clause 3.19.7), reinforcement shall be provided by one or more ofthe following means:

(a) Thickening of the main pipe, or the branch, or both (refer Appendix L).

(b) Adding a reinforcement pad.

(c) Other means agreed between the parties concerned (see Clause 3.22).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 74

This Clause (3.19.8) specifies one method of determining the required reinforcement andAppendix L gives details of another. Other methods shall be used only if agreed between theparties concerned.

The design shall include the appropriate allowances so that the required minimumreinforcement is retained during the design life of the piping.

If flexibility analysis is to be carried out to Appendix R, the branch must satisfy Appendix L.

3.19.8.2 Notation Figure 3.19.8.2 illustrates the notation used in the pressure-temperaturedesign of a branch connection, but does not illustrate the design allowances required tocompensate for the effects of corrosion, erosion and other items specified in Clause 3.13, nordoes it illustrate any mill tolerance.

The notation shall be as follows:

b = subscript referring to branch pipe

Do = outside diameter of pipe, in millimetres

Doh = outside diameter of main pipe or header, in millimetres

d1 = inside diameter of branch for right-angle connections, in millimetres

=

d2 = ‘half width’ of reinforcing zone, in millimetres

but not greater thanDoh

h = subscript referring to main pipe or header

G = corrosion, erosion, and other design allowances (see Clause 3.13)

L = height of reinforcement zone outside of main pipe, in millimetres

= 2.5(tb − G) + tr or 2.5(th − G), whichever is less

t = actual (by measurement), or minimum wall thickness of pipe, permissible inthe pipe specification, in millimetres

α = angle between axes of branch and main pipe, in degrees

tm = required minimum wall thickness of pipe for pressure-temperature designconditions as determined by use of Equation 3.14.1, in millimetres

tn = wall thickness of main pipe or header, in millimetres

tr = thickness of attached reinforcing pad, in Figure 3.19.8.2(b); or height of thelargest 60° right triangle supported by the main and branch pipe outsidediameter projected surfaces and lying completely within the area of integralreinforcement, in Figure 3.19.8.2(c), in millimetres.

COPYRIGHT

75 AS 4041 — 1998

FIGURE 3.19.7 (in part) TYPICAL SMALL BORE BRANCH CONNECTIONS

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 76


COPYRIGHT

77 AS 4041 — 1998

NOTES:

1 Connections shown are suitable for all classes of pipe, except (g), (h), (j) and (k) which are Class 3.

2 Connections shown are applicable where the maximum branch nominal size is the smaller of DN50 or onequarter of the main outside diameter.

3 The minimum throat thickness of the weld in (g), (h), (j) and (k) welds shall be not less than the wallthickness of the boss or the pipe, whichever is the thinner.

4 The toe angle on fillet F on the thinner of the branch and the main pipe is 45° maximum for Class 1 andClass 2 piping.


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 78

NOTES:

1 Both plug and boss shall be marked on top with a blunt stamp to identify the material: MS for carbonsteel, CML for 1Cr-1/2Mo steel.

2 Welding shall comply with this Standard.

3 Boss and plug welds shall blend into the parent metal and crack sensitive steels (21/4Cr-1/2Mo over 20 mmthick, 1/2Cr-1/2Mo-1/4V, 5Cr-1Mo, 9Cr-1Mo and 12Cr-1Mo-V) shall be crack detected by magnetic particleexamination.

4 Postweld heat treatment which may be required on the weld between the boss and the pipe shall be carriedout in the workshop and not on site unless otherwise agreed.

5 After the main joint has been radiographed, the plug in Figure (a), shall be seal-welded to the boss usinga qualified welding procedure which, generally, does not require postweld heat treatment.

6 Both the boss and the plug shall be machined from bars or forgings. The material shall be as specified inTable 3.19.7(D) and examined ultrasonically for freedom from laminar inclusions.

FIGURE 3.19.7.8 GAMMA-RAY BOSS AND PLUG

COPYRIGHT

79 AS 4041 — 1998

NOTES:

1 Reinforcing saddles are to be used only on 90° branches.

2 When a ring or pad is added as reinforcement (see Figure 3.19.8.2(b)), the value of reinforcing area may betaken in the same manner in which excess material in the main pipe is considered, provided a full penetrationweld is used between the branch, main pipe, and ring or pad.

3 The ratio of the width to thickness of a ring and a pad shall be as close to 4:1 as the available horizontal spaceallows within the limits of the reinforcing zone along the main pipe and the outside diameter of the branchallows, but the ratio shall be not less than 1:1.

FIGURE 3.19.8.2 (in part) REINFORCEMENT OF BRANCH CONNECTIONS

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 80

NOTE: For Items a, b and c the notations do not illustrate allowances for corrosion and erosion (seeClause 3.19.8.2) and under-thickness tolerance.

FIGURE 3.19.8.2 (in part) REINFORCEMENT OF BRANCH CONNECTIONS

3.19.8.3 Weld joint factor Where the main pipe contains a longitudinal or spiral weld andthe branch does not intersect the weld, the value of the weld joint factor (e) may be taken tobe unity for the purpose of the calculation of reinforcement, or the design strength value ofseamless pipe of comparable grade may be used to determine the value of pressure designwall thickness.

Where the branch intersects a longitudinal or spiral weld in the main pipe, or if the branchcontains a longitudinal or spiral weld, the weld joint factor (e) for either or both shall beincluded in calculations.

Where both the branch and the main pipe contain a longitudinal or spiral weld, the two weldsshall be staggered and the separation distance between the toes of the weld shall be not lessthan four times the pipe thickness.

3.19.8.4 Required reinforcement areaThe required reinforcement area shall be determinedas follows:

(a) Internal pressure The required reinforcement area for a branch connection underinternal pressure shall be the quantity—

. . . 3.19.8.4(1)A7 = (tmh − G)d1 (2 − sin α)

COPYRIGHT

81 AS 4041 — 1998

(b) External pressure The required reinforcement area for a branch connection underexternal pressure shall be the quantity—

. . . 3.19.8.4(2)A7 = 0.5(tmh − G)d1 (2 − sin α)

The required reinforcement area shall be within the reinforcement zone, (see Clause 3.19.8.6).

3.19.8.5 Reinforcement area The required reinforcement area determined byClause 3.19.8.4 shall be that provided by any combination of areasA1, A2, A3, A4, andA5 asdefined below and illustrated in Figure 3.19.8.2.

where

A1 = area provided by excess pipe wall thickness in the main pipe

= (2d2 − d1)(th − tmh)

A2 = area provided by excess pipe wall thickness in the branch pipe for a distance Labove the main pipe

=2L(tb − tmb)

sin αA3 = area provided by deposited weld metal joining the main pipe and branch (see

Figure 3.19.8.2(a)), and for fillet welds of rings, pads, and saddles (seeFigure 3.19.8.2(b))

A4 = area provided by a reinforcing ring, pad, or integral reinforcement. The valueof A4 may be taken in the same manner in which excess wall thickness in themain pipe is considered, provided a full penetration weld is used for the branch,main pipe, ring or pad, or integral reinforcement

A5 = area provided by a saddle on a right-angle connection.

Where the material required for reinforcement has a different design strength from the mainpipe, the calculated reinforcement area provided by this material shall be reduced in the ratioof the design strength being applied to the reinforcement area. No credit shall be taken formaterial having a higher design strength than the main pipe.

3.19.8.6 Reinforcement zoneThe reinforcement zone shall be a parallelogram of widthdisposed about the centreline of the branch and of height from the inside surface of the mainpipe to a point beyond the outside surface of the main pipe measured perpendicular to thisoutside surface (see Figure 3.19.8.2(a) and Figure 3.19.8.2(b)).

3.19.8.7 Reinforcement of multiple openingsMultiple branch openings should be spacedso that their reinforcement zones do not overlap. Where any two or more adjacent openingsare spaced so that their reinforcement zones overlap, the two or more openings shall bereinforced in accordance with this Clause (3.19.8.7) with a combined reinforcement givinga strength not less than the combined strength that would be required for the openings ifconsidered separately. No portion of the cross-section shall be considered as applying to morethan one opening, or be credited more than once in a combined area.

When two or more openings are to have a combined reinforcement, the minimum distancebetween centres of any two of these openings should be not less than 1.5 times the averageof their diameters, and the area of reinforcement between them shall be not less than50 percent of the total required for these two openings.

3.19.8.8 Rings, pads, and saddlesReinforcement provided in the form of a ring, pad, orsaddle shall be of uniform width around its entire circumference unless designed toClause 3.18 of AS 1210—1997.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 82

A hole shall be provided to the ring, pad or saddle to vent air during welding and heattreatment.

Where a ring, pad, or saddle is made in sections, full penetration welds shall be used betweeneach section, and each section shall have a vent hole.

3.19.8.9 Gusset plates, ribs and staysA gusset plate, rib or stay shall not be used asreinforcement against stress due to pressure, but may be used to support a branch againstexternal forces and moments. To avoid local stress in the pipe wall, gusset plates should bewelded to the reinforcement ring, collars or saddles.

3.19.8.10 Other designs Where the adequacy of a design cannot be otherwise verified ascomplying with this Clause (3.19.8), the design shall comply with Clause 3.22.

3.19.8.11 Branch connections subject to external forces and momentsWhere externalforces and moments will be applied to a branch connection by thermal expansion andcontraction, by the dead weight of the pipe, valves and fittings, coverings and contents, orby earth settlement, the flexibility of the branch connection shall be analysed (seeClause 3.27).

3.19.9 Extruded outlets

3.19.9.1 General This Clause applies to extruded outlets (see Clause 1.7) with integralreinforcement where the radii of the extrusion are controlled by use of a die or dies.

This Clause applies only to outlets where the axis of the outlet intersects and is perpendicularto the axis of the main pipe and does not deform a welded joint.

This Clause does not apply to a branch where additional non-integral material is attached inthe form of collars, rings or saddles.

The design shall include appropriate allowances (see Clause 3.13) to ensure that the requiredreinforcement is maintained during the design life.

If flexibility analysis is to be carried out to Appendix R, the branch must satisfy Appendix L.

3.19.9.2 Notation The notation is as follows (see also Figure 3.19.9.2):

Dc = internal diameter of main pipe, in millimetres

Dh = outside diameter of main pipe, in millimetres

do = internal diameter of extruded outlet measured at the level of the outside surfaceof the main pipe, in millimetres

H = height of the reinforcement zone, in millimetres

= 0.7(DbTo)1/2

K = factor determined by the ratio of branch diameter to main pipe diameter (seeClause 3.19.9.4)

Tb = nominal wall thickness of branch, in millimetres

Th = nominal wall thickness of main pipe, in millimetres

To = corroded finished thickness of extruded outlet, measured to a point on or beyondthe outside surface of the main pipe, in millimetres

Db = outside diameter of branch, in millimetres

db = inside diameter of branch, in millimetres

dc = internal diameter of branch, in millimetres

ho = height of the extruded outlet, in millimetres

≥ ro, except as shown

COPYRIGHT

83 AS 4041 — 1998

r1 = half-width of reinforcement zone, in millimetres

= Do

ro = radius of external contoured portion of outlet measured in the plane containingthe axes of the main pipe and branch (see Clause 3.19.9.3), in millimetres

tb = required wall thickness of branch, in millimetres

th = required wall thickness of main pipe, in millimetres.

3.19.9.3 Radius of external contourThe radius of the external contoured portion of anoutlet (see Figure 3.19.9.2) shall comply with the following:

(a) Minimum value of ro:

(i) For outlet outside diameter≤765 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05Db mm.

(ii) For outlet outside diameter >765 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . 38 mm.

(b) Maximum value ofro:

(i) For outlet outside diameter <220 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . 32 mm.

(ii) For outlet outside diameter≥220 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.10Db + 13)mm.

(c) More than one radius:

Where the external contour contains more than one radius, the radius of best fit of anyarc sector of 45° shall comply with Item (a) and the radius at any point shall complywith Item (b).

Machining shall not be employed to achieve compliance with the requirements of Items (a),(b), and (c).

3.19.9.4 Required reinforcement areaThe required reinforcement area is defined as equalto KthDo, whereK shall be determined as follows:

(a) ForDb/Dh ≤ 0.15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K = 0.70.

(b) For Db/Dh > 0.15 and≤ 0.60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K = 0.60 + 2/3 × (Db/Dh).

(c) For Db/Dh > 0.60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K = 1.00.

3.19.9.5 Reinforcement area The area required for reinforcement (AR) shall be—A1 + A2 + A3

where

A1 = area lying within the reinforcement zone resulting from any excess wallthickness available in the main pipe

= Do(Th − th)

A2 = area lying within the reinforcement zone resulting from excess wallthickness available in the branch pipe

= 2H(Tb − tb)

A3 = area lying within the reinforcement zone resulting from excess thicknessavailable in the extruded outlet lip

= 2ro(To − Tb).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 84

NOTE: Taper bore 1 D (if required) to match branch pipe 1:3 maximum taper.

FIGURE 3.19.9.2 REINFORCED EXTRUDED OUTLETS

COPYRIGHT

85 AS 4041 — 1998

3.20 WELDED BRANCH CONNECTIONS

3.20.1 General A branch connection made by welding shall be designated set-on or set-in,and may be made by the use of a fitting or pipe.

3.20.2 Fittings Typical details for a set-on and a set-in branch connection made fromfittings are shown in Appendix K. Other designs which comply with this Standard may beused.

3.20.3 Branch pipes

3.20.3.1 General Typical details for a set-on and a set-in branch connection made frompipe are shown in Appendix M.

3.20.3.2 Limitations on use Branch connections show in Figure M7 may be used for allpiping classes. Branch connections made in accordance with Figure M6 are only applicableto Class 3 piping.

Branch connections made with partial penetration welds should not be used where—

(a) cyclic stressing can occur;

(b) high thermal gradients can cause overstressing;

(c) high strength crack sensitive materials are used; or

(d) the nominal wall thickness of the thinnest pipe is greater than 50 mm.

3.20.3.3 Weld preparations A weld preparation shall be as shown in the qualified weldingprocedure specification. Some typical weld preparations and weld connections are shown inAppendix M.

3.20.3.4 Backing rings Permanent backing rings shall not be used for Class 1 piping.

3.21 DESIGN OF CLOSURES FOR PIPE ENDS AND BRANCHES

3.21.1 General Fittings such as threaded plugs, blank flanges, or welded caps used toclose and seal the ends of pipes and branches shall be in accordance with the nominatedStandard, or shall comply with AS 1210, and shall be used within the pressure-temperaturerating specified in that Standard.

3.21.2 Openings in closuresOpenings in closures shall be made by extruding, threading,or welding. Attachments to the closure shall be in accordance with Clause 3.19. Where thesize of the opening is greater than half the inside diameter of the closure, the opening shallbe designed as a reducer, in accordance with Clause 3.16.

Openings in closures other than provided for above shall be reinforced in accordance withClause 3.19. The total cross-sectional area required for reinforcement in any plane passingthrough the centre of the opening shall be not less than the product of the diameter of thefinished opening and the required wall thickness.

3.21.3 Threaded openings A threaded plug may be used to close an opening, and maybe seal welded. Consideration should be given to the effect of any plug projection into thebore of the pipe. See Clause 3.24.3 for limitations on threaded connections.

3.22 DESIGN OF OTHER PRESSURE-RETAINING COMPONENTS A pressure-retaining component not complying with a nominated Standard, and for which designequation or procedures are not given in this Standard, may be used where the design of asimilarly shaped, proportioned, and sized component has been proved satisfactory incomparable service conditions. Interpolation may be made between similarly shaped, provedcomponents with small differences in size or proportion. In the absence of such serviceexperience, the design shall be based on an analysis consistent with the general philosophyembodied in this Standard and substantiated by appropriate performance testing, a proof testsuch as that described in AS 1210, experimental stress analysis, or theoretical calculation.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 86

3.23 ATTACHMENTS3.23.1 General External and internal attachments to piping shall be designed so as not tocause flattening of the pipe, excessive localized bending stresses, or harmful thermalgradients in the pipe wall. Where the number of stress cycles from external stress, pressureor thermal changes is relatively large for the design life of the piping. Attachments shall bedesigned to minimize concentration of stress. See Clause 3.19.5 for locations of weldsrelative to other welds.

To eliminate heat treatment at site, it is recommended that attachments should not be weldeddirect to the pipe. Intermediate plates should be welded to the pipe in the shop, heat treatedwhere necessary, and the attachments welded to the intermediate plates on site.

Figure 3.23.1 shows typical items normally attached by welding. For critical attachments,guidance on design may be found in, for example, WRC 198 and BS 5500.

For temporary attachments see AS 4458.

3.23.2 Welding of attachments3.23.2.1 General Steel structural attachments for load-carrying purposes, such as lugs andbrackets, may be welded to steel pipe. The attachments shall be of sufficient size to preventexcessive local stresses in the pipe. An attachment weld shall be continuous around the endsand the sides.

3.23.2.2 Elevated temperature pipingA full penetration weld shall be used to join anattachment for design temperatures above 250°C.

3.23.2.3 Class 2 and Class 3 pipingA single fillet weld may be used to join theattachment for Class 2 and Class 3.

3.23.3 Thickness of attachments The thickness and length of any attachment shallcomply with the requirement for intensity of radial loading (see Clause 3.23.4).

Between one and two times the pipe wall thickness is suggested.

3.23.4 Intensity of radial loading An optional method of calculating the intensity ofradial loading is given in this Clause (3.23.4). The intensity of radial loading shall be notgreater than that determined by the following equation:

. . . 3.23.4(1)q =

8ft 2n

3Dwhere

q = intensity of radial loading, in newtons per millimetre

f = design strength of the pipe, in megapascals

tn = nominal wall thickness of pipe, in millimetres

D = outside diameter of pipe, in millimetres.

For a load-carrying attachment welded longitudinally along a pipe (see Figures 3.23.1(a),3.23.1(b) and 3.23.1(c)), the intensity of radial loading may be determined by the followingequation:

. . . 3.23.4(2)q ≤ R

L+ 6We

L 2

where

R = radial component of the forceW, in newtons

W = total force carried by attachment, in newtons

e = eccentricity of line of action of forceW about the line of attachment to the pipe,in millimetres

L = length of attachment, in millimetres.

NOTE: Other methods such as given in WRC 198 and BS 5500 are also acceptable.

COPYRIGHT

87 AS 4041 — 1998

FIGURE 3.23.1 (in part) TYPICAL WELDED ATTACHMENTS

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 88

FIGURE 3.23.1 (in part) TYPICAL WELDED ATTACHMENTS

3.24 PIPING JOINTS

3.24.1 General The type of joint between pipes, fittings, and components shall be suitablefor the design conditions, including external loadings, and shall take into account jointtightness, mechanical strength, the contents, and the method of fabrication. Joints shallcomply with this Clause (3.24).

3.24.2 Welded joints

3.24.2.1 Butt welds Butt welds shall be used for piping joints in Class 1 and 2 pipingexcept as provided in Clauses 3.24.2.2 and 3.24.2.3 below.

The throat thickness of butt welds, excluding any weld reinforcement and excess penetration,shall be not less than that of the joined thinner part.

The weld preparation for butt welds shall comply with the qualified welding procedurespecification.

Some typical joints and associated preparation are shown in Figures N1 and N2 ofAppendix N.

Permanent backing rings, i.e. those that are not removed after the weld is made, shall not beused for Class 1 piping unless agreed between the parties concerned. See also Clause 2.9 forbacking rings and inserts.

Where components of different outside diameters are welded together, there shall be a gradualtransition between the two surfaces. The length of the transition may include the weld. The

COPYRIGHT

89 AS 4041 — 1998

slope of the transition shall be such that the ratio of length to offset shall be not less than 1in 2.

3.24.2.2 Fillet welds Fillet welds may be used to attach bell-and-spigots, sleeves, slip-onflanges, small-bore connections and socket-welding components.

Fillet welds may also be used to attach a reinforcing ring, pad, saddle or structuralattachment, to supplement the strength of a joint, to reduce stress concentration at a joint, toprevent disassembly of a joint, and to provide sealing of a joint.

Single fillet welds should not be used where corrosive conditions or cyclic stresses are likelyto occur, or where thermal gradients could overstress the attachment welds.

As shape of a fillet weld could vary from concave to convex, the size of a fillet weld shallbe determined as shown in Appendix N.

3.24.2.3 Socket-welded jointsJoints of the socket-welded type shall be as follows:

(a) Dimensions shall comply with Figure O1, Appendix O,

(b) Socket dimensions shall comply with ANSI/ASME B16.5 for flanges, or as specifiedin this Standard.

The temperature-pressure rating of the socket-welded joint shall comply with the relevantnominated Standard.

Drain pipe and bypass pipe for a component may be attached directly by socket welding (seeClause 3.19.7.7 for socket-welded branch connections).

A socket-welded joint shall not be used in pipes larger than DN 65 or pipes subject to severecyclic conditions.

A socket-welded joint should be located so that the joint may be isolated from large boilers,vessels, or other sources of supply.

A socket-welded joint should not be used where corrosion may render the joint inadequate.

3.24.2.4 Welded sleeve jointsA sleeve joint shall not be used for Class 1 piping, andwhere used for Class 2 and Class 3 piping, it shall comply with Figure P1, Appendix P.

3.24.2.5 Welded bell-and-spigot jointsA welded bell-and-spigot joint shall not be usedfor Class 1 and Class 2A piping, and where used for Class 2P and Class 3 piping shallcomply with Figure O1(b), Appendix O.

3.24.2.6 Partial penetration butt welds Partial penetration butt welds may be used forClass 3 low hazard piping on liquid Type 4 only, e.g. fire protection water systems asfollows:

(a) Design temperature in the range 0°C to 50°C.

(b) Not subject to shock, water hammer or vibration.

(c) The penetration shall be not less than 60 percent of the thickness of the thinner of thejoined parts, and the throat thickness (including any weld reinforcement or excesspenetration) shall be not less than the thickness of the thinner of the joined parts.

(d) For partial penetration butt welds, V-preparation may not be necessary. See Figure N3,Appendix N, for preparation and assembly details.

3.24.2.7 Stress corrosion cracking If heat treatment is required to resist stress corrosioncracking then this shall be specified to the fabricator. (See also Clause 3.29).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 90

3.24.3 Threaded joints

3.24.3.1 General Threaded joints may be used for all fluid services within the limitationsof Clause 3.14 and this Clause.

The mechanical thread, sealant, male and female, component materials and geometry shallbe suitable for the service conditions.

Threaded joints shall not be used in services where severe erosion, crevice corrosion, shockor fatigue are expected to occur.

Threaded joints are prohibited between components made of different metals with markedlydifferent coefficients of expansion.

Threaded joints are permitted for ferrous, non-ferrous and plastics pipe construction.

Threaded joints are not recommended for fluid types 1 and 2.

Sealing compound shall not be used when threaded joints are to be seal welded.

For seal welded joints no strength contribution shall be attributed to the weld material.

Piping layout using threaded joints should minimize stress at joints, with special attention tostresses due to thermal expansion and operation of valves particularly if the threaded valveis at the free end. Provision should be made to eliminate the tendency for the piping systemto unscrew joints.

For typical outlets see Clause 3.19.7.

3.24.3.2 Leak tightness Leak tightness is generally not a function of pipe diameter, pipethickness, pipe content or number of turns past hand tightness. Higher performance may beexpected when taper-threaded sockets are used. Leaks seem to be dependent on the pressureof the fluid and on the number of threads engaged but particularly depend on the use andeffectiveness of a jointing compound. The leak path is usually the spaces formed by threadtolerances, truncation and misformed threads. Such leaks can be prevented by the effectiveuse of a jointing compound.

Compatible sealant shall be used except for special threads that are designed to excludesealant and for which assembly must be confirmed by a procedure test.

At high pressures, failure may occur by elastic expansion of the socket allowing thread jumpand leaking.

3.24.3.3 Thread types Threads may be taper to taper, parallel to parallel or taper toparallel.

The limitations of each type are set out in Clause 3.24.3.5 below. Threads to AS 1722.1,AS 1722.2, API 5B and ASME B1.20.1 comply with this Standard. Thread conventions ofsize and direction in respect to contents listed in other Australian Standards arerecommended.

There shall be a minimum of four effective threads operating in the complete joint.

3.24.3.4 Ratings on fittings and screwed flangesFittings which comply with AS 3672 andAS 3673 (which follow British tradition), are limited to DN 150 maximum. Such fittings arematched with pipe to AS 1074 which also has a DN 150 top limit. AS 1074 pipe has a 2 MPaand Class 3 limitation imposed.

The ratings for threaded fittings to Australian Standards are set out in Table 3.24.3. Theratings for threaded fittings to other Standards shall not be exceeded e.g. Fittingsmanufactured to ASME B16.11 have upper limits on service conditions and these shall notbe exceeded.

For the ratings of threaded-boss flanges see Clause 3.24.4.6.

COPYRIGHT

91 AS 4041 — 1998

TABLE 3.24.3

RATINGS OF FITTINGSMPa

Temperature range, C°

Material

Malleable cast iron(AS 3673)

Steel(AS 3672)

Diameter range(DN inclusive)

6–150 6–50 65–150

120 < T < 300 2.0 4.0 2.0

−20 < T < 120 2.5 5.0 2.5

In sizes above DN 150, API 5B threads apply. The pressure rating of these threads may bedetermined as follows. By test or calculation determine the pressure at which socketexpansion permits thread jump.

The maximum pressure rating is this pressure multiplied by the ratio design stress/yield stressapplying to the socket.

3.24.3.5 Limitations Limitations for screwed joints in steel piping for steam service aregiven in Table 3.24.3.5.

3.24.3.6 Pressure test Threaded assemblies shall be pressure tested for leak tightness atthe pressures for the material set out in Clause 6.7.

For piping joints with a design pressure determined by the thread jump method, thehydrostatic test pressure may be as high as 0.83 times the thread jump pressure.

3.24.4 Flanged joints

3.24.4.1 General A flange and its bolting shall comply with a nominated Standard (seeClause 2.2.1). Where a flange to a nominated Standard is not available then the flange jointdesign shall meet the requirements of AS 1210.

3.24.4.2 Flange ratings A flange shall be used within the pressure-temperature ratingspecified in the nominated Standard.

Where flanges of different ratings are bolted together, the rating of the flanged joint and thebolting torque shall be that of the lower-rated flange.

3.24.4.3 Flange facings Flange facings shall be suitable for the intended service, thegasket and the bolting used.

Flange facings may be flat face, raised face, ‘O’ ring grooved, tongue and groove and ringjoint.

Where a raised faced steel flange is to be bolted to a flat face cast iron flange the raised faceonly shall be removed from the steel flange.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 92

TABLE 3.24.3.5

LIMITATIONS FOR SCREWED JOINTS IN STEEL PIPINGFOR STEAM SERVICE

Maximumtemperature

°CJoint type Size range

PressureMPa

Thickness(Note 1)

Pipe material

T ≤ 260(Note 2)

Taper/Parallel DN6-DN25 Incl.DN36 & DN40

1.050.95

Medium or heavy AS 1074, BS 1387

T ≤ 260(Note 2)

Taper/Taper DN50 & DN65DN80DN100

1.251.050.90

Medium or heavy AS 1074, BS 1387

T ≤ 495(Note 6)

Taper/Taper(Note 3 & 5)

≤ DN20DN25DN32 ≤ DN50DN65 & DN80

10.358.304.152.75(Note 7)

ANSI/ASMEB36.10 Sch80(Note 4)

Tensile strength330 MPa min

NOTES:

1 In no case shall the thickness for the design conditions be less than that calculated in Clause 3.14including threading allowance.

2 Class 3 only.

3 Alternatively, taper to parallel with seal welding or leak sealing other than threads that has provensatisfactory in service or test demonstrations.

4 May be Sch40 where fluid is steam and pressure≤1.75 MPa or water with temperature≤105°C andpressure≤7 MPa.

5 Taper to parallel is permitted where T≤260°C and size≤DN40 for fluid Type 4.

6 Temperatures and pressures in excess of these are permitted for instrument tappings, instrumentinsertions (thermowells etc.) and for plugs for radiographic examinations provided the following are met:

(a) The connection size is less than the smaller of DN50 and main or header pipe size × 0.25.

(b) The minimum number of engaged threads is not less than:

6 for DN ≤ 20 mm

7 for 20 < DN < 40 mm

8 for 40 < DN < 50 mm

(c) The connection is seal welded.

(d) The instrument insertion can withstand the fluid flow characteristics.

7 Pressures of 34.5 MPa are permitted in dead end instrument lines at the outlet end and downstream ofshut-off valves and instruments, control apparatus or discharge of a sampling cooler, where the sizeis ≤12 mm.

3.24.4.4 Gaskets Full face gaskets are used with flat faced flanges, flat ring gaskets areused with raised face and tongue and groove flanges, ‘O’ rings gaskets are used with ‘O’ ringgrooved flanges and ring gaskets are used with ring joint flanges.

Gaskets shall be suitable for the service conditions including temperature, pressure andservice fluids. Gaskets should comply with the gasket manufacturer’s recommendations.

The flat ring gasket for a raised-face shall have an outside diameter not less than the outsidediameter of the raised face. To ensure correct gasket alignment, the outside diameter of thegasket should fit neatly within the bolt circle or the gasket should be fitted with a centeringring.

The gasket for a full-face flange shall have an outside diameter not less than the outsidediameter of the flange.

Flat ring gasket shall not be fitted to flanges specified in a nominated Standard as flat facedunless the conditions nominated in Clause 3.24.4.3 are met.

COPYRIGHT

93 AS 4041 — 1998

Rubber with canvas insertions may be used only for water at temperature less than 65°C.

The dimensions of any ‘O’-ring shall be as specified in AS 2129.

The effect of flange facing finish should be considered in gasket material selection.

3.24.4.5 Bolting Bolting shall comply with AS 2528, AS 2129 and with the appropriatepressure-temperature rating of the flange as specified in the nominated flange Standard.Bolting shall seat the gasket and maintain joint tightness under all design conditions(see Clause 2.6). The calculation method set out in AS 1210 to determine bolt loads forgasket seating and maintaining joint tightness under given pressure and temperatureconditions may be used.

Appendix G provides design strengths most commonly used for ferrous and non-ferrousbolting.

NOTE: Bolting includes bolts, studs, cap screws, nuts and washers.

3.24.4.6 Threaded-boss flangesThe maximum pressure and temperature for athreaded-boss flange in which the tightness of the joint depends upon the tightness of thethreads shall be as shown in Table 3.24.4(A).

A threaded flange is not recommended for severe cyclic service, but if it is the pipe andflange shall be seal-welded at the face of the flange.

A threaded flange shall be seal-welded where the tightness of the joint depends on thetightness of the threads and the joint contains a corrosive, flammable or toxic fluid, or fluidswhich are difficult to contain.

The thread of a taper-to-taper or a taper-to-parallel joint for flammable or toxic fluid shallrun out at a point just inside the hub of the flange.

The socket of a parallel-to-parallel joint shall be fully tightened then seal-welded.

There shall be a seal-weld on the face and the back of a flange for use with corrosive fluid.

3.24.4.7 Limitations on the use of flanges to AS 2129Except for replacement purposes,a flange specified to Table C of AS 2129—1994 should not be used.

Slip-on flanges single welded should not be used where—

(a) the number of cycles exceeds 7000;

(b) the fluid is type 1, 2 or 3; or

(c) crevice corrosion occurs.

TABLE 3.24.4(A)

RATINGS OF THREADED-BOSS FLANGES

Flange material Method of attachmentMaximum design

pressureMPa

Maximum designtemperature

°C

Carbon and carbon-manganese steel

Threaded and expanded 3.1 370

Taper-to-taper thread 2.1 260

Taper-to-parallel thread 0.86 260

Alloy steel Threaded and expanded 4.2 480

Cast ironTaper-to-taper thread 1.05 180

Taper-to-parallel thread 0.86 180

Copper and copperalloy

Threaded Refer to appropriate Tables in AS 2129.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 94

3.24.4.8 Welded flanges The weld preparation for a welded flange shall comply with thequalified welding procedure and Figure 3.24.4.8 or other preparation agreed between theparties concerned.

Flanges shall not be a tight fit on the pipe. The maximum clearance between the bore of theflange and the outside diameter of the pipe shall be as given in Table 3.24.4(B).

The design condition limits shown in Table 3.24.4(C) shall apply, according to the type offlange.

For attachments in Figure 3.24.4.8(A) to (D) inclusive, there are no additional limits exceptthat full penetration welds shall be used for steel groups E and G.

For attachments in Figure 3.24.4.8(E) to (H) a pressure limit of 8.3 MPa at 50°C for carbonsteel and equivalent applies and the temperature shall not exceed 425°C.

Attachments in Figure 3.24.4.8(B) to (G) inclusive should be avoided whenever thermalgradient may cause overstress in welds or where many large temperature fluctuations areexpected.

Attachments in Figure 3.24.4.8(G) to (H) are not recommended for corrosive conditions.

Additionally, slip on flanges and socket-welded flanges are not recommended for servicebelow minus 45°C.

TABLE 3.24.4(B)

MAXIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN PIPES AND FLANGESmillimetres

Nominal thickness of pipeMaximum clearance

between bore of flange andoutside diameter of pipe

Sum of thediametrically oppositeclearances, maximum

Weld leg length,minimum

Over 5 3 5 6

Over 4 up to and including 5 2.5 4 5

Over 3 up to and including 4 2 3 4

Up to and including 3 1.5 2 4

COPYRIGHT

95 AS 4041—1998

TABLE 3.24.4(C)

LIMITATIONS ON STEEL FLANGE ATTACHMENT WELDSmillimetres

Type of weld(Figure 3.24.4.8)

Flange Temperature(max.), °C (see

Notes)

Nominal size(max.)

mm

Pipe bore(min.)mmStandard No. Type Table Class

1 AS 2129ANSI/ASME

B16.5Welding neck — — — — —

2 AS 2129 Plate — — — 150* —

3 and 3A AS 2129 Plate — — — 150* 75

4, 4A and 4B AS 2129 Plate or boss R — 425 — —

5 and 5A AS 2129 Plate R — 425 — 75

6 AS 2129 Plate J — 425 — —

6A AS 2129 Boss J —

ANSI/ASMEB16.5

Slip-on — 300 425† — —

7 AS 2129 Boss H — 400 150 —

ANSI/ASMEB16.5

Slip-on — — † 100 —

See Appendix OANSI/ASME

B16.5Socket —

150 to 600 † 80 —

900 and 1 500 † 65 —

— Indicates flange limits of the nominated Standard apply.

* Applies to alloy steel. No restriction for carbon and carbon-manganese steels.

† Not recommended for service above 260°C if severe thermal gradients on thermal cycling are involved.

NOTES:

1 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanged joints may develop leaks when used above 200°C and where severe thermal gradients or severe external loads occur.

2 All flanges are susceptible to leaks when used above 400°C and where severe thermal gradients or severe external loads occur.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 96

NOTES:

1 Preparation and assembly for welding to be in accordance with AS 4458.

2 tf is the pressure design wall thickness, see Clause 3.14.

FIGURE 3.24.4.8(A) TYPE 1 ‘WELDING NECK’ FLANGE

COPYRIGHT

97 AS 4041—1998

Dimension Steel Design basis

Bafter machining

Carbon tfbut not less than 5

Alloy and 500 Nb 2tf

Cafter machining

Carbon t2but not less than:6 for pipes 15 and 20 DN8 for pipes 25 to 40 DN

10 for pipes 50 DN and overAlloy and 500 Nb 2tf

E Carbon tf but not less than 6

E1 Alloy and 500 Nb Height of weld recess

NOTES:

1 tf is the calculated pipe thickness (see Clause 3.14).

2 The outer surface of the weld needs to lie wholly outside the position indicated by the dotted lineor full line, whichever is applicable.

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES

FIGURE 3.24.4.8(B) TYPE 2 ‘FACE AND BACK’ WELDED FLANGE(FOR METAL-ARC WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 98


Aafter machining

Carbon, alloy and 500 Nb 1/2 tf but not less than 5

B

Carbon, alloy and 500 Nb 8 minimum(tf – 1.5) where tf is over 9.5 up to andincluding 14(tf – 3) where tf is over 14 up to andincluding 22(tf – 6) where tf is over 22

Cafter machining




E1 Alloy and 500 Nb Height of weld recess

NOTES:


2 The outer surface of the weld needs to lie wholly outside the position indicated by the dotted line orfull line, whichever is applicable.


FIGURE 3.24.4.8(C) TYPE 3 ‘BORE AND BACK’ WELDED FLANGE(FOR METAL-ARC WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

99 AS 4041—1998


Aafter machining

Carbon, alloy and 500 Nb 1/2 tf but not less than 5

Cafter machining




E1 Alloy and 500 Nb 2/3 tf + 6 but not less than tf

NOTES:


2 The outer surface of the weld needs to lie wholly outside the position indicated by the dotted line orfull line, whichever is applicable.


FIGURE 3.24.4.8(D) TYPE 3A ‘BORE AND BACK’ WELDED FLANGE(WELD PREPARATION FOR USE ONLY WITH FLANGES

POSITIONALLY WELDED ON BY THE METAL-ARC PROCESS)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 100

Dimension Design basis

Bafter machining

tf but not less than the weld leg length given in Table 3.24.4(B)

E 11/2 tf but not less than the weld leg length given in Table 3.24.4(B)

NOTES:


2 The outer surface of the weld needs to lie wholly outside the position indicated by the dottedline.


FIGURE 3.24.4.8(E) TYPE 4 AND 4A ‘FACE AND FILLET’ WELDEDFLANGES (FOR METAL-ARC WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

101 AS 4041—1998


Aafter machining

1/2 tf but not less than 5

B 8 minimum(tf – 1.5) where tf is over 9.5 up to and including 14(tf – 3) where tf is over 14 up to and including 22(tf – 6) where tf is over 22


NOTES:




FIGURE 3.24.4.8(F) TYPE 5 ‘FACE AND FILLET’ WELDEDFLANGES (FOR METAL-ARC WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 102


Aafter machining

1/2 tf but not less than 5

B 11/2 tf but not less than the weld leg length given in Table 3.24.4(B)

NOTES:




FIGURE 3.24.4.8(G) TYPE 5A ‘FACE AND FILLET’ WELDED FLANGES(WELD PREPARATION FOR USE ONLY WITH FLANGE POSITIONALLY

WELDED ON BY THE METAL-ARC PROCESS)

COPYRIGHT

103 AS 4041—1998


B tf but not less than the weld leg length given in Table 3.24.4(B)


NOTES:

1 All dimensions are finished sizes.




FIGURE 3.24.4.8(H) TYPE 6 and 6A ‘SLIP-ON’ WELDED FLANGES(FOR METAL-ARC WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 104


B tf but not less than the weld leg length given in Table 3.24.4(B)


NOTES:

1 All dimensions are finished sizes.



FIGURE 3.24.4.8(I) TYPE 7 ‘SLIP-ON’ WELDED BOSSED FLANGES(FOR OXY-ACETYLENE WELDING)

COPYRIGHT

105 AS 4041—1998

3.24.5 Flared, flareless and compression jointsA flared, flareless or compression fittingshall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

In the absence of Standards or design strength values for the material used for themanufacture of these fittings, the designer shall determine that the type and the material ofeach fitting is adequate and safe for the service.

Consideration shall be given to the possible adverse effects on the joints of assembly anddisassembly, cyclic loading, cyclic temperature, low temperature, vibration and shock, andthermal expansion and contraction.

Fittings and joints shall be compatible with the pipe, and fittings shall be assembled andapplied as recommended by the manufacturer. Joints for severe cyclic conditions shall beprotected or guarded to control leakage and failure.

Roll grooved type joints are permitted when assembled and used in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations.

The gripping member of a flareless fitting shall grip or bite into the outer surface of the pipewith sufficient strength to hold the pipe against axial force, but shall not appreciably distortthe inside diameter of the pipe. The gripping member shall form a pressure seal against thebody of the fitting.

Where a bite-type fitting is used, a spot check shall be made for adequate depth of bite andcondition of the pipe, by disassembling and reassembling at least one joint. Grip-type fittingstightened in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions need not be disassembled forchecking.

NOTE: The use of olive-type compression fittings is not permitted for flammable gas use (refer toAS/NZS 1596 and AG 601).

3.24.6 Caulked joints A caulked joint shall not be used for Class 1 piping or under severecyclic conditions. A caulked joint shall be used only within the pressure-temperature limitsof the pipe and the joint.

Disengagement of a joint at bends and dead ends shall be prevented. Lateral reactions shallbe restrained.

Material used to caulk a joint shall be appropriate to the fluid, pressure and temperature.

Safeguards shall be taken against fluid type 2.

3.24.7 Soldered joints A soldered joint shall not be used for Class 1 and Class 2 piping,nor on piping carrying fluid types 1 and 2, or on piping subject to severe shock,water-hammer, vibration, or where there is a possible fire or explosion hazard. The servicetemperature shall be less than 75°C.

A soldered joint shall be a lap or socket-type, and the solder shall be suitable for anycomponent material and the service conditions. A soldered fillet joint shall not be used. Aprocedure test shall be made and qualified.

3.24.8 Brazed joints. A brazed joint may be used for Class 1, 2 or 3 piping with servicetemperatures not above 200°C. The maximum nominal size for fluids 1 or 2 is DN 250. Fora brazed joint in piping carrying fluid types 1 and 2, to or where there is a possible firehazard, mechanical safeguarding shall be provided, e.g. by limiting location, relevance of site,or if conditions are such that any leakages are not likely to impair safety or the environment.

The joint shall be a lap or socket-type fitting with brazing alloy suitable for the componentmaterial and the service conditions. A butt brazed joint or joint depending on fillet only shallnot be used. A procedure test shall be made and qualified.

3.24.9 Expansion joints (See Clause 3.18).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 106

3.24.10 Proprietary and special joints A coupling-type, mechanical gland-type, adhesiveor any other proprietary or special joint type may be used only where experience or tests hasdemonstrated that the joint is safe for the operating conditions, and where adequate provisionis made to prevent separation of the joint during use. Proprietary joints shall be used only inaccordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Roll grooved type joints are permittedwhen used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.25 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO SPECIFIC PIPING

3.25.1 Drainage systems of steam piping

3.25.1.1 General Every precaution shall be taken in the laying out of steam piping toprevent the accumulation of water in the piping during steady state operation, start up andshutdown. Provision shall be made for water, continuously or occasionally formed, to beefficiently removed from the piping system during steady start up and shutdown.

As far as is practicable drainage water shall not be allowed to come into contact with metalat a higher temperature.

Design conditions for drain systems are given in Clauses 3.9.6 and 3.9.7.

3.25.1.2 Fall A suitable fall or grade shall be provided in steam piping to ensure that thewater flows towards the drainage point and this fall should be in the direction of the steamflow.

Recommended falls for steam pipe drainage towards drain points are as follows:

(a) Drainage in the direction of steam flow to be 1 in 100 minimum.

(b) Drainage against the direction of steam flow to be 1 in 40 minimum.

Drain lines shall be designed to ensure drainage by gravity when there is little or no pressurein the main line and to accommodate any downward movement of the drain connections whenthermal expansion of the lines takes place.

3.25.1.3 Drainage points Steam piping shall be provided with adequate draining pointswhere water can collect during start up and operation. Such provisions shall be in the formof a drain pockets.

The drain pockets shall have a bore not less than 25% of the bore of the main and should befitted with a side take-off point which should be located above the bottom of the pocket, tominimize blockage of the drain pipe by scale or other debris.

Drain pockets shall be connected to steam traps or other suitable apparatus to ensure the rapiddischarge of water from the system. It is recommended that a bypass be fitted to each traparranged so that any dirt or debris collection in the pocket can be ejected via the by passvalve.

Where water can collect in the piping due to valve leakage or other causes when the pipingis shutdown, or during warming through, then hand drains shall be provided at these points.

3.25.1.4 Drain branches Drain branches shall be fitted with suitable means of controllingor isolating the drain flow, such as orifice plates, isolating valves or traps depending on thesystem to be drained. Where two valves in series are used, the upstream valve shall be of the‘on-off’ type (e.g. parallel slide) and the downstream valve shall be of a type suitable forflow regulation (e.g. globe valve). Where drains are connected to a common drain pipe, thereshall be non-return valve between each drain branch and the common drain, and means toisolate each drain.

COPYRIGHT

107 AS 4041—1998

3.25.1.5 Drains subject to vacuum pressureDrains on piping which may be subject to sub-atmospheric pressure, if connected to an atmospheric drain vessel as an alternative dischargeoutlet, shall have a valve or other device to isolate the direct connection to the atmosphericdrain vessel when the piping is at sub-atmospheric pressure, if connected to an atmosphericdrain vessel as an alternative discharge outlet, shall have a valve or other device to isolatethe direct connection to the atmospheric drain vessel when the piping is at sub-atmosphericpressure.

3.25.1.6 Separators Separators with drainage outlets should be installed where entrainedwater may cause damage to turbines or other equipment.

3.25.2 Drain vessels and vents for boiler and high pressure steam piping

2.25.2.1 Drain vessels A drain vessel and its associated vent pipes shall provide for themost probable adverse condition of discharge of large volumes of steam to atmosphere, andthe design shall take into account the kinetic energy and the enthalpy of the steam. (SeeClause 3.9.6 and 3.9.7 for design conditions).

3.25.2.2 Vessel shell thicknessThe vessel shall be designed to AS 1210 and the shellthickness shall be suitable for the loads, particularly at inlet connections and where supportsimpose concentrated loads.

NOTE: It is normally accepted that a thickness/diameter ratio of about 1:100 is sufficient to providefor the conditions likely to occur in drain vessels.

3.25.2.3 Inlet branches An inlet branch that is subject to vibration shall be suitablyreinforced.

3.25.2.4 Vent pipe guides and supportsVent pipe guides and supports shall allow freeexpansion of the vent pipe to maximum vent temperature. See Clause 3.9.7 for designconditions.

3.25.3 Instrument, control and sampling piping

3.25.3.1 General This Clause (3.25.3) applies to the design of instrument, control, andsampling piping, i.e. piping used to connect instruments to other piping equipment, to connectpneumatically or hydraulically operated control apparatus, or to collect samples of fluids.

This Clause (3.25.3) does not apply to a permanently closed piping system (e.g. a fluid-filledtemperature-responsive device) or to instruments, control, or signal transmission devices, orto sampling apparatus to which the piping is attached.

The materials of construction for valves, fittings, or pipes shall be suitable for the particularconditions of service.

3.25.3.2 Take-off connectionsTake-off connections and attaching bosses, fittings oradaptors shall be of material able to withstand the maximum design pressure and temperatureof the piping or equipment to which they are attached, and shall be of sufficient strength towithstand expansion and cyclic service loads and stresses of installation and maintenance.

An isolating valve shall be installed in each take-off line as near as is practicable to the pointof take-off.

3.25.3.3 Blowdown valve A blowdown valve shall be installed at or near the instrument,where necessary for the safe operation of the piping, instrument, and other equipment. Ablowdown valve shall be of the gradually opening type. Blowdown shall provide for safedisposal of the fluid.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 108

3.25.3.4 Piping Instrument, control and sampling piping shall comply with the following:

(a) The arrangement of piping and supports shall ensure safety under operating stresses,and protection of the piping against detrimental sagging, external mechanical injury,abuse and damage due to unusual service conditions other than those related topressure, temperature and service vibration.

(b) Brass, copper, or aluminium pipe shall not be used where metal temperaturesexceed 200°C, or in a location where there is a fire hazard. Buried brass pipe shall bedezincification-resistant.

(c) Piping subject to clogging from solids or deposits shall be provided with suitableconnections for cleaning.

(d) Piping to contain fluids that are normally static shall be protected from freezing by heattracing or other heating where necessary.

(e) Piping in which liquids accumulate and then stagnate shall be provided with drains ortraps.

(f) Where internal corrosion may occur, suitable precautions shall be taken, e.g. increasingthe wall thickness.

3.25.3.5 Joints A joint shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature, and may includefittings that are flared, flareless or of the compression type or equivalent. The fittings mayalso be of the brazed, screwed, or socket-welded type. Where a screwed-end valve is usedwith flareless or compression-type fittings, adaptors shall be used.

A slip-type expansion joint shall not be used; expansion shall be accommodated by providingflexibility within the piping system.

3.25.4 Pressure relief valve discharge piping

3.25.4.1 General Safety valve discharge piping shall comply with Clause 3.9.8 and be asstraight and as short as possible, and drained to prevent the accumulation of fluid. Anyexpansion chamber shall be anchored and allowance made for the difference between hot andcold positions of the safety valve outlet branch. In the hot position, the expansion chambershall be concentric with the safety valve outlet branch. A slip-type expansion joint shall,where used, be restrained against upward thrust.

The diameter of discharge piping incorporating an expansion chamber or slip-joint shall besuch that the operating pressure acting on the discharge side of the expansion chamber orslip-joint will not cause steam to blow back into the immediate vicinity of the fittings. (SeeClause 3.9.8 for design conditions).

3.25.4.2 Flexible bellows See Clause 3.18.

3.25.4.3 Reaction loads Reaction loads on the piping from operation of safety valves shallbe provided for.

NOTE: ANSI/ASME B31.1 gives guidance on reaction loads.

3.25.4.4 Discharge Discharge from the safety valve shall be safely disposed of.Non-flammable, non-toxic fluids may be discharged direct to atmosphere, where permittedby environmental regulations, but the discharge shall not impinge on piping or equipment andshall be directed away from areas used by personnel.

3.26 NOT ALLOCATED

COPYRIGHT

109 AS 4041—1998

3.27 FLEXIBILITY, STRESS ANALYSIS AND SUPPORT DESIGN

3.27.1 General All pipe systems shall be designed and installed in such away that—

(a) they can absorb displacements of the piping caused by thermal expansion;

(b) they can absorb displacements of supporting structures and plant caused by thermalexpansion, wind loading and similar effects;

(c) they can absorb forces on piping cause by the wind loading, dead weight and seismiceffects (see also Clause 3.5(e));

(d) excessive movement does not cause leakage of joints;

(e) specified categories of stress limitation are satisfied; and

(f) the forces and moments applied to the plant do not exceed the maximum allowablevalues specified by the designer.

These conditions are satisfied by—

(i) providing piping flexibility to ensure that the stress caused by thermal expansion only(stress range) does not exceed permissible values;

(ii) providing a supporting system to carry the dead weight of the piping and permit it toexpand between cold and hot conditions without the stress due to pressure and deadweight (sustained stress) exceeding permissible values; and

(iii) restraining the piping (if necessary) with sway braces and snubbers to ensure thatstresses due to wind and seismic effects (occasional loads) do not exceed permissiblevalues (see also Clause 3.5(e)).

The piping flexibility method set out in this Clause may be used with branch designs basedon Clause 3.19 or Appendix L. If flexibility analysis to Appendix R is chosen, then branchdesign must satisfy Appendix L.

3.27.2 Flexibility

3.27.2.1 General The preferred method of absorbing displacements is by designing apiping layout which has inherent flexibility to deflect in bending and torsion.

An alternative method, which may provide more economical plant layouts makes use ofexpansion fittings. (See Clause 3.18).

3.27.2.2 Need for flexibility analysis A formal flexibility analysis (to satisfy stress rangerequirements) is generally not required in piping which—

(a) is a duplicate of piping with a satisfactory service record;

(b) can readily be validated by comparison with previously analysed piping; or

(c) is of uniform size, fixed at not more than two points, has no intermediate restraints, andis non-critical piping within the limitations of the Equation 3.27.2.2.

. . . 3.27.2.2

where

D = outside diameter of pipe in millimetres

L = developed length of the pipe route, in metres

U = the length of the straight line joining the anchor points, in metres

y = resultant thermal expansion and terminal point movement to be absorbedby the piping system, in millimetres

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 110

NOTES:

1 This equation is empirical, and cannot be relied on to give consistently conservativeresults. It is not applicable to piping used under severe cyclic conditions (e.g. wherenumber of significant stress cycles exceeds 7 000). It is used with caution whereL/U > 2.5, where stress intensification factors exceed 5, or where displacements which arenot in the direction of the line joining the anchor points are a significant part of the totaldisplacement.

2 There is no assurance that terminal reactions will be acceptably low if Equation 3.27.2.2is satisfied.

3 The equation assumes that a pipe is free to expand without constraints due to weight anda supporting system. A flexibility analysis may be required to provide data (movementsand loads) for the design of a support system which satisfies sustained weight stressrequirements.

4 This equation does not apply if flexible joints or expansion fittings are used in the system.

3.27.2.3 Self and cold spring When of sufficient magnitude, stresses caused by thermalexpansion, relax in the hot condition as a result of yielding or creep and reappear as stressesof the opposite sign in the cold condition. This is known as self-springing.

The amount of self-springing which takes place can be reduced by the application of coldspring during the erection of the piping. This is discussed in Appendix Q.

Where cold spring is applied, see Clause 3.27.6 for end reactions.

3.27.2.4 Balanced design All commonly used methods of piping flexibility analysisassume elastic behaviour of the entire piping system. This assumption is sufficiently accuratewhere plastic straining occurs at many points over relatively wide regions, but fails to reflectthe actual strain distribution in unbalanced systems where only a small portion of a systemundergoes plastic strain, or where, in piping operating in the creep range, the straindistributions are uneven. In these cases, the weaker or higher stressed portions will besubjected to strain concentrations due to elastic follow-up of the stiffer or lower stressedportions.

Unbalance can be produced—

(a) by the use of pipes with significantly different stiffness in series; or

(b) in a system of uniform pipe size, by the use of a line configuration for which theneutral axis or thrust line is situated close to the major portion of the line, with onlya very small offset portion of the line absorbing most of the expansion.

Conditions of this type should be avoided, particularly where materials of relatively lowductility are used; if unavoidable, the effects may be mitigated by the judicious applicationof cold spring and limit travel stops.

3.27.3 Stress analysis The flexibility of a piping system can be influenced significantlyby the geometry of fittings (e.g. bends, reducers) which change cross-sectional shape underthe action of bending moments and thus provide greater flexibility than the same length ofstraight pipe. This action also increases the stress levels in the fittings. In a flexibilityanalysis, these phenomena are covered by the use ‘flexibility’ and ‘stress intensification’factors.

Methods of flexibility analysis progress in complexity and accuracy through the following:

(a) Simple ‘structural’ methods which ignore the effects of pipe fittings.

(b) More comprehensive methods which use similarity methods to evaluate terminalreactions and stress levels from flexibility charts.

COPYRIGHT

111 AS 4041—1998

(c) Rigorous methods based upon strain energy theory and the use of both flexibility andstress intensification factors to give an accurate assessment of stresses in a pipingsystem.

Computer programs using algorithms based upon Item (c) are available for the analysis ofmulti-anchor systems and the evaluation of specified stress limitations in accordance with themethods of ANSI/ASME B31.3 and BS 806 which are covered by this Standard.

It is the designer’s responsibility to ensure that the method of analysis used for specificpiping system ensures that all categories of stress limitations are satisfied.

A piping system is analysed between points of constraint which control thermal expansionin a predictable manner. In general these include one or more anchor points (stops movementand rotation of pipe ends, e.g. pumps, vessels and heat exchangers) plus partial restraints(stops less than six degrees of freedom of a pipe).

The system between points of constraint shall be treated as a whole and the effects of anymovement at anchor points and of any partial restraints shall be included.

Computer programs which carry out flexibility analysis to ANSI/ASME B31.3, includingflexibility and stress intensification factors but with design strengths as per Clause 3.11 alsosatisfy this Standard.

3.27.4 Data for stress analysis The following data are given for stress analysis:

(a) Material properties The more commonly used mechanical properties of materialsfor—

(i) values of thermal expansion—refer Appendix E ;

(ii) values of Young modulus—refer Appendix F; and

(iii) Poisson ratio—the value may be taken as 0.3 for all metals at all temperaturesalthough a more accurate value may be used.

(b) Dimensions Nominal dimensions of piping and fittings shall be used.

(c) Wind loading Piping exposed to the wind shall be designed to carry wind loadscalculated in accordance with AS 1170.2 using permissible stress methods and staticanalysis rules. To determine the drag factor, piping may be regarded as ‘a smoothcylindrical shape’.

(d) Seismic loading Earthquake loads on piping shall be calculated according toAS 1170.4 using permissible stress loadings (these are ultimate limit state loads dividedby 1.4). Unless otherwise agreed, piping shall be regarded as mechanical componentsand treated as follows:

(i) Class 1 and 2A piping shall be categorized with ‘Boilers, furnaces incinerators,water heaters, and other equipment using combustible energy sources or high-temperature energy sources, chimneys, flues, smokestacks, vents and pressurevessels’, i.e. with theCc2 factor equal to 2 for all piping DN32 and greater. Theexemptions listed in Clause 5.3.2 of AS 1170.4—1993 are not applicable

(ii) Class 2P and Class 3 piping shall be categorized as ‘ducts and pipingdistribution systems’, i.e. with theCc2 factor equal to 1.

3.27.5 Stress limitations

3.27.5.1 General The methods of evaluation of specified categories of stress in thisSection are based upon the methods of ANSI/ASME B31.3. They do not give any credit forcold spring.

Alternative methods based upon the methods of BS 806 are given in Appendix R and thesemake concessions on allowable hot stress for cold spring.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 112

3.27.5.2 Displacement stress rangeThe displacement stress range, being the stress causedby the thermal expansion of the piping plus terminal movement shall satisfyEquation 3.27.5.2.

fe < fa M . . . 3.27.5.2

where

fe is the displacement stress range, in megapascals

fa is defined in 3.11.7

3.27.5.3 Sustained longitudinal stress

The sustained longitudinal stress (defined in Clause 3.11.5) shall satisfy Equation 3.27.5.3

. . . 3.27.5.3

where

Do = nominal outside diameter of the pipe, in millimetres

fL = the sustained longitudinal stress, in megapascals

P = internal pressure, in megapascals

tn = the nominal thickness of the pipe, in millimetres

f = the design strength of the material at the temperature under consideration (seeAppendix D), in megapascals

fs = the longitudinal stress cause by dead weight and other sustained loads, inmegapascals

M = piping class design factor (see Table 3.12.3)

3.27.5.4 Stress due to sustained occasional loadsThe sustained occasional stress shallsatisfy Equation 3.27.5.4

. . . 3.27.5.4

where

P, Do, tn, fs and f are defined in Clause 3.27.5.3

fo is the longitudinal flexural stress caused by occasional loads such as safety valvethrust, wind and earthquake loads. Wind and earthquake loads need not be consideredconcurrently, in megapascals.

Refer to Clause 3.11.6 for recommended limitations at flanged joints.

3.27.5.5 Flexibility and stress intensification factorsThe factors known to apply tocomponents other than straight pipe shall be included in the analysis. The flexibility factors(k) and stress intensification factors (i) shown in Table 3.27.5 and Figure 3.27.5(A) Charts Aand B may be used in the absence of more reliable data. The values of the latter factor fortees are based on tests on equal outlet intersections and may be used for unequal outletintersections until more appropriate ones are developed, but it is recommended that momentsat these intersections be minimized.

3.27.5.6 Calculation of flexural stressesThe magnitude of the flexural stressesfe, fs and fo

shall be calculated from Equation 3.27.5.6(1).

. . . 3.27.5.6(1)

COPYRIGHT

113 AS 4041—1998

wherefx = the stress being evaluated (fe, fs or fo as the case may be), in megapascalsfb = the resultant bending stress, in megapascalsft = torsional stress, in megapascals

=

Mt = torsional moment, in newton metresZ = section modulus of pipe, in millimetres cubed.

For the calculation of—fs fb and ft are evaluated using moments derived from the load cases which are the

result of sustained load only using values of Young modulus for the operatingtemperature.

fo fb and ft are evaluated using moments derived from the load cases which are theresult of occasional loads only using values of Young modulus for the operatingtemperature.

fe fb and ft are evaluated using moments derived from the load cases involvingthermal expansion and displacement only, and values of Young modulus for theas-installed temperature and coefficient of expansion, which is the algebraicdifference between the coefficients derived from Appendix E for the designmaximum and minimum temperatures.

The resultant bending stress (fb) for elbows and mitre bends shall be calculated fromEquation 3.27.5.6(2) with the moments as shown in Figure 3.27.5(B).

. . . 3.27.5.6(2)

wherefb = resultant bending stress, in megapascalsi i = in-plane stress intensification factorMi = in-plane bending moment, in newton metresio = out-of-plane intensification factorMo = out-of-plane bending moment, in newton metresZ = section modulus of pipe, in millimetres cubed.

The resultant bending stress (fb) for branch connections shall be calculated usingEquations 3.27.5.6(2) and 3.27.5.6(3) with moments as shown in Figure 3.27.5(C).For header (legs 1 and 2) Equation 3.27.5.6(2) applies.For branch (leg 3):

. . . 3.27.5.6(3)fb = 1Zc

[( i iMi)2 + (ioMo)

2]1/2 × 103

whereZe = effective section modulus of branch, in millimetres cubed

= π(r2)2ts

r2 = mean branch cross sectional radius, in millimetrests = effective branch wall thickness (lesser oftnh and tnb), in millimetrestnh = thickness of pipe matching run of tee or header exclusive of reinforcing

elements, in millimetrestnb = thickness of pipe matching branch, in millimetresfb, i i, Mi, io, Mo have the meanings in Equation 3.27.5.6(2).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 114

TABLE 3.27.5FLEXIBILITY FACTOR AND CHARACTERISTIC, AND STRESS

INTENSIFICATION FACTORS FOR FITTINGS AND JOINTS

Description Flexibilityfactor (k)

Stress intensification factor Flexibilitycharacteristic

(h)Sketch

i i* io†

Welding elbow or pipebend (Notes 1, 2, 3, 6, 7)re ≥ 114 Rb, r ≥ 1.5 tn

Closely spaced mitrebend (Notes 1, 2, 3)s < r (1 + tanθ)

Widely spaced mitrebend (Notes 1, 2, 4)s ≥ r (1 + tanθ)

Welding tee to ANSIB16.9 (Notes 1, 2) 1

0.75i o + 0.25

Reinforced fabricated teewith pad or saddle(Notes 1, 2, 5)

1

Unreinforced fabricatedtee (Notes 1, 2) 1

0.9

h

Extruded welding tee(Notes 1, 2)re ≥ 0.25rb

tr < 1.5 tn

1

Welded-in contour insert(Notes 1, 2)rc > 0.25 rb

tr > 1.5 tn

1

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

115 AS 4041—1998

Description Flexibilityfactor (k)

Stress intensification factor Flexibilitycharacteristic

(h)Sketch

i i* io†

Branch welded-on fitting(integrally reinforced)(Notes 1, 2)

1

Butt-welded joint,reducer, or welding neckflange

1 1.0 1.0 — —

Double-welded slip-onflange

1 1.2 1.2 — —

Fillet-weld joint (single-welded), or single-welded slip-on flange

1 1.3 1.3 — —

Lapped flange (withANSI/ASME B16.9 lap-joint stub)

1 1.6 1.6 — —

Threaded-pipe joint, orthreaded flange

1 2.3 2.3 — —

* In-plane, see Figure 3.27.5(B) and (C).

† Out-of-plane, see Figure 3.27.5(B) and (C).

NOTES TO TABLE 3.27.5:

1 For fittings and mitre bends, the flexibility factors (k) and stress-intensification factors (i) in the table apply to bending inany plane and shall be not less than unity. Factors for torsion shall be unity. Both factors apply over the effective arc length(shown by heavy centre lines in the sketches) for curved and mitre elbows, and to the intersection point for tees.

2 The values ofk and i can be read directly from Figure 3.27.5(A) (Chart B) by entering the flexibility characteristichcalculated from the equations given in this Table,

where

R = bend radius of welding elbow or pipe bend, in millimetres

r = mean radius of matching pipe bend, in millimetres

rb = mean radius of branch, in millimetres

re = radius of external contour of tee, in millimetres

s = mitre spacing at centre-line, in millimetres

tn = nominal wall thickness, in millimetres.

NOTE: Where the nominal wall thickness of a fabricated tee is greater than that of the adjoining pipes, this thicknessis to be maintained on each side of the branch, for a length not less than the pipe diameter.

tp = pad or saddle thickness, in millimetres

tr = thickness of crotch of a tee, in millimetres

θ = one-half angle between adjacent mitre axes, in degrees.

3 Where flanges are attached to one or both ends, the values ofh and i in the table are to be corrected by the factorC givenbelow, which can be read directly from Figure 3.27.5(A) (Chart B), for the calculatedh:

One end flangedC = h1/6 ≥ 1

Both ends flangedC = h1/3 ≥ 1

4 Also includes single mitre joint.

5 Whentp ≥ 1.5th, useh = 4tn/r.

6 Cast butt-welding elbows may have considerably heavier walls than those of the pipe with which they are used. Large errorsmay be introduced unless the effect of these greater thicknesses is considered.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 116

7 In large diameter, thin-wall elbows and bends, pressure can significantly affect the magnitude of the flexibility and stressintensification factors. The values obtained from the table for the pressure effect, are to be corrected as follows —

(a) flexibility factor (k) to be divided by a number equal to 1 + [6(p/Ea)(r/tn)7/3(R/r)1/3]

(b) stress intensification factor (i) to be divided by a number equal to 1 + [3.25(p/Ea)(r/tn)5/2(R/r)2/3]

where

Ea = modulus of elasticity, in megapascals

p = pressure, in megapascals.

3.27.6 Reactions

3.27.6.1 General Reaction forces and moments to be used in the evaluation of the effectsof piping displacements on connected plant and in the design of restraints shall be obtainedby modifying the reaction range (R), taken from the stress range computation, to makeallowance for cold spring.

3.27.6.2 Maximum reactions for a simple systemThe reactions for a simple system maybe derived as follows:

(a) For a two anchor system without intermediate restraintsThe maximum instantaneousvalues of reaction forces and moments may be estimated from Equations 3.27.6(1)and 3.27.6(2).

(b) For the design operating conditions

. . . 3.27.6(1)

where

Rm = estimated instantaneous maximum reaction force or moment at designoperating temperature, in newton metres

R = the range of reaction forces and moments used to determine the stressrange in Equation 3.27.5.6(1), in newton metres

C = cold spring factor varying between zero for no cold spring and 1.0 for100% cold spring. (The 2/3 factor is based upon experience which showthat specified cold spring cannot be assured even with elaborateprecaution.)

Em = Young modulus at design operating temperature, in megapascals

Ea = Young modulus at installation temperature, in megapascals

(c) For the as-installed condition

Ra = CR or C1.R whichever is greater . . . 3.27.6(2)

where

Ra = estimated instantaneous reaction forces and moments at the installationtemperature, in newton metres

= estimated self spring or relaxation factor

= 0 whenC1 is negative

COPYRIGHT

117 AS 4041—1998

where

f = design strength at maximum metal temperature during the cycle, inmegapascals

fe = computed displacement stress range Equation 3.27.5.6(1), in megapascals

3.27.6.3 Maximum reaction for complex systemsFor multi-anchor systems withintermediate restraints, Equations 3.27.6(1) and 3.27.6(2) do not apply. Each case shall bestudied to estimate location, nature and extent of local overstrain, and its effect upon stressdistribution and reactions.

3.27.6.4 Reaction limits The calculated reactions shall not exceed the limits which theconnected equipment can safely sustain. Special consideration should be given to rotatingmachinery.

3.27.6.5 Calculation of pipe movementsCalculations of displacements and rotations atspecific locations may be required for the following purposes:

(a) To check clearances from adjacent plant.

(b) To design piping supports.

(c) For the analysis of branch lines which are being designed separately.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 118

FIGURE 3.27.5(A) FLEXIBILITY AND STRESS-INTENSIFICATION FACTORS

COPYRIGHT

119 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE 3.27.5(B) MOMENTS IN BENDS—NOTATION AND SIGN CONVENTION

FIGURE 3.27.5(C) MOMENTS IN BENDS AND BRANCHES—NOTATION AND SIGN CONVENTION

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 120

3.28 PIPE SUPPORTS

3.28.1 General

3.28.1.1 Design criteria This Clause (3.28) is intended to apply to support components andstructure up to the support attachment to the main structure. The pipe support system shallbe designed to support the dead weight of the piping and to permit the support points tomove through cold to hot deflections given by the stress range analysis.

In addition the pipe work shall be supported to ensure the following:

(a) Pipe sag and creep are within acceptable limits.

(b) Stresses in the elements of the supporting system do not exceed the values permittedby this Standard.

(c) Suitable control of vibration and oscillation of the piping resulting from fluid flow andmachine-induced forces.

(d) Prevention of unintentional disengagement of piping from the supports.

This Clause 3.28 deals with the design of pipe supports up to and including its attachmentto the main structure.

3.28.1.2 Design loads Pipe supports shall be designed to withstand the most adversecombination of the following loads:

(a) Piping expansion and contraction.

(b) Reaction of piping that discharges to atmosphere.

(c) Snow and ice.

(d) Mass of equipment installed to counteract or control expansion, contraction, andassociated reactions.

(e) Mass of insulation.

(f) Mass of the operating, cleaning or test fluid, whichever is heaviest, except that wherethe pipe is to be held up with additional supports during testing, the mass of the testfluid is disregarded.

(g) Mass of the pipes and associated fittings.

(h) Wind or earthquake, whichever is greater.

Where imposed vibration or shock is expected during operation, suitable anchors, dampers,or restraints shall be provided to remove or reduce any adverse effects.

The calculation of loads for variable and constant supports shall be in accordance withClause 3.27.

The design of anchors and guides shall take into account additional forces to overcomefriction in other supports.

Anchors for bellows or slip-type expansion joints shall be designed to withstand the vectorsum of the following forces at maximum pressure and temperature:

(i) The force to compress or extend the joint by the calculated expansion movementspecified by the manufacturer.

(ii) The force due to the fluid pressure under normal operating conditions, being theproduct of effective thrust area and design pressure.

(iii) The force to overcome static friction between the pipe and supports during expansionor contraction of the piping.

COPYRIGHT

121 AS 4041—1998

3.28.1.3 Analysis The design of pipe supports shall be based on a suitable analysis of allload-bearing elements of the support, using the design loads specified in Clause 3.28.1.2 anddesign strengths in Clause 3.28.1.4. Where appropriate, simplified calculations combined withengineering judgement may be used. Where a full analysis is necessary and flexibility isanalysed, the stresses, moments and reactions so determined shall be used in the design.

3.28.1.4 Design strength Design strength for elements of pipe supports shall comply withAS 3990 or Appendices D, G or I of this Standard, as appropriate.

For the purpose of elevated temperature design of structural components made fromAS/NZS 3678-250 plate and AS/NZS 3679-300 sections associated with piping attachmentsand supports, the following elevated temperature yield strengths may be used—

Temperature, °C 20 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 425

ReT, MPa Thickness≤50 mm 250 225 212 200 190 175 162 140 135

Thickness>50 mm 230 210 195 185 175 160 152 140 135

Weld joint factors (e) shall not apply to the design strength of elements of the pipe supports.

Support components to BS 3974 when used within their load capacity at design temperatureare deemed to meet this Standard.

3.28.1.5 Materials Materials for elements of pipe supports shall comply with thefollowing:

(a) Cast iron may be used for rollers, roller bases, anchor bases, and other elements subjectto compressive stresses.

NOTE: Cast iron is not recommended for elements subject to impact loads resulting frompulsation or vibration.

(b) Contact surfaces between the support and the pipe shall be such as to prevent corrosionor other deleterious effects.

(c) Ductile, nodular, or malleable iron may be used for pipe clamps, beam clamps, hangerflanges, clips, brackets and swivel rings, or in place of cast iron.

(d) Materials and lubricants used for sliding supports shall be suitable for the temperatureat the point of contact.

(e) Permanent supports shall be of materials suitable for the service conditions and, wherein contact with the piping, the materials shall not be have a deleterious effect on thepiping.

(f) Steel cold formed to an inside radius less than 1.5 times the steel thickness shall benormalized or annealed.

(g) Steel shall have a specified minimum elongation of not less than 10 percent.

(h) Steel of unknown specification may be used only where its design strength in tensiondoes not exceed 40 MPa for temperatures≤350°C. For design strengths in shear andbearing, see Clauses 3.11.3 and 3.11.4.

(i) Where the pipe metal operating temperature is less than 40°C, wood or other materialhaving a low thermal conductivity may be used for elements which are in compression.

(j) Supports in a corrosive environment shall be of suitable corrosion resistant material,and have adequate corrosion protection or an adequate corrosion allowance.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 122

3.28.1.6 Threaded elementsThe thread on a threaded element shall comply with AS 1721fine thread with thread tolerance not inferior to Class 6H 8g, or shall be an agreed thread.

The thread in a turnbuckle and adjusting nuts shall be fully engaged. A threaded adjustmentshall have a locking device.

The safe load for a threaded element shall be based on the root area of the thread.

3.28.1.7 Springs Helical springs in variable and constant-effort type supports shouldcomply with BS 1726.1. Springs of special form, such as leaf, disc, volute, involute, andtorsion, shall be designed, manufactured and installed so that no permanent deformationoccurs.

If a spring is to be subjected to high temperatures, the spring constants shall be suitable atthose temperatures.

3.28.2 Pipe support spacing Support spacing shall take into account the following:

(a) Bending stresses from uniform and concentrated loads between supports.

(b) Sag, which shall be kept within limits necessary to maintain any necessary drainage ifrequired.

It is recommended that the spacing of pipe supports does not exceed that shown inTable 3.28.2 for steel pipe.

The recommended spacing for water service for copper, copper alloy, UPVC, polyethylene,cross-linked polyethylene and polybutylene pipes is given in AS 3500.1.

TABLE 3.28.2

RECOMMENDED SPACING OF SUPPORTS FOR STEEL PIPE

Nominal size, Recommended spacing, m(see Notes)

DN Water service Steam, gas, or air service

202532

2.02.42.7

3.03.33.7

405065

3.03.43.7

4.04.55.0

80100150

3.94.35.2

5.15.26.5

200250300

6.07.08.0

7.59.0

10.0

350400450

8.48.89.0

10.611.212.0

500600

10.012.0

13.015.0

NOTES:

1 Experience has shown these spacings to be satisfactory.

2 This Table shows recommended maximum spacing between pipe supports for horizontal straight runs of pipeat maximum operating temperature of 400°C.

3 These spacings do not prevail over calculated spacings and do not apply where there are concentrated loadsbetween supports, such as flanges and valves.

4 These spacings are based on a fixed-beam support with a bending stress not exceeding 16 MPa and insulatedpipe with the appropriate contents, and the pitch of the line being such that sag of 2.5 mm between supportsis incorporated in the design.

COPYRIGHT

123 AS 4041—1998

3.28.3 Fixtures

3.28.3.1 Anchors and guides Where necessary, anchors and guides shall be provided tocontrol movement or to direct expansion to parts of the piping designed to absorb thatmovement or expansion.

Anchors and guides (including pivots) shall be designed to secure the desired points of pipingin relatively fixed positions, and to prevent slipping and twisting of the pipe. The piping shallbe free to expand and contract as required from the anchored or guided point and shall bestructurally suitable to withstand the thrusts, moments, and other imposed loads.

A rolling or sliding support shall allow free movement of the piping, or the piping shall bedesigned to include the imposed load and frictional resistance. The support shall provide forthe expected movement of the supported piping.

3.28.3.2 Non-inextensible supports other than anchors and guides

Hangers include pipe and beam clamps, clips, brackets, rods, straps, chains, and other similardevices. They shall be proportioned for all required loads.

Sliding supports (or shoes) and brackets shall be designed to resist the forces due to frictionin addition to the loads imposed by bearing. The dimensions of the support shall provide forthe expected movement of the supported piping.

3.28.3.3 Variable spring supports A spring support shall provide support to the total load,being the load from weight balance calculations plus the weight of all hanger parts that willbe supported by the spring at the point of attachment to the pipe, e.g. clamps and rods.

A spring support shall have means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, andmeans to prevent overstressing of any spring or unintentional disengagement of the load fromspring failure or other causes.

A hanger with a spring should have means to show the amount of compression of the springwith respect to the approximate hot and cold positions of the piping system, except where thespring is used to cushion shock or where the operating temperature of the piping does notexceed 120°C.

A support should have a maximum variation of support effort of 25% for the total travel fromthermal effects.

The resistance by supports to the movement of the pipe shall be taken into account in theloadings used for flexibility analysis.

3.28.3.4 Constant effort supportsConstant effort support hangers with a substantiallyuniform supporting force over the range of travel shall be considered for high-temperatureand critical-service piping. Support load variation shall not be more than ±5% unlessotherwise agreed.

3.28.3.5 Counterweight supportsA counterweight-type support shall have a travel-limitingstop, and the counterweight shall be positively secured. The cable, hanger, rocker arm, orother devices used to attach the counterweight to the piping shall comply withClause 3.28.3.2.

3.28.3.6 Hydraulic supports A support with a hydraulic cylinder shall have a safety deviceand a stop to support the load in the event of hydraulic failure.

3.28.3.7 Special fixtures Special devices to locate piping in the positions assumed for thepurposes of flexibility analysis and to provide for changed operating conditions shall complywith this Standard. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that malfunction of these devices willnot give unacceptable forces or movements in the piping system.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 124

3.28.3.8 Sway braces and vibrational dampenersSway braces and vibration dampenersshould be used, where necessary, to limit vibration.

3.28.4 Support attachments

3.28.4.1 General An attachment to support the piping shall comply with Clause 3.23.

3.28.4.2 Non-integral attachmentsA clamp supporting a vertical run of piping should bedesigned to support the total load on each half of the clamp, to provide for shifting of theload. Where slipping may occur, clamps should be located below a fitting, or on lugs weldedto the pipe or a flange.

NOTE: Non-integral attachments include clamps, slings, cradles, saddles, straps and clevises.

3.28.4.3 Integral attachments Integral attachments shall be used in combination withrestraints or braces where multi-axial restraint in a single member is required.

NOTE: Integral attachments include ears, shoes, lugs, cylindrical attachment rings, and skirts thatare fabricated so that the attachment is an integral part of the component.

Integral items that are part of an assembly for supporting or guiding pipe may be weldeddirectly to the pipe provided that the materials are compatible for welding and the design issuitable for the temperature and load. Hanger lugs for attachment to piping forhigh-temperature service shall provide for differential expansion between the pipe and theattached lug.

Shear stresses in attachment welds shall not exceed 60 percent of the design strength givenin Appendix D. The lower design strength value shall apply where the attachment and pipevalues differ.

3.28.5 Load-supporting structure Supporting structures shall comply with AS 3990,AS/NZS 1664 or other agreed Standards. Welded connections for structural steel attachmentsshall be designed in accordance with AS/NZS 1554.1, or other agreed Standards.

3.29 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED A designer of piping shall ensure, when thedesign of the piping is made available to the manufacturer, that the manufacturer of the pipeis provided with information to enable the piping to be manufactured in accordance with thedesign specifications and, if applicable, with information relating to—

(a) the purpose for which the piping is designed;

(b) the hazards and any risk, identified and assessed in accordance with this Standard,associated with the use of the piping;

(c) testing or inspections to be carried out on the piping;

(d) installation, commissioning, de-commissioning, use, transport, storage and, if the plantis capable of being dismantled, dismantling of the piping;

(e) systems of work and competency of operators necessary for the safe use of piping; and

(f) emergency procedures (if any) required if there is a malfunction of the piping.

3.30 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER The owner is responsiblefor compliance with this Standard and the design, and for the establishment of therequirements for design, manufacture, examination, inspection, testing operation andmaintenance which will govern the entire fluid handling or process system of which pipingis part. Where the owner does not supply sufficient information, the designer may issue anddocument the parameters for the design.

COPYRIGHT

125 AS 4041—1998

S E C T I O N 4 F A B R I C A T I O N A N DI N S T A L L A T I O N

4.1 SCOPE This Section specifies requirements for piping fabricated on or off-site, andfor installation.

4.2 FABRICATION Piping shall be fabricated to the requirements of AS 4458.

4.3 INSTALLATION

4.3.1 General Assembly of piping components shall be carried out either on-site oroff-site so that ultimately the installed piping complies with this Standard. The installationof the piping shall comply with this Clause (4.3). Additionally piping associated with boilersand pressure vessels shall comply with AS 3892.

4.3.2 Protection Piping and components shall be protected against damage or corrosionbefore and during installation. Any protective coating should be inspected at intervals of notgreater than three months, and shall be renewed and replaced when necessary.

4.3.3 Cleaning Internal cleaning of piping should be carried out where necessary, andwhen the piping is commissioned the internal surface shall be free of detrimental materials.

4.3.4 Deflection Piping shall be installed with drainage slopes as specified in the designin the direction of flow of the condensate, to prevent condensate collecting in pockets. Wherethe slope does not prevent the accumulation of fluids and this accumulation could bedetrimental to the operation, a drain shall be fitted. Piping shall be supported as specified inthe design and, where practicable, the span lengths shall ensure that the pipe will not sagbelow the elevation of the support at the lower end of the span.

4.3.5 Cold-spring Piping to be cold-pulled should hang freely when the gap is measured,i.e. there should be no out-of-balance spring effort or any intermediate restraints other thanthose necessary to counteract any horizontal components of out-of-vertical supports. Thiscondition shall also apply when alignment marks and end checks are made. Pipes shall notbe heated when the gap is being closed. The joint made last should be in a location wheremoments are small.

Alignment shall be strictly maintained after the pipes have been pulled together.

Where the effects of thermal expansion in service are to be counteracted by cold-pull duringthe erection of the pipe assembly, the cold-pull shall be maintained during all stages of thewelding operation including any postweld heat treatment.

Before applying cold-pull to a joint, all other joints in the pipe assembly shall have beenwelded, subjected to any postweld treatment, and inspected.

4.3.6 Protection of support threads Exposed threads of supports should be greased orpainted immediately after installation except where corrosion-resistant materials are used.Pipe surfaces at supports should be protected as specified in the engineering design.

4.3.7 Support units Supports with variable springs, constant effort units, counterweightunits or hydraulic units designed to carry the weight of the pipe should be installed ‘gagged’to prevent movement downwards and ensure the pipe stays erected at its correct referencelevel.

Support units gags should not be removed until all in line equipment and insulation andcladding is installed. See Section 9 for commissioning requirements.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 126

4.4 THERMAL INSULATION Where piping is thermally insulated, the materials usedshall not cause corrosion of the pipe, not char or burn at the maximum temperature at whichthe material may be normally operated. Asbestos shall not be used.

Where required, insulation of piping including supports shall be of the agreed fireperformance.

Where flanged or threaded joints are lagged, provision shall be made for the detection ofleaks, and inspection and repair of these joints.

Guidance on thermal insulation is given in BS 5970.

Guidance on the installation of thermally insulated underground piping is given in BS 7572.

4.5 IDENTIFICATION Contents of piping should be suitably identified, e.g. inaccordance with AS 1345 or other agreed means.

COPYRIGHT

127 AS 4041—1998

S E C T I O N 5 W E L D I N G A N D A L L I E DJ O I N I N G P R O C E S S E S

This Section specifies requirements for the joining of pipes and components, including suchfittings as welding neck flanges, welding elbows and forged tees, by welding and brazing,and associated processes. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with AS 4458 formanufacture and AS/NZS 3992 for welding and brazing qualification.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 128

S E C T I O N 6 E X A M I N A T I O N A N D T E S T I N G

6.1 SCOPE This Section specifies the requirements for the examination and testing of thefollowing:

(a) Test welds made to qualify a welding procedure or a welder (see Note 3).

(b) Production welds made in a workshop or on-site.

(c) Repaired welds or repairs by welding.

(d) Partly assembled or installed piping and other components.

This Standard does not specify the methods and acceptance criteria applicable to theexamination and testing of pipes, fittings and other components which are manufactured inaccordance with a nominated Standard.

NOTES:

1 Examination and testing is intended to be applied as a function of quality control carried outby or on behalf of the fabricator of the piping, or, by the component manufacturer.

2 The word ‘examiner’ applies to personnel who carry out the examinations and tests requiredfor quality control.

3 Welding in this Section is taken to include brazing.

6.2 RESPONSIBILITY The preparation, examination, and testing of test welds forwelding procedures and qualifying welders, production welds, repaired welds, and repairscarried out by welding are the responsibility of the fabricator, unless otherwise indicated oragreed.

The fabricator is responsible for—

(a) making any choice necessary within a test method and compliance with the engineeringdesign;

(b) labour and equipment for examination or test;

(c) suitable notice to the inspector of when piping is expected to reach the stage at whichinspection is required;

(d) records of examinations and tests, including those delegated to others; and

(e) performing and reporting any supplementary tests required by the owner or engineeringdesign.

6.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES AND WELDERS Examinationand testing for qualification of welding and brazing procedures or of welding and brazingpersonnel shall comply with AS/NZS 3992.

6.4 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION Materials, production welds and brazes,assembly, erection and the completed piping shall be examined in accordance with AS 4037and the engineering design.

Where the design or method of construction is such that a specified method of examinationis not effective, an alternative method and acceptance criteria shall be agreed between theparties concerned.

Examination shall ensure the piping complies with the Standard with respect to materials,components, dimensions, joint preparation, welds, joints, supports, assembly, erection andinstallation.

COPYRIGHT

129 AS 4041—1998

6.5 ALTERNATIVES TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING

6.5.1 Alternative to radiographic or ultrasonic examination Piping for all liquids areexempt from radiographic or ultrasonic examination when each of the following apply:

(a) The material is Type A1, A2, A3, B, C, E, K, M or non-ferrous.

(b) The pipe and fittings have a hoop stress less than half of the design strength.

(c) The piping system has been hydrostatically tested in compliance with Clause 6.7. (Thealternatives to hydrostatic test as given in Clause 6.8 do not apply).

(d) The piping has passed visual examination in accordance with the limit on surfaceimperfections for pressure piping in AS 4037.

(e) The design pressure and temperature is not greater than 2000 kPa and 180°C forTypes 2 or 3 fluids or 400 kPa, and 99°C for Type 1 fluids.

6.5.2 Alternative to spot non-destructive testing by use of destructive testsBend testsand macro examination may be substituted for spot non-destructive examination of welds inpiping of DN 40 and smaller. The number of test pieces shall be at least 10 percent forClasses 2 and 3 of each welder’s production welds.

6.5.3 Alternative to radiographic or ultrasonic examination by use of in-processexamination

6.5.3.1 Purpose In-process examination is intended for use in specific cases to exposeunacceptable imperfections before completion of a welded joint.

6.5.3.2 Application In-process examination is permitted where—

(a) it is not practicable for radiographic or ultrasonic examination specified in thisStandard to be applied; and

(b) the inspector’s agreement is granted on a weld for weld basis.

6.5.3.3 Stage of examination In-process examination of materials and consumables shallbe carried out before welding starts. Examination of a weld shall be continuous during themaking of the weld. The completed weld shall be examined visually on cooling.

6.5.3.4 Method of examination In-process examination shall be visual examination inaccordance with AS 4037 and assessment of the following:

(a) The qualified welding procedure specification applicable to the weld.

(b) Documentation of the welder’s qualification to weld to the qualified welding procedure.

(c) Preparation and cleanliness of the joint.

(d) Fit-up, internal alignment and support before and during welding.

(e) Preheating and interrun temperature control.

(f) Weld position, consumables and all other essential variables specified by the weldingprocedure and the welder’s qualification.

(g) Conditions after cleaning of the external and, where accessible, internal surfaces on theroot run. Where specified in the design, a dye penetrant or magnetic particleexamination shall be made.

(h) Condition of the weld between runs, including freedom from slag.

(i) Appearance of the completed weld.

The weld shall comply with the requirements of this Standard.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 130

6.6 PRESSURE TESTS

6.6.1 General Pressure tests shall be conducted in accordance with AS 4037 and thisStandard.

A pressure test on piping is used to achieve the following:

(a) Detect leakage at components and joints.

(b) Assist in assessing the adequacy of the piping system design, materials and fabrication,e.g. that there is sufficient wall thickness, and material strength.

(c) Partially relieve residual fabrication stresses and sometimes modify shape.

6.6.2 Types of pressure tests Piping shall pass one or more of the following tests asappropriate:

(a) Hydrostatic test (see Clause 6.7).

(b) Pneumatic test (see Clause 6.8.1).

(c) Initial service leak test (see Clause 6.8.2).

(d) Alternative non-destructive examination and leak test (see Clause 6.8.3).

(e) Proof hydrostatic test (see Clause 6.8.4).

Alternatives to a hydrostatic test should be considered where any of the following apply:

(i) The mass of the water would damage the pipe or its supports.

(ii) The test fluid would damage linings or internal insulation.

(iii) Residual moisture would contaminate or cause failure of a process or cause corrosionor other unacceptable hazard.

(iv) Low metal temperature during the test would cause risk of brittle fracture (seeAS/NZS 3788 and AS 4037 for information on MDMT).

(v) New piping isolated from existing systems by a valve, in cases where water from thehydrostatic test, if leaked past the valve, would seriously contaminate the existingsystem.

An alternative to pneumatic testing should be considered when it would introduce anunacceptable hazard from the possible release of stored energy, particularly if low metaltemperature during the test would leak to the risk of brittle fracture.

6.7 HYDROSTATIC TEST

6.7.1 Application A hydrostatic test shall be made on all piping except when other testsare permitted in lieu by AS 4037 or Clause 6.8.

6.7.2 Test pressure Both upper and lower hydrostatic test pressures shall be calculated.The hydrostatic test pressure at any point in the piping system shall comply with thepressures specified in the examples given in Appendix U. Additionally, except for pipe, thetest pressure shall not exceed any maximum pressure specified in the nominated Standard forthe weakest element in the piping system.

The test pressure at any point includes any static hydrostatic head due to the test fluid.

6.7.3 Hold period The test pressure shall be held for the time specified in Table 6.7.3.The pressure in the piping shall then dropped to 85–90% of the test pressure for visualexamination.

COPYRIGHT

131 AS 4041—1998

TABLE 6.7.3

HOLD PERIOD FOR HYDROSTATIC TEST

Nominal size

Minimum hold period, minutes

Test pressure, kPa

≤700 >700

≤DN 300>DN 300

1020

1525

6.8 ALTERNATIVE TO HYDROSTATIC TEST

6.8.1 Pneumatic test As an alternative to hydrostatic testing, and where agreed by theparties concerned, a pneumatic test may be used. The test shall be conducted in accordancewith AS 4037. The test pressure shall be 90 percent of that specified in Clause 6.7.2.

6.8.2 Alterative to hydrostatic test by use of initial service leak test At the owner’soption, piping is exempt from hydrostatic test when each of the following apply:

(a) The piping is made from material groups A1, A2, A3, A4, B, C, E K, M or non-ferrous.

(b) The design temperature is less than 180°C and greater than −30°C.

(c) The design pressure is less than 2 MPa if the hoop stress≤0.5f or 1 MPa if the hoopstress >0.5f.

(d) The fluid is either—

(i) fluid types 3 and 4;

(ii) steam; or

(iii) caustic soda or sodium cyanide solutions as used in the mining industry.

In lieu of a hydrostatic test, each of the following shall be carried out:

(e) 100% visual examination of all welds for form and working omissions (see Table 8.4,AS 4037—1992).

(f) An initial service leak test shall be made during or prior to the initial operation andafter taking all necessary precautions. The leak test shall be made with the service fluidat the operating condition of the piping by examining for leaks at each joint andconnection not previously pressure tested in accordance with this Standard. Where thepressurized fluid is gas or vapour, a preliminary leak test shall be made at one-quarteroperating pressure but not more than 200 kPa. The pressure shall be increasedgradually in steps until the operating pressure is reached, holding at each step longenough to equalize piping strain and check for leaks.

6.8.3 Alternative to hydrostatic test by use or non-destructive examination and leak test

6.8.3.1 General Non-destructive examination may be used in lieu of a hydrostatic test forbutt welds, subassemblies and minor attachments as given in this Clause 6.8.3.

6.8.3.2 Butt welds For Classes 1 and 2 piping, butt welds, including tie-in and cut-in-welds, may be exempted from hydrostatic testing where these welds comply with each of thefollowing:

(a) The pipe is certified by the pipe manufacturer to a listed Standard as leak tight byhydrostatic test or non-destructive examination method.

(b) They are located in straight pipe and are not less than one pipe diameter from anybranch connection or bend. This requirement does not apply to butt weld fittingscovered in Clause 2.2.1(f).

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 132

(c) They comply with the ovality requirements of this Standard.

(d) They are subject to 100% visual examination.

(e) They comply with appropriate non-destructive examination Standards for—

(i) 100% radiographic examination, plus either magnetic particle testing orpenetrant examination; or

(ii) 100% ultrasonic examination, plus either magnetic particle testing or penetrantexamination.

NOTE: When Items (i) and (ii) are not practical, refer to Clause 6.5.3.

(f) Examinations (d) and (e) have been carried out after any postweld heat treatment hasbeen carried out.

(g) They comply with the limits of surface imperfection for piping given in AS 4037.

(h) They pass an initial service leak test (Clause 6.8.2) or the sensitive leak test (AS 4037).For lethal fluids it shall be the sensitive leak test.

For Class 3 piping, butt welds (including tie-in and cut-in welds) are exempt from hydrostatictesting where the welds comply with the initial service leak test.

6.8.3.3 SubassembliesPipes and components which has been previously testedhydrostatically to the required pressure and are assembled by mechanical joints (e.g. boltingand screwing) may be exempted from hydrostatic testing as an assembly provided that thecompleted piping is subjected to—

(a) a sensitive leak test where the contents are fluid Types 1 or 2; or

(b) an initial service leak test for piping other than Item (a).

6.8.3.4 Minor attachments The welding or brazing of minor attachments, such astemperature and pressure tappings and minor structural attachments, are exempt fromhydrostatic provided—

(a) the joint is subject to 100% magnetic particle or penetrant examination to AS 4037; and

(b) failure will not be detrimental to the piping in service.

6.8.4 Proof hydrostatic test Where the strength of components cannot readily becalculated, the design pressure may be determined in accordance with the proof hydrostatictest specified in AS 1210.

6.9 TESTING PRESSURE-LIMITING DEVICES, RELIEF VALVES, PRESSUREREGULATORS, AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT Pressure-limiting devices, relief valves,pressure regulators, and control equipment shall be examined for the following:

(a) Good mechanical condition.

(b) Adequate capacity, effectiveness, and reliability for operation of the intended service.

(c) Proper functioning at the correct pressure and temperature.

(d) Proper installation, and protection from foreign materials or condition that may preventproper operation.

(e) Complies with the relevant product Standard.

6.10 REPORT After Class 1 or 2 piping has been completed and tested, the fabricator ormanufacturer shall add to the manufacturer’s data report that the piping has been tested inaccordance with this Standard.

COPYRIGHT

133 AS 4041—1998

S E C T I O N 7 P R O T E C T I V E S Y S T E M SA N D D E V I C E S

7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 Basic requirement Pressure piping shall be protected as specified in this Standardand as necessary to ensure the piping operates reliably and safely under the expectedconditions of service.

7.1.2 Protective systems Protective systems required in this Section shall be specified inthe engineering design and be acceptable to the owner.

7.1.3 Design and construction Protective systems and devices shall—

(a) be of material, design (including the number, size, type, and location) and constructionto permit the system and devices to perform their required function under the expectedconditions of service; and

(b) comply with AS 1271 or other agreed Standard.

Where any such device or fitting is not supplied by the fabricator, the owner shall beresponsible for ensuring that it is supplied and properly fitted before the piping is placed intoservice.

7.2 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS Suitable control shallbe provided to ensure that the pressure and temperature of piping components are controlledwithin the limits of the engineering design and this Standard (see Clause 3.9.3 for pressurereducing systems).

7.3 PRESSURE RELIEF SYSTEMS

7.3.1 General Where a pressure greater than that specified in the engineering design canoccur such as from a failure of control devices, solar heating or process, suitable pressurerelief systems shall be provided.

Such systems, by appropriate design and devices, shall—

(a) prevent the pressure in the piping exceeding 115 percent of the design pressure forClasses 1 and 2 and 125 percent from the design pressure for Class 3;

(b) ensure that discharges from pressure-relieving devices are in positions that will be safe;and

(c) where piping can be shut off between valves when full of liquid, provide forhydrostatic pressure relief to ensure that the maximum safe working component of theweakest component in the protected system is not exceeded.

7.3.2 Stop valves in pressure relief systemsA stop valve shall not be located betweenprotected piping and the protective device or devices, nor between the protective device ordevices and the point of discharge, except as follows:

(a) One stop valve may be installed on the inlet side and one may be placed on thedischarge side of a pressure-relieving device, where the discharge is connected to aheader common to other discharge lines from other pressure-relieving devices. The stopvalves shall be the full-area type or such other type and size that an increase inpressure drop will not reduce the relieving capacity to less than that required, oradversely affect the proper operation of the pressure-relieving device. The stop valvesshall be lockable or sealable in the open and the closed positions. When the stop valvesare in the closed position with the equipment operating, an authorized person shall beable to observe the operating pressure, and shall have means for relieving overpressure.The authorized person shall lock or seal the stop valves in the open position whenobservation ceases, or an alternative interlocking system of equivalent safety shall beused.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 134

(b) The stop valves shall be constructed or controlled positively so that, with the maximumpossible number of valves closed at one time, the remaining pressure-relieving capacitywill be not less than the required relieving capacity.

7.4 CORROSION PROTECTION Piping shall be protected against internal and externalcorrosion during design life unless the design principle used is to do nothing and monitor thethickness. Design life may be enhanced by replaceable components.

Protection may be afforded by one or more of the following:

(a) Corrosion-resistant piping components.

(b) Protective coating, e.g. galvanized steel, paints.

(c) Cathodic protection.

(d) Modify pipeline contents.

Piping not protected as above shall be located and installed to prevent corrosion, e.g. trenchesshall be drained to prevent accumulation of water, wash, or contaminants which couldseriously corrode the piping.

7.5 FIRE PROTECTION Piping of nominal size larger than DN 100 containingflammable or combustible fluid in areas where there is risk of fire, e.g. due to ruptured pipe,fitting, or accessory, shall have one or more of the following protective systems:

(a) Flameproof equipment and fire prevention practices (i.e. elimination of ignitionsources).

(b) A suitable firefighting system which shall be maintained.

(c) A slope and drainage that will safely remove spilling flammable liquid from thevicinity of the piping.

(d) Valves or other devices to shut off spilling flammable liquid which can be operatedmanually from a position remote from any resultant fire.

(e) Excess flow or automatic shut-off valves, or automatic depressurization, to limit thequantity and rate of fluid escaping.

(f) Insulation against fire (this includes the location of piping underground).

(g) Flammable vapour detectors should be considered in areas where normal electricalequipment (i.e. not waterproof) is present.

The discharge point of piping which will release flammable fluid into areas where ignitioncould be reasonably expected shall have a flame arrestor, and preferably shall be at apermanently burning flare. In any case, the discharge point shall be safe.

7.6 EARTHING Piping shall, where necessary, be suitably earthed in accordance with theappropriate Standards (see Clause 7.5) to prevent ignition sources from by static electricityand to give corrosion protection (see Clause 7.4) and lightning protection (see Clause 7.8).Precaution to be taken when cutting earthed pipes is given in AS 3500.1.

7.7 PROTECTION FROM IMPACT Piping containing a lethal, flammable or toxic fluid,or a fluid harmful to human tissue, shall be protected against external impact (e.g. collidingtrucks) and inadvertent external loads (e.g. persons climbing onto fragile piping). The meansof protection may include a naturally protected location, increased pipe thickness, sleeving,or crash barriers and the erection of warning signs.

COPYRIGHT

135 AS 4041—1998

7.8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Vertical piping, particularly that for venting flammablegases, shall be located so as to minimize the possibility of strike by lightning, or shall bedesigned to dissipate lightning strikes (see AS 1768).

7.9 HUMAN CONTACT PROTECTION Piping components with an external surfacetemperature higher than 65°C or lower than −20°C shall be located or protected to preventinadvertent human contact.

7.10 NOISE CONTROL Piping shall be designed, installed and, if necessary, fitted withdevices to control noise levels to any limits specified in the engineering design. Noise controlmethods include limiting velocities of fluid within pipe, suitable supports, silencers in thepipe or at the discharge, and insulation.

7.11 ISOLATION PROTECTION (FOR INTERCONNECTED PIPING) Piping,components, vessels, and the like which require opening for or entry of personnel forcleaning, maintenance, or repairs shall have a block valve and spade, or a removable spoolpiece between the piping, component, vessel, and all other piping (including drains) and anyother source of pressure or danger. Safe fluids (fluid 4) and low pressures may use oneisolation mechanism.

7.12 NOT ALLOCATED

7.13 PROTECTION AGAINST INTERFERENCE Piping controls and protective valvesand other devices shall be located or protected to avoid—

(a) their being rendered inoperative or tampered with by unauthorized persons;

(b) malfunction caused by the entrance of dirt, water, or wild life; and

(c) malfunction caused by the freezing of their operating parts.

Piping containing fluids dangerous to human tissue should be isolated or otherwise protectedto minimize human interference.

The location of piping controls, protective valves and other devices shall enable access byauthorized persons.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 136

S E C T I O N 8 Q U A L I T Y A S S U R A N C EA N D I N S P E C T I O N

8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 Scope This Section deals with quality assurance by the manufacturer and inspectionby the owner or an inspection body on behalf of the owner. In this Standard ‘inspection’applies to the inspection function performed for the owner by the owner’s inspector orrepresentative. ‘Examination’ and ‘testing’ are functions performed by the fabricator.

8.1.2 Basic requirements Piping shall be designed and fabricated under an accreditedquality system by the manufacturer or inspected, where specified in AS 3920.1 to provideassurance that the design, material, fabrication, installation, testing, and protective systemsand devices comply with the requirements of this Standard.

The owner, through an inspector shall—

(a) verify that all required examinations and tests have been completed and inspect thepiping to the extent necessary to satisfy that the piping complies with all applicablerequirements of this Standard; or

(b) be satisfied that a current accredited quality system is operated by the manufacturer.

NOTE: The inspection requirements in Clauses 8.2 to 8.4 provide for flexibility on the extent ofinspection by the owner or owner’s representative, by inclusion of ‘where required’. The extent ofthis inspection will depend on many factors including the hazard level of piping and whether thefabricator has an effective quality system. Reduced inspection does not in any way reduce theresponsibility of the fabricator.

8.1.3 Inspectors The inspector shall be designated by the owner, and shall be the owner,or an employee of the owner, or an employee of an engineering, inspection or insurance orother organization acting as an agent for the owner.

The inspector shall be competent in the inspection of piping. The inspector shall have eachof the following:

(a) A minimum of one year’s experience in the design, fabrication, or inspection ofpressure piping.

(b) An additional year of similar experience in pressure equipment.

(c) At least one of the following:

(i) Welding Supervisor’s Certificate No. 10 as specified in AS 1796.

(ii) Welding Inspector’s Certificate issued by the Welding Technology Institute ofAustralia or the Certification board for Inspection Personnel N.Z. or equivalent.

(iii) Certificate, diploma, or degree in engineering.

(iv) Three years’ similar experience in pressure equipment.

NOTE: Pressure equipment embraces piping, boilers, pressure vessels and gas cylinders.

(d) The capability to perform the required inspection.

Alternatives to Items (a) to (d) above are compliance with AS 3920.1 or AS/NZS 4481 orequivalent.

COPYRIGHT

137 AS 4041—1998

8.2 REVIEW OF DESIGN

8.2.1 Design verification The owner shall ensure that the design has been verified asrequired by AS 3920.1.

8.2.2 Approval of design Where required, the design shall be approved by the ownerbefore commissioning and preferably before fabrication is commenced.

8.3 MATERIAL AND COMPONENT INSPECTION

8.3.1 Materials and components Where required materials and components used in thepiping shall be inspected by the inspector before fabrication.

Repairs of defective material or component shall only be made where authorized by theinspector.

8.3.2 Marking For Class 1 piping, the inspector shall examine all materials andcomponents, certificates, and be satisfied that all materials and components are identified inaccordance with the appropriate material or component specifications.

For piping of Classes 2 and 3, certificates and marking shall be inspected as required by theinspector.

8.4 GENERAL INSPECTION OF FABRICATION Where required the inspector shallverify that the examinations and operations have been carried out in accordance with thisStandard. The extent of inspection shall be to satisfy the inspector.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 138

S E C T I O N 9 C O M M I S S I O N I N G A N DO P E R A T I O N

9.1 COMMISSIONING

9.1.1 General Piping shall be placed into operation only when it has been declared safeby the inspector.

The piping shall be initially operated in a manner to allow the inspector to safely check thatall parts of the system function correctly. This shall include an inspection of all controls andsafety devices, flow, pressure drops and drainage, the tightness of joints, and other featuresto ensure satisfactory operation.

9.1.2 Commissioning personnel Commissioning shall be carried out by persons judgedto be competent by the purchaser.

9.1.3 Alarm and shutdown systems Instrumentation for safe operation of piping shall betested before piping operation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.Alarms and emergency shutdowns shall be tested before piping operation.

9.1.4 Pressure-limiting devices, relief valves, pressure regulators and controlequipment All pressure-limiting devices, relief valves, pressure regulators, and controlequipment shall be tested for—

(a) good mechanical condition;

(b) adequate capacity, effectiveness and reliability for operation in the service for whichthey are employed;

(c) function at the correct pressure, temperature or flow; and

(d) proper location and installation, free from foreign materials, or other conditions thatmay prevent proper operation.

9.1.5 Identification See Clause 4.5.

9.1.6 Support settings Supports with variable springs, constant effort units, counterweightunits or hydraulic units designed to carry the weight of the pipe should have their loadsettings checked and set to cold design loads.

Where the fluid is a liquid, the settings should be checked again and reset if necessary to the‘cold and filled design loads’ when the pipe is filled with liquid. Load settings shall bechecked again and set to operating design loads when the pipes have reached their operatingtemperature.

All supports, including wind and earthquake restraints and snubbers, shall be checked toensure that they are within their design travel range under both cold and operating conditions.

9.2 OPERATION

9.2.1 General The owner shall ensure the safe operation of piping within the limits andconditions of the engineering design and AS 3873.

COPYRIGHT

139 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX A

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

(Normative)

AS1074 Steel tubes and tubulars for ordinary service

1170 Minimum design loads on structures (known as the SAA Loading Code)1170.2 Part 2: Wind loads1170.4 Part 4: Earthquake loads

1210 Pressure vessels1210 Supp1 Unfired Pressure Vessels—Advance design and construction (Supplement to

AS 1210—1997)

1228 Pressure equipment—Boilers

1271 Safety valves, other valves, liquid level gauges and other fittings for boilersand unfired pressure vessels

1345 Identification of the contents of piping, conduits and ducts

1349 Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges

1375 Industrial fuel-fired appliances (known as the SAA Industrial Fuel-firedAppliances Code)

1391 Methods for tensile testing of metals

1432 Copper tubes for plumbing, gasfitting and drainage applications

1448 Carbon steels and carbon-manganese steels—Forgings

1460 Fittings for use with polyethylene pipes

1544 Methods for impact tests on metals1544.2 Part 2: Charpy V-notch

1548 Steel plates for pressure equipment

1565 Copper and copper alloys—Ingots and castings

1566 Copper and copper alloys—Rolled flat products

1569 Copper and copper alloys—Seamless tubes for heat exchangers

1572 Copper and copper alloys—Seamless tubes for engineering purposes

1579 Arc welded steel pipes and fittings for water and waste water

1628 Water supply—Copper alloy gate, globe and non-return valves

1663 Method for dropweight test for nil-ductility transition temperature of ferriticsteels

1692 Tanks for flammable and combustible liquids

1697 Gas transmission and distribution systems (known as the SAA Gas PipelineCode)

1721 General purpose metric screw threads

1722 Pipe threads of Whitworth form1722.1 Part 1: Sealing pipe threads1722.2 Part 2: Fastening pipe threads

1733 Methods of the determination of grain size in metals

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 140

AS1751 Copper brazed steel tubing

1768 Lightning protection

1796 Certification of welders and welding supervisors

1830 Iron castings—Grey cast iron

1831 Iron castings—Spheroidal or nodular graphite cast iron

1832 Iron castings—Malleable cast iron

1833 Iron castings—Austenitic cast iron

1874 Aluminium and aluminium alloys—Ingots and castings

1940 The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids

2018 Liquid petroleum pipelines (known as the SAA Liquid Petroleum PipelineCode)

2022 Anhydrous ammonia—Storage and handling (known as the SAA AnhydrousAmmonia Code)

2129 Flanges for pipes, valves and fittings

2291 Methods for tensile testing of metals at elevated temperatures

2465 Unified hexagon bolts, screws and nuts (UNC and UNF threads)

2528 Bolts, studbolts and nuts for flanges and other high and low temperatureapplications

2809 Road tank vehicles for dangerous goods

2885 Pipelines—Gas and liquid petroleum

3500 National Plumbing and Drainage Code3500.1 Part 1: Water supply

3672 Wrought steel threaded pipe fittings

3673 Malleable cast iron threaded pipe fittings

3688 Water supply—Copper and copper alloy body compression fittings andthreaded-end connection

3689 Automatic fire extinguisher systems using halogenated hydrocarbons

3873 Pressure equipment—Operation and maintenance

3892 Pressure equipment—Installation

3920 Assurance of product quality3920.1 Part 1: Pressure equipment manufacture

3990 Steelwork for engineering applications

4037 Boilers and pressure vessels—Non-destructive examination

4087 Metallic flanges for water works purposes

4118 Fire sprinkler systems

4458 Pressure equipment—Manufacture

B148 Unified black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts (UNC and UNF threads) andplain washers—Heavy series

AS/NZS1110 ISO metric hexagon precision bolts and screws

COPYRIGHT

141 AS 4041—1998

AS/NZS1111 ISOmetric hexagon commercial bolts and screws

1112 ISO metric hexagon nuts, including thin nuts, slotted nuts and castle nuts

1200 Pressure equipment

1252 High strength steel bolts with associated nuts and washers for structuralengineering

1376 Conversion factors

1477 PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications

1554 Structural steel welding1554.1 Part 1: Welding of steel structures

1567 Copper and copper alloys—Wrought rods, bars and sections

1571 Copper—Seamless tubes for airconditioning and refrigeration

1594 Hot-rolled steel flat products

1596 Storage and handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gas

1664 Aluminium structures

1677 Refrigerating systems

1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys—Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate

1865 Aluminium and aluminium alloys—Drawn wire, rod, bar and strip

1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys—Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollowshapes

1867 Aluminium and aluminium alloys—Drawn tubes

2280 Ductile iron pressure pipes and fittings

2544 Grey iron pressure fittings

3678 Structural steel—Hot-rolled plates, floor plates and slabs

3679 Structural steel3679.1 Part 1: Hot-rolled bars and sections3679.2 Part 2: Welded I sections

3788 Pressure equipment—In-service inspection

3992 Pressure equipment—Welding and brazing qualification

4129(Int) Fittings for polyethylene (PE) for pressure applications

4130 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for pressure applications

4481 Pressure equipment—Competencies of inspectors

4331 Metallic flanges

ISO9329 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes—Technical delivery conditions

9330 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes—Technical delivery conditions

ANSI/ASMEB1.20.1 Pipe threads, general purpose (inch)

B16.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings

B16.9 Factory-made wrought steel butt-welding fittings

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 142

ANSI/ASMEB16.10 Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of valves

B16.11 Forged fittings, socket-welding and threaded

B16.20 Metallic gaskets for pipe flanges—Ring-joint-spiral wound and jacketed

B16.21 Nonmetallic flat gaskets for pipe flanges

B16.34 Valves—Flanged, threaded and welding end

B16.47 Large diameter steel flanges

B31.1 Power piping

B31.3 Process piping

B31.5 Refrigeration piping

B31.8 Gas transmission and distribution piping systems

B31.11 Slurry transportation piping systems

B36.10 Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe

BPV-III Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III Rules for construction of nuclearpower plant components

BPV-IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX Qualification Standard forwelding and brazing procedures, welders, brazers and welding and brazingoperators

API5B Specification for threading, gauging and thread inspection of casing, tubing

and line pipe threads

5L Specification for line pipe

STD 600 Steel gate valves, flanged and butt-welding end

STD 602 Compact steel gate valves

STD 603 Class 150, cast, corrosion resistant, flanged-end gate valve

STD 606 Compact carbon steel gate valves

ASTMA 53 Specification for pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped, zinc-coated welded and

seamless

A 105 Specification for carbon steel forgings for piping applications

A 106 Specification for seamless carbon steel pipe for high-temperature service

A 108 Specification for steel bars, carbon, cold-finished, standard quality

A 135 Specification for electric-resistance-welded steel pipe

A 178 Specification for electric-resistance-welded carbon steel and carbon-manganese steel boiler and superheater tubes

A 179 Specification for seamless cold-drawn low-carbon steel heat-exchanger andcondenser tubes

A 181 Specification for carbon steel forgings for general purpose piping

A 182 Specification for forged or rolled alloy-steel pipe flanges, forged fittings, andvalves and parts for high-temperature service

A 193 Specification for alloy-steel and stainless steel bolting materials forhigh-temperature service

COPYRIGHT

143 AS 4041—1998

ASTMA 194 Specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts for bolts for high-pressure and

high-temperature service

A 199 Standard specification for seamless cold-drawn intermediate alloy-steel heat-exchanger and condenser tubes

A 203 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel, nickel

A 204 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel, molybdenum

A 209 Specification for seamless carbon-molybdenum alloy-steel boiler andsuperheater tubes

A 210 Specification for seamless medium-carbon steel boiler and superheater tubes

A 213 Specification for seamless ferritic and austenitic alloy-steel boiler,superheater, and heat-exchanger tubes

A 216 Specification for steel castings, carbon, suitable for fusion welding forhigh-temperature service

A 217 Specification for steel castings, martensitic stainless and alloy, forpressure-containing parts suitable for high-temperature service

A 234 Specification for piping fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel formoderate and high temperature service

A 240 Specification for heat-resisting chromium and chromium-nickel stainless steelplate, sheet, and strip for pressure vessels

A 249 Specification for welded austenitic steel boiler, superheater, heat-exchanger, andcondenser tubes

A 250 Specification for electric-resistance-welded ferritic alloy-steel boiler andsuperheater tubes

A 268 Specification for seamless and welded ferritic and martensitic stainless steeltubing for general service

A 269 Specification for seamless and welded austenitic stainless steel tubing forgeneral service

A 276 Specification for stainless steel bars and shapes

A 302 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel, manganese-molybdenum andmanganese-molybdenum-nickel

A 307 Specification for carbon steel bolts and studs, 60 000 psi tensile strength

A 312 Specification for seamless and welded austenitic stainless steel pipes

A 320 Specification for alloy steel bolting materials for low-temperature service

A 325 Specification for structural bolts, steel, heat-treated, 120/105 ksi minimumtensile strength

A 333 Specification for seamless and welded steel pipe for low-temperature service

A 334 Specification for seamless and welded carbon and alloy-steel tubes forlow-temperature service

A 335 Specification for seamless ferritic alloy steel pipe for high-temperature service

A 336 Specification for alloy steel forgings for pressure and high-temperature parts

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 144

ASTMA 350 Specification for carbon and low-alloy steel forgings requiring notch

toughness testing for piping components

A 351 Specification for steel castings, austenitic, austenitic-ferritic (duplex), forpressure-containing parts

A 352 Specification for steel castings, ferritic and martensitic, for pressure-containingparts, suitable for low-temperature service

A 353 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel, 9 percent nickel,double-normalized and tempered

A 354 Specification for quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, studs, and otherexternally threaded fasteners

A 358 Specification for electric-fusion-welded austenitic chromium-nickel alloy steelpipe for high-temperature service

A 369 Specification for carbon and ferritic alloy steel forged and bored pipe forhigh-temperature service

A 370 Test methods and definitions for mechanical testing of steel products

A 376 Specification for seamless austenitic steel pipe for high-temperaturecentral-station service

A 387 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel chromium-molybdenum

A 403 Specification for wrought austenitic stainless steel piping fittings

A 420 Specification for piping fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel forlow-temperature service

A 423 Specification for seamless and electric-welded low-alloy steel tubes

A 430 Specification for austenitic steel forged and bored pipe for high-temperatureservice

A 449 Specification for quenched and tempered steel bolts and studs

A 452 Specification for centrifugally cast austenitic steel cold-wrought pipe forhigh-temperature service

A 479 Specification for stainless and heat-resisting steel wire, bars, and shapes foruse in boilers and other pressure vessels

A 516 Specification for pressure vessel plates, carbon steel, for moderate- andlower-temperature service

A 517 Specification for pressure vessel plates, alloy steel, high-strength, quenchedand tempered

A 524 Specification for seamless carbon steel pipe for atmospheric and lowertemperatures

A 571 Specification for austenitic ductile iron castings for pressure-containing partssuitable for low-temperature service

A 587 Specification for electric-resistance welded low-carbon steel pipe for thechemical industry

A 672 Specification for electric-fusion-welded steel pipe for high-pressure serviceat moderate temperatures

A 688 Specification for welded austenitic stainless steel feedwater heater tubes

A 691 Specification for carbon and alloy steel pipe, electric-fusion-welded forhigh-pressure service at high temperatures

COPYRIGHT

145 AS 4041—1998

ASTMA 789 Specification for seamless and welded ferritic/austenitic stainless steel tubing

for general service

A 790 Specification for seamless and welded ferritic/austenitic stainless steel pipe

B 42 Specification for seamless copper pipe, standard sizes

B 43 Specification for seamless red brass pipe, standard sizes

B 75 Specification for seamless copper tube

B 88 Standard specification for seamless copper water tube

B 96 Specification for copper-silicone alloy plate, sheet, strip, and rolled bar forgeneral purposes and pressure vessels

B 111 Specification for copper and copper-alloy seamless condenser tubes andferrule stock

B 127 Specification for nickel-copper alloy (UNS NO4400) plate, sheet, and strip

B 160 Specification for nickel rod and bar

B 161 Specification for nickel seamless pipe and tube

B 162 Specification for nickel plate, sheet and strip

B 163 Specification for seamless nickel and nickel alloy condenser andheat-exchanger tubes

B 164 Specification for nickel-copper alloy rod, bar and wire

B 165 Specification for nickel-copper alloy (UNS N04400) seamless pipe and tube

B 166 Specification for nickel-chromium-iron alloys (UNS N06600) and nickel-chromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloy (UNS N06617) rod, bar, and wire

B 167 Specification for nickel-chromium-iron alloys (UNS N06600, N06601,N06690, N06023 and N06005) seamless pipe and tube

B 171 Specification for copper-alloy plate and sheet for pressure vessels, condensersand heat-exchangers

B 210 Specification for aluminium-alloy drawn seamless tubes (metric)

B 211 Specification for aluminium and aluminium-alloy bar, rod, and wire

B 221 Specification for aluminium and aluminium-alloy extruded bars, rods, wire,profiles, and tubes

B 241 Specification for aluminium and aluminium-alloy seamless pipe and seamlessextruded tube (metric)

B 265 Specification for titanium and titanium alloy strip, sheet and plate

B 315 Specification for seamless copper alloy pipe and tube

B 333 Specification for nickel-molybdenum alloy plate, sheet, and strip

B 335 Specification for nickel-molybdenum alloy rod

B 337 Specification for seamless and welded titanium and titanium alloy pipe

B 338 Specification for seamless and welded titanium and titanium alloy tubes forcondensers and heat exchangers

B 381 Specification for titanium and titanium alloy forgings

B 395 Specification for U-bend seamless copper and copper alloy heat-exchangerand condenser tubes

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 146

ASTMB 407 Specification for nickel-iron-chromium alloy seamless pipe and tube

B 408 Specification for nickel-iron-chromium alloy rod and bar

B 409 Specification for nickel-iron-chromium alloy plate, sheet and strip

B 423 Specification for nickel-iron-chromium-molybdenum-copper alloy(UNS N08825 and N08221) seamless pipe and tube

B 424 Specification for Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu alloy (UNS N08825 and N08821) plate,sheet, and strip

B 425 Specification for Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu alloy (UNS N08825 and N08821) rod andbar

B 434 Specification for nickel-molybdenum-chromium-iron alloy (UNS N10003)plate, sheet, and strip

B 435 Specification for UNS N06002, UNS N06230, UNS N12160 and UNS R30556plate, sheet and strip

B 443 Specification for nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloy(UNS N06625) plate, sheet, and strip

B 444 Specification for nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloy(UNS N06625) pipe and tube

B 446 Specification for nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloy(UNS N06625) rod and bar

B 514 Specification for welded nickel-iron-chromium alloy pipe

B 515 Specification for welded UNS N0812D, UNS N08800, UNS N08810 andUNS N08811 alloy tubes

B 516 Specification for welded nickel-chromium-iron alloy (UNS NO6600) tubes

B 517 Specification for welded nickel-chromium-iron alloy (UNS NO6600) pipe

B 535 Specification for nickel-iron-chromium-silicone alloys (UNS N08330 andUNS N08332)) seamless pipe and tube

B 564 Specification for nickel alloy forgings

B 575 Specification for low-carbon nickel-molybdenum-chromium and low-carbonnickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy plate, sheet, and strip

B 619 Specification for welded nickel and nickel-cobalt alloy pipe

B 622 Specification for seamless nickel and nickel-cobalt alloy pipe and tube

B 626 Specification for welded nickel and nickel-cobalt alloy tube

BS806 Specification for design and construction of ferrous piping installations for

and in connection with land boilers

1387 Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars for plain endsteel tubes suitable for welding or screwing to BS 21 pipe threads

1414 Specification for steel wedge gate valves (flanged and butt-welding ends) forthe petroleum, petrochemical and allied industries

1471 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineeringpurposes—drawn tube

1474 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineeringpurposes: bars, extruded round tubes and sections

COPYRIGHT

147 AS 4041—1998

BS1490 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots and castings for

general engineering purposes

1501 Steels for pressure purposes1501.3 Part 3: Specification for corrosion and heat resisting steels: plates, sheet and

trip

1502 Specification for steels for fired and unfired pressure vessels: sections andbars

1503 Specification for steel forgings for pressure purposes

1560 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (Class designated)

1640 Specification for steel butt-welding pipe fittings for the petroleum industry

1726 Coil springs1726.1 Part 1: Guide for the design of helical compression springs

1740 Specification for wrought steel pipe fittings (Screwed BS 21 R-series thread)

1868 Specification for steel check valves (flanged and butt-welding ends) for thepetroleum, petrochemical and allied industries

1873 Specification for steel globe and globe stop and check valves (flanged andbutt-welding ends) for the petroleum, petrochemical and allied industries

1963 Specification for pressure operated relay valves for domestic, commercial andcatering gas appliances

2871 Specification for copper and copper alloys. Tubes2871.3 Part 3: Tubes for heat exchangers

3059 Steel boiler and superheater tubes

3071 Specification for nickel-copper alloy castings

3293 Specification for carbon steel pipe flanges (over 24 inches nominal size) forthe petroleum industry

3500 Methods for creep and rupture testing of materials

3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified room temperatureproperties for pressure purposes

3602 Specification for steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: carbon andcarbon manganese steel with specified elevated temperature properties

3602.1 Part 1: Specification for seamless and electric resistance welded includinginduction welded tubes

3602.2 Part 2: Specification for longitudinally arc-welded tubes

3603 Specification for specification for carbon and alloy steel and tubes withspecified low temperature properties for pressure purposes

3604 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: ferritic alloy steel with specifiedelevated temperature properties

3605 Austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes

3799 Specification for steel pipe fittings, screwed and socket-welding for thepetroleum industry

3920 Derivation and verification of elevated temperature properties for steelproducts for pressure purposes

3974 Specification for pipe supports

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 148

BS4882 Specification for bolting for flanges and pressure containing purposes

5150 Specification for cast iron gate valves

5151 Specification for cast iron gate (parallel slide) valves for general purposes

5152 Specification for cast iron globe and globe stop and check valves for generalpurposes

5153 Specification for cast iron check valves for general purposes

5154 Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gatevalves

5155 Specification for butterfly valves

5156 Specification for diaphragm valves

5157 Specification for steel gate (parallel slide) valves

5158 Specification for cast iron plug valves

5159 Specification for cast iron and carbon steel ball valves for general purposes

5160 Specification for steel globe valves, globe stop and check valves and lift typecheck valves

5352 Specification for steel wedge gate, globe and check valves 50 mm and smallerfor the petroleum, petrochemical and allied industries

5353 Specification for steel plug valves

5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels

5970 Code of practice for thermal insulation of pipework and equipment (in thetemperature range −100°C to +870°C)

6759 Safety valves

7572 Code of practice for thermally insulated underground piping systems

DIN17175 Seamless tubes of heat resisting steels

NZS5258 Gas distribution

AG601 Gas installation

MSSSP-44 Steel pipe line flange

SP-97 Integrally reinforced forged branch outlet fittings—Socket welding, threadedand butt welding ends

TRD300 (Withdrawn) Calculation of the stability of steam boilers

301 Cylindrical shells under internal overpressure

508 Additional testings at the components, calculated with time-dependent strengthcharacteristics

WRC198 Secondary stress indices for integral structural attachments to straight pipe,

Author W.G. Dodge, Stress indices at lug supports on piping systems, AuthorsE.C. Rodabaugh, W.G. Dodge and S.E. Moore.

COPYRIGHT

149 AS 4041—1998

WTIATN 13 Stainless steel for corrosive environments

NACEMR 0175 Sulfide stress cracking resistant metallic materials for oil field equipment

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 150

APPENDIX B

NOMINAL SIZES AND OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF PIPE

(Normative)

TABLE B1

OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF STEEL PIPE (NOT TUBE)

Nominal sizeDN

OD, mm

American AS, BS

68

10

10.313.717.1

10.213.517.2

152025

21.326.733.4

21.326.933.7

324050

42.248.360.3

42.448.360.3

658090

7388.9

101.6

76.188.9

101.6

100125150

114.3141.3168.3

114.3139.7165.1

200250300

219.1273323.9

———

350400450

355.6406.4457

———

500550600

508559610

———

650700750

660711762

———

800850900

813864914

———

1000* 1016 —

* Larger sizes by agreement.

COPYRIGHT

151 AS 4041—1998

TABLE B2

NOMINAL SIZE, OUTSIDE DIAMETER AND THICKNESSOF DUCTILE IRON PIPE TO AS/NZS 2280

Nominal sizeMean external

diameterMean wall thickness

mm

DN mm K9 class K12 class

80100150

—121.9177.3

—6.16.3

7.07.27.8

200225250

232.2259.1286.0

6.46.66.8

8.48.79.0

300375450

345.4426.2507.0

7.27.98.6

9.610.511.4

500600750

560.3667.0826.0

9.09.9

11.3

12.013.215.0

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 152

TABLE B3

OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF COPPER AND PLASTIC PIPE

Nominal size, DN(see Clause 1.7.21)

Outside diameter of pipe, mm

Copper pipe toAS 1432 or AS 1572

Plastic pipeAS/NZS 1477*

Plastic pipeAS/NZS 4130†

68

10

6.357.949.52

—13.917.9

———

151618

12.70—15.88

21.5—26.9

—16—

202532

19.0525.4031.75

—33.742.4

202532

404550

38.1044.4550.80

48.4—60.5

40—50

636575

—63.50—

—75.5—

63—75

8090

100

76.2088.90

101.60

89.1101.7114.5

—90—

110125140

—127.00—

—140.4—

110125140

150160175

152.40——

160.5—

200.5

—160—

180200225

—203.20228.60

—225.6250.7

180200225

250280300

254.00——

280.8—

315.9

250280—

315350355

———

—356.0—

315—

355

375400450

———

401.0451.0501.0

—400450

500525550

———

———

500——

560575600

———

—631.0—

560———

630700710

———

———

630—

710

750800850

———

———

—800—

9001000

——

——

9001000

* Maximum diameters only.

† Mean outside diameter, minimum.

COPYRIGHT

153 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX C

NOT ALLOCATED

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 154

APPENDIX D

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERSAND TENSILE STRENGTHS

(Normative)

The following tables of material properties, design parameters and tensile strengths arereferred to in Clause 3.4 and elsewhere in this Standard as Appendix D. The design strengthsin these tables are independent of weld joint factor (see Clause 3.12.2). See also Appendix G.

Table D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index

Table D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon, carbon-manganese and low to medium alloy steel.

Table D3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Equivalents for 200 MPa steels.

Table D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Equivalents for 250 MPa steels.

Table D5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High alloy steel pipe.

Table D6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Austenitic steel pipe—American source.

Table D7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Copper and copper alloy pipe—American source.

Table D8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminium and aluminium alloy pipe—American source.

Table D9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nickel and nickel alloy pipe—American source.

Table D10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titanium and titanium alloy pipe—American source.

Table D11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Iron castings

Ductile iron to AS/NZS 2280 is a commodity with pressure ratings and needs no designparameters and no elevated temperature ratings.

The temperature of application shall not exceed the value for which the design stress is givenexcept as provided in Clause 2.6.1 and Clause 3.4

For plate and other product forms the values in AS 1210 and its Supplement No. 1 areacceptable.

COPYRIGHT

155 AS 4041—1998

TABLE D1

INDEX OF PIPE SPECIFICATIONS—STEEL

Pipe specification Table reference*

Yield strength 200 MPaAS 1074BS 3601— 320API 5L A

D2D2 and D3

D3

ASTM A 53 AASTM A 106 AASTM A 178 A

D3D3D3

ASTM A 179ASTM A 333 1ASTM A 334 1

D3D3D3

ASTM A 587BS 3601— 320BS 3601— 360

D3D3D2

Yield strength 235 MPaBS 3601— 430BS 3602.1 — 360BS 3603— 410 LT50

D2D2D2

Yield strength 245 MPaBS 3602.2 — 410 SAWBS 3603— 503 LT100

D2D2

Yield strength 250 MPaAPI 5L BAPI 5L B

D2 and D4D4

ASTM A 53 BASTM A 106 BASTM A 333 6

D4D4D4

ASTM A 334 6ASTM A 524 1

D4D4

Yield strength 275 MPaASTM A 106 Grade C D2

Yield strength 290 MPaAPI 5L X42 D2

Yield strength 350 MPaBS 3602.1 — 500 NbAPI 5L X52

D2D2

ASTM A335 pipe for high temperatureserviceASTM A 335 — P11, P12ASTM A 335 — P22

D2D2

Ferritic low alloy steelBS 3604 591

620 — 440620 — 460

D2D2D2

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 156

TABLE D1 (continued)

Pipe specification Table reference*

621660622

D2D2D2

Ferritic high alloy steelBS 3603— 509 LT196BS 3604 762DIN 17175 X20 Cr, Mo, V21

D5D5D5

ASTM A 517 All grades D2

Austenitic stainless steelsBS 3605 304 S14E

S18ES59E

D5D5D5

BS 3605 316 S14E316 S18E316 S59E

D5D5D5

BS 3605 321 S18E321 S59E

D5D5

BS 3605 347 S18E347 S59E

D5D5

Martensitic stainless steelBS 3605 1250E D5

Austenitic steel pipe D6

Copper and copper alloy pipe D7

Aluminium and aluminium alloy pipe D8

Nickel and nickel alloy pipe D9

Titanium and titanium alloy pipe D10

* Tables D6, D7, D8, D9 and D10 contain material properties, design parameters and tensilestrengths taken form ANSI/ASME B31.3.

COPYRIGHT

157 AS 4041—1998

TABLE D2

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS—CARBON,CARBON-MANGANESE STEEL, PIPE AND TUBE

(Not including joint factor or class design factor)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Source Standard No. GradeRm Re

Base metalgroupletter

fe(max.)*Design

life

Design tensile strength, (f), MPa,

Maximum metal temperature, °C

MPa MPa MPa h 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480

YIELD STRENGTH 200 MPa

BS 806BS 806BS 806

AS 1074BS 3601BS 3601

—320360

320320360

195195215

A1A1A1

106106120

IndefiniteIndefiniteIndefinite

130130154

119119140

108108126

9797

111

868696

—7786

—7179

—6875

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———


BS 806

BS 5500

BS 3602.1

BS 3603

360

410-LT50

360

410

235

235

A1

A1

120

136

100 000150 000200 000250 000

Indefinite

153153153153157

139139139139—

125125125125—

117117117117—

111111111111—

97979797—

87878787—

78787878—

77777777—

77777777—

76747168—

69656259—

60565351—

52484542—

44403735—

36322826—


BS 806 API 5L B 413 240 A1 137 100 000150 000200 000250 000

160160160160

147147147147

135135135135

122122122122

110110110110

99999999

91919191

85858585

85858585

84838078

78747168

69656259

60565351

52484542

44403735

36322826


BS 806

BS 5500

BS 3602.2

BS 3603

410 SAW

503-LT100

410

440

245

245

A1

A1

136

146

100 000150 000200 000250 000

Indefinite

163163163163164

153153153153—

142142142142—

129129129129—

119119119119—

105105105105—

96969696—

92929292—

91919087—

88838078—

79747168—

69656259—

60565351—

52484542—

44403735—

36322826—


BS 806BS 806

ANSI/ASMEB 31.3

BS 3601BS 3601

ASTM A 106

430 ERW430 SAW

C

430430485

275275275

A1A1A2

143143161

IndefiniteIndefiniteIndefinite

183183163

166166163

149149160

132132160

115115150

103—

142

95—

134

89—

103

——96

——91

——84

———

———

———

———

———

* fe(max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 158


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24


Base metalgroupletter

fe(max.)*Design

life

Design tensile strength, (f), MPa,


MPa MPa MPa h 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480


BS 806 API 5L X42 413 289 A1 137 100 000150 000200 000250 000

176176176176

156156156156

135135135135

122122122122

110110110110

99999999

91919191

85858585

85858585

84838078

78747168

69656259

60565351

52484542

44403735

36322826


BS 806 BS 3602.1 500Nb 500 345 A1 166 100 000150 000200 000250 000

213213213213

204204204204

194194194194

178178178178

163163163163

148148148148

135135135135

125125121115

12111110498

105958883

90817570

77686359

65585451

56504643

48434037

42383432

BS 806 API 5L X52 455 358 A3 151 100 000150 000200 000250 000

194194194194

165165165165

135135135135

122122122122

110110110110

99999999

91919191

85858585

85858585

84838078

78747168

69656259

60565351

52484542

44403735

36322826


COPYRIGHT

159 AS 4041—1998


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27


Basemetalgroupletter

fe(max.)* Design lifeDesign tensile strength, (f), MPa,


MPa MPa MPa h 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590

ASTM A 335 PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE

BS 806 ASTM A 335 P11, P12 415 205 C 138 100 000150 000200 000250 000

138138138138

133133133133

128128128128

121121121121

115115115115

98989898

86868686

84848484

83838383

80808080

80807670

76676157

62554945

52444037

42353230

33292625

27242220

————

————

BS 806 ASTM A 335 P22 N&T 415 205 D2 138 100 000150 000200 000250 000

138138138138

120120120120

102102102102

97979797

91919191

89898989

86868686

83838383

77777777

71717171

70707070

69696865

68635957

61565249

53484542

45423836

39363332

34312827

————

BS 806 ASTM A 335 P22annealed

415 205 D2 138 100 000150 000200 000250 000

138138138138

102102102102

65656565

60606060

56565656

53535353

51515151

48484848

46464646

44444444

43434343

42424242

41414141

40404040

39393939

38383836

36363632

34313127

————


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 160


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SourceStandard

No.Grade

Rm Re

Basemetalgroupletter

fe(max.)*Design

life

Design tensile strength,f , MPa,


MPa MPa MPa h 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590

FERRITIC LOW ALLOY STEELS

BS 806 BS 3604 591 610 440 C 203 Indefinite 260 260 260 260 260 255 249 229 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

BS 806 BS 3604 620-440 440 290 C 146 100 000150 000200 000250 000

187187187187

178178178178

169169169169

163163163163

157157157157

128128128128

121121121121

116116116116

112112112112

112112112112

111111111111

111111111111

111111111107

1111029488

93837670

76676157

62554945

52444037

42353230

33292625

27242220

————

————

BS 806 BS 3604 620-460 460 180 C 153 100 000150 000200 000250 000

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

120120120120

116116116116

115115115115

115115115115

114114114114

113113113107

1121029488

93837670

76676157

62554945

52444037

42353230

33292625

27242220

————

————

BS 806 BS 3604 621 420 275 C 140 100 000150 000200 000250 000

179179179179

169169169169

158158158158

152152152152

145145145145

116116116116

110110110110

105105105105

101101101101

101101101101

101101101101

101101101101

100100100100

1001009488

93837670

76676157

62554945

52444037

42353230

33292625

27242220

————

————

BS 806 BS 3604 660 460 300 D1 153 100 000150 000200 000250 000

196196196196

190190190190

184184184184

178178178178

161161161161

150150150150

144144144144

139139139139

135135135135

135135135135

135135135135

134134134134

134134130123

131120112106

1151059892

101928478

89787064

77655852

65544742

55443732

45352825

35272220

————

BS 806 BS 3604 622 490 275 D2 163 100 000150 000200 000250 000

183183183183

176176176176

169169169169

163163163163

157157157157

153153153153

149149149149

145145145145

137137137137

135135135135

132132130126

130122117113

118108104110

105979287

94857975

82736865

72635957

61575249

53484542

45423836

39363332

34312827

————

HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY

Bunge ASTM A517

All 790 690 G 263 Indefinite 336 336 336 336 336 336 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

* fe(max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7

COPYRIGHT

161 AS 4041 — 1998

The steel tube and pipe specifications in Table D3 are deemed equivalent to theRe 200 Groupand the values listed under BS 3601 Grade 320 may be used.

TABLE D3

PIPE SPECIFICATIONS EQUIVALENT TO Re 200

Specification Grade Rm Re


AAA

331330330

207205205


AA

331325325

207180180

ASTM A 333ASTM A 334ASTM A 587BS 3601

11

320

380380331320

205205207195

The steel tube and pipe specifications in Table D4 are deemed equivalent to theRe 250 Groupand the values listed under API 5L may be used.

TABLE D4

PIPE SPECIFICATIONS EQUIVALENT TO Re 250

Specification Grade Rm Re


BBB

413415415

241240240

ASTM A 135ASTM A 333ASTM A 334ASTM A 524

B661

414415415414

241240240240

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 162

COPYRIGHT

TABLE D5

MATERIAL, PROPERTIES AND DESIGN PARAM ETERS OF HIGH ALLOY STEEL PIPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Source Grade Maximum metal temperature, CStandard metal life

No. group

Rm

MPa

R Base f (max)* Designe

MPa letter MPa h

cDesign tensile strength f, MPa

o

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620

FERRITIC HIGH ALLOY STEEL

BS 5500 BS 3603 509—LT196 690 510 — Indefinite 294 — — — — — — — — —— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —BS 806 BS 3604 762 720 470 H 100 000 306 291 275 256 241 234 230 225 215 211 208 204 201 191 173 155 138 122 107 93 80 68 58 48 40 —

230240

150 000 306 291 275 256 241 234 230 225 215 211 208 204 200 184 168 152 135 115 98 85 72 62 52 44 37 —200 000 306 291 275 256 241 234 230 225 215 211 208 204 197 180 164 146 128 110 94 80 68 58 49 41 34 —250 000 306 291 275 256 241 234 230 225 215 211 208 204 192 176 160 142 124 105 90 77 65 55 46 38 32 —

DIN 17175 DIN 17175 X20 Cr 690 490 — 230 Indefinite 294 292 289 286 276 260 253 240 220 215 209 204 198 — — — — — — — — — — — — —Mo 100 000 294 292 289 286 276 260 253 240 220 215 209 204 200 181 162 143 128 113 98 86 74 63 54 46 38 —

V121 200 000 294 292 289 286 276 260 253 240 220 215 209 204 182 165 146 128 113 98 85 74 62 52 45 38 31 —

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7 (continued) c

163 AS 4041—1998


COPYRIGHT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Source Grade Maximum metal temperature, CStandard metal life

No. group

R Rm

MPa MPa

eBase f (max)* Design

letter MPa h

cDesign tensile strength f, MPa

o

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 520 540 550 560 580 600 620 640 650 660 680 700 720 740 750 —

AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE AND TUBES

BS 806 BS 3605 304 S14E 490 205 K 137 Indefinite 137 119 101 89 84 80 73 71 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

BS 806 BS 3605 304 SI8E 490 235 K 157 Indefinite 157 139 121 109 101 97 94 90 88 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

BS 806 BS 3605 304 S59E 490 235 K 157 100 000 157 139 121 109 101 97 94 90 88 86 84 83 82 81 68 57 47 38 35 31 23 18 — — — —150 000 157 139 121 109 101 97 94 90 88 86 84 83 82 76 62 52 42 33 30 26 20 15 — — — —200 000 157 139 121 109 101 97 94 90 88 86 84 83 78 72 58 48 38 31 27 24 18 — — — — —250 000 157 139 121 109 101 97 94 90 88 86 84 82 75 68 56 45 36 28 25 22 17 — — — — —

BS 806 BS 3605 316 S14E 490 215 K 143 Indefinite 143 131 119 112 107 103 99 95 92 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


BS 806 BS 3605 316 S19E 510 245 K 163 100 000 163 149 134 126 121 117 112 107 104 99 98 97 96 96 94 91 74 58 53 46 35 28 23 19 18 —150 000 163 149 134 126 121 117 112 107 104 99 98 97 96 96 94 85 66 52 46 41 32 25 19 16 — —200 000 163 149 134 126 121 117 112 107 104 99 98 97 96 96 94 79 62 48 43 38 29 22 18 15 — —250 000 163 149 134 126 121 117 112 107 104 99 98 97 96 96 94 75 58 45 40 35 27 22 18 15 — —


BS 806 BS 3605 321 S59E 510 235 K 157 100 000 157 146 134 130 127 124 121 118 116 112 111 109 109 103 86 71 57 49 42 36 31 24 18 — — —(1010 C) 150 000 157 146 134 130 127 124 121 118 116 112 111 109 102 94 78 64 49 42 36 32 27 — — — — —o

200 000 157 146 134 130 127 124 121 118 116 112 111 105 97 90 74 58 45 38 33 28 25 — — — — —250 000 157 146 134 130 127 124 121 118 116 112 111 101 93 85 71 55 42 35 31 26 22 — — — — —


BS 806 BS 3605 347 S59E 510 245 K 163 100 000 163 155 147 141 136 132 128 124 122 120 119 118 118 117 99 82 66 59 52 47 41 31 23 17 — —150 000 163 155 147 141 136 132 128 124 122 120 119 118 118 112 93 75 61 54 48 41 37 28 22 — — —200 000 163 155 147 141 136 132 128 124 122 120 119 118 116 106 88 72 58 51 45 39 34 25 19 — — —250 000 163 155 147 141 136 132 128 124 122 120 119 118 117 102 85 68 55 48 42 37 32 24 19 — — —

BS 806 BS 3605 1250E 540 270 K 180 100 000 180 168 156 144 141 139 136 135 133 132 132 132 130 130 130 126 124 123 107 87 71 52 40 — — —150 000 180 168 156 144 141 139 136 135 133 132 132 132 130 130 130 126 124 114 93 75 62 46 35 — — —200 000 180 168 156 144 141 139 136 135 133 132 132 132 130 130 130 126 124 104 83 67 56 42 32 — — —250 000 180 168 156 144 141 139 136 135 133 132 132 132 130 130 130 126 118 96 76 62 52 40 — — — —

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c

AS 4041—1998 164

COPYRIGHT

TABLE D6

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAM ETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE—AMERI CAN SOURCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

Material Standard type or oftype No. steel manufac-

Grade, Process

No. ture

Mechanicalproperties at room

temperature20 Co

Designtemperature Design tensile strength f, MPa

Co

Basemetal f (max)* Designgroup life, Minimum Lower

Ptensile yieldNo.strength, strength

c

MPa h MPa MPa

or 1.0% Min. Max.proofstress,

Maximum metal temperature, Co

50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750

18Cr-10Ni ASTM TP 304 Seamless 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 213* TP 304H Seamless 515 205 -200 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —

ASTM TP 304 Welded 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 249* TP 304H Welded 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —

ASTM TP 304 Seamless 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 312* Welded

ASTM TP 304 Seamless 520 210 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 376* TP 304H Seamless 520 210 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —ASTM FP 304 Forged and 483 207 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 430* bored

ASTM TP 304H Cast 517 207 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 452*ASTM TP 304 Welded 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —A 688 TP 304H Welded 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —

TP 304L Seamless 485 170 -250 525 P8.1 119 Indefinite 119 105 91 82 79 75 73 72 71 70 68 67 66 66 64 — — — — —— — — —

TP 304L Welded 485 170 -250 525 P8.1 119 Indefinite 119 105 91 82 79 75 73 72 71 70 68 67 66 66 64 — — — — —— — — —

TP 304H Seamless 515 205 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —


FP 304H 483 207 -250 725 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 107 99 94 88 87 86 84 82 80 79 78 77 75 71 67 64 53 41 31 25 21 —

Welded -200

Welded

* f (max) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c(continued)

165 AS 4041—1998


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35


Grade, Process

No. ture


temperature20 Co


Co



c

MPa h MPa MPa



50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750

COPYRIGHT

16Cr- ASTM TP 316 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — — —12Ni-2Mo A 213* TP 316H Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — — —

ASTM TP 316 Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — — —A 249* TP 316H Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — — —

ASTM TP 316 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 312* Welded

ASTM TP 316 Seamless 520 210 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 376*

ASTM FP 316 Forged and 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 430* bored

ASTM TP 316H Cast 517 207 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 452*ASTM TP 316 Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 688* TP 316H Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —


TP 316L Welded 485 170 -200 525 P8.1 119 Indefinite 119 104 90 83 77 72 71 70 68 67 65 64 63 62 60 — — — — —— — — —

TP 316H Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —


TP 316H Seamless 520 210 -200 600 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 — —— — — —

FP 316H 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —

Welded

Welded

18Cr- ASTM TP 317 Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —13Ni-3Mo A 249* TP 317L Welded 485 170 -200 525 P8.1 119 Indefinite 119 104 90 83 77 72 71 70 68 67 65 64 63 62 60 — — — — —— — — —

ASTM TP 317 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 127 111 103 96 91 89 88 86 85 84 83 82 82 81 80 66 56 45 35 27 20 — —A 312* TP 317L Seamless 515 205 -200 525 P8.1 143 Indefinite 119 104 90 83 77 72 71 70 68 67 65 64 63 62 60 — — — — —— — — —

* f (max) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c(continued)

AS 4041—1998 166


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35


Grade, Process

No. ture


temperature20 Co


Co



c

MPa h MPa MPa



50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750

COPYRIGHT

18Cr-12Ni ASTM TP 321 Seamless 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite — 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — —A 213* TP 321H Seamless 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite — 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — —ASTM TP 321 Welded 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —A 249* TP 321H Welded 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —ASTM TP 321 Seamless 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —A 312* TP 321H Welded 515 205 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —ASTM TP 321 Seamless 520 210 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —A 376* TP 321H Seamless 520 210 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —ASTM TP 321 Forged and 483 207 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —A 430 TP 321H bored 483 207 -200 675 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 125 108 99 93 88 86 85 84 83 82 81 81 80 79 78 61 44 32 25 19 — — —

18Cr- ASTM TP 347 Seamless 515 205 -30 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —10Ni-Cb A 213* TP 347H Seamless 515 205 -30 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

ASTM TP 347 Welded 515 205 -30 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 249* TP 347H Welded 515 205 -30 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —ASTM TP 347 Seamless 515 205 -255 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 312* TP 347 Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

ASTM TP 347 Seamless 520 210 -255 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 376* TP 347H Seamless 520 210 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —ASTM FP 347 Forged and 483 207 -250 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 430* FP 347H bored 483 207 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

TP 347H Seamless 515 205 -255 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —TP 347H Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c(continued)

167 AS 4041—1998


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35


Grade, Process

No. ture


temperature20 Co


Co



c

MPa h MPa MPa



50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750

COPYRIGHT

ASTM TP 347H Cast 517 207 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 452*ASTM TP 348 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 213* Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —ASTM TP 348H Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 249* Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —ASTM TP 348 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 312* Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

ASTM TP 348 Seamless 520 210 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —A 376*

TP 348H Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.1 143 Indefinite 143 132 122 114 108 104 101 99 98 97 96 96 95 95 95 90 82 58 40 31 24 17 — —

23Cr-12Ni ASTM TP 309 Welded 515 205 -200 700 P8.2 143 Indefinite 143 132 121 114 108 103 101 99 97 95 92 90 89 87 86 66 54 42 34 26 20 17 — —A 249*ASTM TP 309 Seamless 515 205 -200 700 P8.2 143 Indefinite 143 132 121 114 108 103 101 99 97 95 92 90 89 87 86 66 54 42 34 26 20 17 — —A 312* Welded

25Cr-20Ni ASTM TP 310 Seamless 515 205 -200 675 P8.2 143 Indefinite 143 132 121 114 108 103 101 99 97 95 92 90 89 87 86 63 39 32 24 17 10 — — —A 213*ASTM TP 310 Welded 515 205 -200 675 P8.2 143 Indefinite 143 132 121 114 108 103 101 99 97 95 92 90 89 87 86 63 39 32 24 17 10 — — —A 249*ASTM TP 310 Seamless 515 205 -200 675 P8.2 143 Indefinite 143 132 121 114 108 103 101 99 97 95 92 90 89 87 86 63 39 32 24 17 10 — — —A 312* Welded

12Cr-A1 ASTM TP 405 Seamless 415 205 -30 525 P7.1 138 Indefinite 143 134 126 124 123 121 119 116 115 112 108 103 99 94 86 — — — — — — — — —A 268*


AS 4041—1998 168


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35


Grade, Process

No. ture


temperature20 Co


Co



c

MPa h MPa MPa



50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750

COPYRIGHT

13Cr ASTM TP 410 Seamless 415 205 -30 600 P7.1 138 Indefinite 143 134 126 124 123 121 119 116 115 112 108 103 99 94 86 38 27 17 — — — — — —A 268*

16Cr ASTM TP 430-1 Seamless 415 240 -30 600 P7.1 138 Indefinite 166 157 148 145 144 141 139 137 134 131 125 121 114 108 100 37 21 17 — —— — — —A 268†

27Cr ASTM TP 446 Seamless 485 275 -30 500 PIOE.1 161 Indefinite 161 151 148 141 135 129 126 123 120 117 112 105 94 62 39 — — — — — — — — —A 268‡

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c† This steel may develop embrittlement at room temperature following service at temperatures above 425 C, and so it is use at higher temperatures is not recommended unless due caution is observed.o

‡ At temperatures over 550 C the values for tensile strength apply only when the carbon content is 0.04% or higher.o

169 AS 4041—1998

TABLE D7

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE—AMERICAN SOURCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Materialtype

Standard No.UNS No.,

designationor grade

Temperor

condition

Rm Re

Designtemperature,

°C

Basemetalgroup,

PNo.

fe(max.)*Design tensile strength,f , MPa


MPa MPa Min. Max. MPa 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425

70/30Arsenicalbrass

AS 1569BS 2871.3

C26130CZ 126

Annealed0

280—

——

−200−200

225225

P34P34

6969

6969

6969

6969

6969

6868

5353

2424

1313

——

——

——

——

——

——

——

——

Admiraltybrass,arsenical

AS 1569BS 2871.3

ASTM B 111

C44300CZ 111C44300C4400C44500

Annealed0

AnnealedAnnealedAnnealed

310—310310310

100—105105105

−200−200−200−200−200

225225225225225

P32P32P32P32P32

6969696969

6969696969

6969696969

6969696969

6969696969

6969696969

6868686868

3434252525

1313151515

—————

—————

—————

—————

—————

—————

—————

—————

76/22/2Aluminiumbrass

AS 1569BS 2871.3

ASTM B 111

C68700CZ 110C68700

Annealed0

061

300—345

120—125

−200−200−200

225225225

P32P32P32

838383

838383

828282

818181

808080

808080

454545

242424

161616

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

90/10 Coppernickel

AS 1569BS 2871.3

ASTM B 111

C70610CN 102C70600

Annealed0

061

300—275

100—105

−200−200−200

325325300

P34P34P34

606068

606068

575767

565666

555564

545462

535360

525259

515157

505055

494952

434349

3939—

———

———

———

———

70/30 Coppernickel

AS 1569

BS 2871.3

ASTM B 111

C71500

CN 107

C71500

AnnealedAs drawn

0As drawn

061HR50

370500——360495

120350——125345

−200−200−200−200−200−200

400425400425375425

P34P34P34P34P34P34

8312483

12483

124

8312483

12483

124

7912479

12479

124

7812478

12478

124

7612476

12476

124

7412474

12474

124

7312173

12173

121

7111971

11971

119

7011770

11770

117

6811568

11568

115

6811368

11368

113

6611166

11166

111

6611166

11166

111

6511066

11066

110

6510865

10865

108

6410364

10364

103

—59—59—59

Aluminiumbronze

BS 2871.3ASTM B 111

CA 102C60800

0061

—345

—130

−200−200

250200

P35P35

8686

8686

8585

8484

8282

8080

7064

4746

3032

1919

——

——

——

——

——

——

——

High-siliconebronze A

ASTM B 315 C65500 061 345 103 −200 300 P35 69 69 69 69 69 68 38 32 — — — — — — — — —

Copper-oxygen-freewithoutresidualdeoxidants

ASTM B 42

ASTM B 75ASTM B 111

ASTM B 395

C10200

C10200C10200

C10200

061H55H80060H55H80H55

294250310205250310250

8821028068205275205

−200−200−200−200−200−200−200

200200200200200200200

P31P31P31P31P31P31P31

41627841627862

41627841627862

34627834627862

33627833627862

33627833627862

32607632607660

28597128597159

21573021573057

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 170


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Materialtype

Standard No.UNS No.,

designationor grade

Temperor

condition

Rm Re

Designtemperature,

°C

Basemetalgroup,

PNo.

fe(max.)*Design tensile strength,f , MPa


MPa MPa Min. Max. MPa 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425

Copper-phosphorized,low residualphosphorus

ASTM B 42

ASTM B 75ASTM B 111

ASTM B 395

C12000

C12000C12000

C12000

061H55H80060H55H80H55

294250310205250310250

8821028062205275205

−200−200−200−200−200−200−200

200200200200200200200

P31P31P31P31P31P31P31

41627841627862

41627841627862

34627834627862

33627833627862

33627833627862

32607632607660

28597128597159

21573021573057

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

———————

Copper-phosphorized,high residualphosphorus

AS 1569

BS 2871.3

ASTM B 42

ASTM B 75ASTM B 111

ASTM B 395

C12200

C106

C12000

C12200C12200

C12200

AnnealedAs drawn

OM

061H55H80060H55H80H55

200280——205250310205250310250

—270——6220529562205275205

−200−200−200−200−200−200−200−200−200−200−200

200200200200200200200200200200200

P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31

4178417841627841627862

4178417841627841627862

3478347834627834627862

3378337833627833627862

3378337833627833627862

3276327632607632607660

2871287128597128597159

2130213021573021573057

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

———————————

Copper-phosphorized,arsenical

ASTM B 75ASTM B 111

ASTM B 395

C14200C14200

C14200

060H55H80H55

205250310250

62205275205

−200−200−200−200

200200200200

P31P31P31P31

41627862

41627862

34627862

33627862

33627862

32607660

28597159

21573057

————

————

————

————

————

————

————

————

————

Copper-redbrass

ASTM B 43ASTM B 111ASTM B 395

C23000C23000C23000

061061061

280275275

808585

−200−200−200

200200200

P32P32P32

554141

554141

553434

553333

553333

553232

482828

352121

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

* fe(max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7.

NOTE: If the pipe is brazed, the design strength for the annealed product should be used.

COPYRIGHT

171 AS 4041—1998

TABLE D8

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—ALUMINIUM ANDALUMINIUM ALLOY PIPE—AMERICAN SOURCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Materialtype

StandardNo.

Type ordesignation

Temper

Nationalwall

thickness,mm

Mechanicalproperties at

roomtemperature

20°C

Designtemperature

°C

Basemetal

group,P

No.

fe(max.)*

Design tensile strength,f, MPa not exceeding


Rm

MPaRe

MPaMin. Max. MPa 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

A1 AS/NZS 1866AS/NZS 1867

BS 1471

BS 1474ASTM B 210

ASTM B 241

10501050

1050A

1050A1060

10601100

H1120

H140

H4M0

H1400

H112

AllAllAll≥12≥12All

>0.5 ≤12>0.5 ≤12

AllAllAll

62—99—100606085607575

——————1570152020

−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270

200200200200200200200200200200200

P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21

1212281228121228121414

1212281228121228121414

1111281128111128111414

1111261126111126111313

1010211021101021101313

9918918991891212

88128128812899

66868668677

Al-11/4Mn AS/NZS 1867

ASTMB 210

ASTMB 241ASTMB 210

ASTMB 241

3202

3003

3003

Alclad3003

Alclad3003

0H14

0H112H114H18

0H112

0H14H18

0H112

AllAll

>0.3 ≤12>0.3 ≤12>0.5 ≤12>0.5 ≤12

AllAll

>0.2 <12>0.2 ≤12>0.3 ≤12

AllAll

—137951201401859595901351809090

——35851151653535301101603030

−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270

200200200200200200200200200200200200200

P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21

23452323456223232141562121

23452323456223232141562121

23452323456223232141552121

22422222425722222038512020

21332121334321211930391919

17301717303717171426341414

12211212212412121119221111

10161010161710109141599

* fe (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 172


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Materialtype

StandardNo.

Type ordesignation

Temper

Nationalwall

thickness,mm


roomtemperature

20°C

Designtemperature

°C

Basemetal

group,P

No.

fe(max.)*



Rm

MPaRe

MPaMin. Max. MPa 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

Al-21/2Mg AS/NZS 1867

BS 1471

ASTMB 210

ASTMB 241

5251

5251

5052

5052

0H32H34

0H40

H32H34

0

AllAllAllAllAll

>0.4 ≤12>0.5 ≤12>0.5 ≤12>0.4 ≤12

172213234160225170215235170

68158179601757016018070

−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270−270

200200200200200200200200200

P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21P21

467178467846717846

467178467846717846

467178467846717846

456673457345667345

435258435843525843

384343384338434338

282828282828282828

161616161616161616

Al-31/2Mg ASTMB 210

5154 0H34

>0.3 ≤12>0.3 ≤12

205310

75235

−270−270

7575

——

5090

5090

5090

——

——

——

——

——

Al-Mg-Si-Cu AS/NZS 1867

ASTMB 210

ASTMB 241

6061

6061

6061

T4T6T4T6T4

WeldedT4

T6T62

T4Welded

T6Welded

AllAll

>0.5 ≤12>0.5 ≤12

AllAllAll>25

All

All

216293—290

150180260

180

260

110241—240

70110240

110

240

−270−270−270−270

−270−270−270−270

−270

−270

200200200200

200200200200

200

200

P23P23P23P23

P23P23P23P23

P23

P23

69966996

55609687

55

55

69966996

55609687

55

55

69966996

55609687

55

55

68956895

54599586

54

54

67926792

54589285

54

54

63786378

51557872

51

51

54545454

42535454

42

42

39393939

30393939

30

30

* fe (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

173 AS 4041—1998


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Materialtype

StandardNo.

Type ordesignation

Temper

Nationalwall

thickness,mm


roomtemperature

20°C

Designtemperature

°C

Basemetal

group,P

No.

fe(max.)*



Rm

MPaRe

MPaMin. Max. MPa 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

Al-Mg-Si AS/NZS 1867

ASTMB 210

ASTMB 241

6063

6063

6063

0T6T4T6T4

WeldedT6

WeldedT4T5T6T4

WeldedT5

WeldedT6

Welded

AllAll

>0.6 ≤12>0.6 ≤12

All

All≤12≤12≤25

All

All

All

—200150230

150

230130150145

130

150

145

—11770195

70

19570110105

70

110

105

−270−270−270−270

−270

−270−270−270−270

−270

−270

−270

200200200200

200

200200200200

200

200

200

P23P23P23P23

P23

P23P23P23P23

P23

P23

P23

29664676

39

39435048

39

39

39

29764676

39

39445069

39

39

39

29744674

39

39445068

39

39

39

27704670

39

39444966

39

39

39

26654665

38

38444761

38

38

38

25484648

36

36444245

36

36

36

19232323

23

23232323

23

23

23

14141414

14

14141414

14

14

14


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 174

COPYRIGHT

TABLE D9

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAM ETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—NICKEL AND NIC KEL ALLOY PIPE—AMERI CAN SOURCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Material UNS C metalclassifi- desig- Condition group, cation nation P

Standard Outside 20 C fNo. dia- (max)*

meter Maximum metal temperature, C

mm MPaMPa MPa 50 100150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750 775 800


temperature o

Designtemperature Base Design tensile strength f, MPa

o

No.

c

R Rm e Min. Max.

o

Nickel Str. Rel. All 450 275 -200 300 112 112 112112 112 111 108 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

ASTM N02200 Annealed �127 380 105 -200 300 P41 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —B 161 Annealed �127 380 80 -200 300 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

ASTM N02200 Annealed All 379 103 -200 300 P41 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —B 163 Str. Rel. All 448 276 -200 300 112 112 112112 112 111 108 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Low- B 161 Annealed �127 380 70 -200 650 46 46 44 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 41 41 40 34 28 23 19 16 13 10 8 — — — — — —carbon Str. Rel. All 450 205 -200 300 103 103 103103 102 101 99 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —nickel ASTM N02201 Annealed All 345 83 -200 650 P41 55 55 53 52 52 52 52 52 52 51 50 49 40 34 28 23 19 16 13 10 8 — — — — — —

ASTM N02201 Annealed �127 380 80 -200 650 P41 55 55 53 52 52 52 52 52 52 51 50 49 40 34 28 23 19 16 13 10 8 — — — — — —

B 163 Str. Rel. All 414 207 -200 475 114 114 107103 102 101 99 97 95 92 88 83 81 77 — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Nickel- B 163copper ASTM N04400

ASTM N04400

B 165

�76 All 483 193 -200 475 P42 121 121 112106 102 101 101 101 101 101 100 98 77 60 — — — — — — — — — — — — —Str. Rel. All 586 379 -200 425 146 146 146146 145 145 145 145 144 138 124 88 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —Annealed �130 480 195 -200 475 P42 121 121 112106 102 101 101 101 101 101 100 98 77 60 — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Str. Rel. All 585 380 -200 300 146 146 146146 145 145 145 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —�130 480 170 -200 425 114 114 100 94 91 90 90 90 90 90 90 88 77 60 — — — — — — — — — — — — —

Nickel-chromium-

iron

ASTM N06600 Annealed �76 552 241 -200 625 P43 138 138 138138 138 138 138 137 136 135 134 132 129 115 85 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —B 163ASTM N06600 Annealed �127 550 205 -200 625 P43 138 138 131125 121 117 113 111 109 108 107 105 104 103 83 61 40 28 14 14 — — — — — — —B 163

ASTM Annealed All 550 240 -200 625 P43 138 138 138138 138 138 138 137 136 135 134 132 129 115 82 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —B 516B 517 CD/Ann All 550 240 -200 625 P43 138 138 138138 138 138 138 137 136 135 134 132 129 115 85 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —

N06600

N06600

CD/Ann �127 515 170 -200 625 115 115 105100 97 94 92 91 90 90 89 88 85 82 76 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —CD/Ann �127 550 240 -200 625 138 138 138138 138 138 138 137 136 135 134 132 129 115 85 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —

�127 550 205 -200 625 138 138 131125 121 117 113 111 109 108 107 105 104 103 83 61 40 28 19 14 — — — — — — —

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7. (continued) c

175 AS 4041—1998


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37




mm MPaMPa MPa 50 100150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750 775 800


temperature o


o

No.

c

R Rm e Min. Max.

o

COPYRIGHT

Nickel-iron- ASTM N08800 Annealed All 520 207 -200 800 P45 128 128 128103 119 115 113 112 111 110 108 107 106 105 103 102 101 97 84 63 46 29 21 19 9 7 6chromium B 514 N08810 Annealed All 450 170 -200 800 P45 112 112 105100 93 90 85 84 82 81 74 77 75 74 73 72 70 70 69 68 58 48 37 33 23 23 19

ASTM N08800 Annealed All 520 205 -200 800 P45 128 128 128103 119 115 113 112 111 110 108 107 106 105 103 102 101 97 84 63 46 29 21 19 9 7 6B 407 N08810 Annealed All 450 170 -200 800 P45 112 112 105100 93 90 85 84 82 81 74 77 75 74 73 72 70 70 69 68 58 48 37 33 23 23 19

ASTM N08800 Annealed All 520 207 -200 800 P45 128 128 128103 119 115 113 112 111 110 108 107 106 105 103 102 101 97 84 63 46 29 21 19 9 7 6B515 N08810 Annealed All 450 170 -200 800 P45 112 112 105100 93 90 85 84 82 81 74 77 75 74 73 72 70 70 69 68 58 48 37 33 23 23 19

Nickel-iron-chromium-

molyb-denum-copper

ASTM N08825 Annealed All 586 241 -200 525 P45 146 146 146141 133 127 123 122 121 119 118 118 117 116 115 114 — — — — — — — — — — —B 163ASTM N08825 CD/Ann All 586 241 -200 525 P45 146 146 146141 133 127 123 122 121 119 118 118 117 116 115 114 — — — — — — — — — — —B 423

Nickel- ASTMchromium B 444

molyb-denum-

columbium

N06625 Annealed All 827 414 -200 600 P43 207 207 207207 194 188 183 181 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 171 145 91 — — — — — — — —

Nickel-iron- ASTM N08330 Annealed All 485 205 -200 425 P46 103 103 102 96 90 86 82 81 79 78 77 76 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —chromium- B 353

silicone

Nickel-molyb-denum

ASTM N10001 Sol/Ann All 690 315 -200 425 P44 172 172172172 170 164 160 159 157 155 154 152 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —B 619 N10665 Sol/Ann All 758 352 -200 425 P44 190 190 190190 190 190 188 187 185 183 174 176 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —ASTM N10001 Sol/Ann All 690 315 -200 425 P44 172 172 172172 170 164 160 159 157 155 154 152 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —B 622 N10665 Sol/Ann All 758 352 -200 425 P44 190 190 190190 190 190 188 187 185 183 174 176 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —ASTM N10007 Sol/Ann All 690 315 -200 425 P44 172 172 172172 170 164 160 159 157 155 154 152 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —B 626 N10665 Sol/Ann All 758 352 -200 425 P44 190 190 190190 190 190 188 187 185 183 174 176 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


AS 4041—1998 176


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37




mm MPaMPa MPa 50 100150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750 775 800


temperature o


o

No.

c

R Rm e Min. Max.

o

COPYRIGHT

Low ASTM N06455 Sol/Ann All 690 276 -200 425 P44 172 172 169159 150 145 140 138 136 135 133 132 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —carbon B 619 N10276 Sol/Ann All 690 283 -200 525 P44 172 172 172159 146 140 132 128 125 123 120 118 116 115 114 114 — — — — — — — — — — —nickel- ASTM N06455 Sol/Ann All 690 276 -200 425 P44 172 172 169159 150 145 140 138 136 135 133 132 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —molyb- B 622 N10276 Sol/Ann All 690 283 -200 525 P44 172 172 172159 146 140 132 128 125 123 120 118 116 115 114 114 — — — — — — — — — — —denum- ASTM N06455 Sol/Ann All 690 276 -200 425 P44 172 172 169159 150 145 140 138 136 135 133 132 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

chromium B 626 N10276 Sol/Ann All 690 283 -200 425 P44 172 172 172159 146 140 132 128 125 123 120 118 116 115 114 114 — — — — — — — — — — —

Nickel- ASTM N06002 Sol/Ann All 690 276 -200 575 P43 159 159 144140 122 115 109 107 105 104 102 101 100 100 99 98 98 98 — — — — — — — — —chromium- B 619

molyb- ASTM N06002 Sol/Ann All 690 276 -200 575 P43 159 159 144140 122 115 109 107 105 104 102 101 100 100 99 98 98 98 — — — — — — — — —denum- B 626

iron

* f (max.) as used in Clause 3.11.7.c

Abbreviations:

Sol/Ann = Solution—annealedCD/Ann = Cold drawn—annealedStr Rel = Stress-relieved.

177 AS 4041—1998

TABLE D10

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—TITANIUM AND TITANIUM ALLOY PIPE—AMERICAN SOURCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Materialtype

StandardNo.

GradeProcess

ofmanufacture


roomtemperature,

20°C

Designtemperature,

°C

Basemetal

group,P

No.

fe(max.)*

Design tensile strength,f, MPa


Rm

MPa

Re

MPaMin. Max. MPa 50 100 150 200 250 300 325

Titanium ASTMB 337

ASTMB 338

1

2

3

1

2

3

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

240

345

450

240

345

450

170

275

380

170

275

380

−60

−60

−60

−60

−60

−60

325

325

325

325

325

325

P51

P51

P52

P51

P51

P52

80

115

150

80

115

150

81

115

150

81

115

150

66

112

128

66

112

128

53

85

107

53

85

107

44

68

85

44

68

85

38

57

71

38

57

71

32

52

60

32

52

60

28

49

53

28

49

53

Titanium-palladium

ASTMB 337ASTMB 338

7

7

SeamlessWelded

SeamlessWelded

345

345

275

275

−60

−60

325

325

P51

P51

115

115

115

115

112

112

85

85

68

68

57

57

52

52

49

49


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 178

TABLE D11

MATERIAL PROPERTIES, DESIGN PARAMETERS AND TENSILE STRENGTH—IRON CASTINGS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Materialtype

Standard No. Grade

Mechanical properties atroom temperature,

20°C

Minimumdesign

temperaturefe(max.)*

Design tensile strength,f, MPa

Maximum metal temperatures, °C

Rm

MPa

Re

MPa

Specifiedminimumelongation

%

°C MPa 50 100 150 200 250 300 350

Ductile iron (i.e.nodular orspheroidal graphiteiron)

AS/NZS 2280 Pipe fitting 420420

——

105

−30−30

8484

8484

8484

8484

8484

8484

——

——

AS 1831 370-17400-12500-7

370400500

230250320

17127

−30−30−30

12380

100

12380

100

12380

100

12380

100

12380

100

12380

100

123——

123——

Austenitic ductile(see Note)

AS 1833 Si-Ni Mn 13 7S-Ni Cr 20 2S-Ni Cr 20 3

390370390

———

1577

−30−30−30

1307478

1307478

1307478

1307478

1307478

1307478

130——

130——

S-Ni Si Cr 20 5 2S-Ni 22S-Ni-Mn 23 4

370370402

———

102025

−30−30−30

123123133

130123133

130123133

130123133

130123133

130123133

—123133

—123133

S-Ni Cr 30 1S-Ni Cr 30 3S-Ni Si Cr 30 5 5

370370370

———

137

—

−30−30−30

747478

747478

747478

747478

747478

747478

———

———

S-Ni 35S-Ni Cr 35 3

370370

——

207

−30−30

12374

12374

12374

12374

12374

12374

123—

123—

Grey iron

Drafting notechange? SeeKotwal.

AS 1830 T-200T-250T-300T-350T-400

200250300350400

—————

—————

−30−30−30−30−30

1520253035

1520253035

1520253035

1520253035

1520253035

1520253035

Note 1

Whiteheartmalleable iron

AS 1832 W 350-4W 400-5

340360

——

45

−30−30

3436

3436

3436

3436

3436

3436

——

——

Blackheartmalleable iron

AS 1832 B 300-6B 350-10

300350

——

610

−30−30

3035

3035

3035

3035

3035

3035

——

——


NOTE: Values of ‘f’ are based on section thickness of 40 mm, higher values are permissible based on thinner actual as-cast thicknesses.

COPYRIGHT

179 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX E

LINEAR EXPANSION

(Normative)

Table E1 gives the values of the linear expansion for certain materials. Where a material isnot listed, the required value should be obtained from the manufacturer or some otherauthoritative source.

NOTES:

1 These data should not be taken to imply that the materials are suitable for all temperaturesshown.

2 Linear interpolation of values is acceptable.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 180

TABLE E1

LINEAR EXPANSION

Material type

Linear thermal expansion for metal from 20°C to temperature indicated, mm/m

Terminal temperature, °C

−200 −150 −100 −50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850

Carbon, carbon-molybdenum, and lowCr-Mo steel (≤3 Cr)

−1.97 −1.68 −1.18 −0.72 −0.21 0.34 0.93 1.55 2.21 2.89 3.61 4.35 5.13 5.94 6.78 7.65 8.55 9.48 10.45 17.44

Intermediate Cr-Mo steel (>5 to≤9 Cr) −1.84 −1.58 −1.12 −0.68 −0.20 −0.32 −0.88 1.45 2.05 2.67 3.32 3.98 4.67 5.38 6.12 6.87 7.65 8.45 9.28 18.12

High chromium steel (≥12 Cr) −1.68 −1.36 −1.00 −0.61 −0.18 0.30 0.81 1.34 1.89 2.46 3.06 3.67 4.38 4.96 5.63 6.33 7.84 7.78 8.54 9.31

Austenitic stainless steel (18-8 series) −3.23 −2.56 −1.85 −1.10 −0.32 0.50 1.34 2.21 3.09 4.00 4.92 5.86 6.82 7.80 8.80 9.81 10.85 11.90 12.98 14.07 15.18 16.31

Austenitic stainless steel (25-50 type) −2.51 −2.01 −1.47 −0.89 −0.26 0.42 1.12 1.85 2.61 3.38 4.17 4.98 5.82 6.68 7.55 8.45 9.37 10.31 11.27 12.25

31/2 nickel steel −1.89 −1.59 −1.21 −0.76 −0.23 0.33 0.90 1.50 2.13 2.79 3.48 4.19 4.94 5.71 6.51 7.34 8.20 9.08

9% nickel steel −2.11 −1.67 −1.28 −0.72 −0.21 0.33 0.90 1.50 2.13 2.79 3.47 4.19 4.93 5.70 6.50 7.33

Grey cast iron −1 0.31 0.83 1.39 1.97

18 Cr-37 nickel iron alloy 2.03 2.84 3.67 4.52 5.39 6.27 7.18 8.10 9.04 10.90 10.98 11.98 12.99 14.03 15.08

Aluminium −3.91 −3.18 −2.36 −1.44 −0.43 0.67 1.84 3.08 4.39

Copper −3.41 −2.67 −1.91 −1.13 −0.33 0.50 1.34 2.20 3.08

Brass −3.21 −2.54 −1.83 −1.09 −0.32 0.52 1.41 2.34 3.31

Bronze −3.30 −2.61 −1.88 −1.12 −0.33 0.53 1.43 2.35 3.30 4.27

Copper nickel alloy(70 Cu-30 Ni)

−2.63 −2.14 −1.58 −0.97 −0.29 0.44 1.21 2.03 2.91

Nickel-copper alloy(67 Ni-30 Cu)

−2.18 −1.85 −1.42 −0.89 −0.77 0.41 1.12 1.87 2.65 3.47 4.32 5.21 6.13 7.09 8.08

COPYRIGHT

181 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX F

YOUNG MODULUS

(Normative)

Table F1 gives the values of the Young modulus for certain materials. Where a material isnot listed, the required value should be obtained from the manufacturer or some otherauthoritative source.

NOTES:

1 These data should not be taken to imply that the materials are suitable for all temperaturesshown.

2 Linear interpolation of values is acceptable.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 182

TABLE F1

YOUNG MODULUS

Material type

Young modulus, (E) for metal temperature below that indicated, 10−5 MPa

Reference temperature, °C

−200 −150 −100 −50 0 20 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

Carbon and carbon-molybdenum steel (≤0.3 C) 2.07 2.04 2.02 1.98 1.94 1.92 1.91 1.86 1.79 1.66 1.21

Carbon steel (≥0.3 C) 2.14 2.12 2.10 2.09 2.07 2.06 2.03 1.96 1.85 1.69 1.42

Low Cr-Mo steel (<3 Cr) 2.14 2.12 2.10 2.09 2.07 2.06 2.03 1.97 1.90 1.80 1.66 1.37

Intermediate Cr-Mo steel (≥3 <10 Cr) 2.03 1.98 1.95 1.93 1.90 1.89 1.87 1.82 1.76 1.69 1.60 1.50 1.35 1.17

High chromium steel (≥10 Cr) 2.12 2.10 2.07 2.04 2.02 2.01 1.98 1.91 1.81 1.65 1.40 1.05

Austenitic stainless steel (18-8 series and 25-20type)

2.10 2.07 2.04 2.01 1.97 1.95 1.90 1.84 1.76 1.68 1.60 1.51 1.43 1.26

Grey cast iron 0.72 0.91 0.91 0.87 0.82 0.73

Aluminium 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.67 0.60

Copper 1.17 1.16 1.14 1.13 1.11 1.10 1.07 1.04 0.99

Brass 1.03 1.02 1.01 0.99 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.85

Bronze 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.90 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.79

Copper nickel alloy (70 Cu-30 Ni) 1.57 1.57 1.55 1.53 1.51 1.50 1.48 1.45 1.38 1.35

Nickel-copper alloy (67 Ni-30 Cu) 1.85 1.84 1.83 1.81 1.80 1.79 1.79 1.77 1.72 1.52 1.23

COPYRIGHT

183 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX G

DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH FOR FLANGE BOLTING

(Normative)

Table G1 gives the values for the design tensile strength for flange bolting for variousmaterials at given design temperatures.

NOTES TO TABLE G1:

1 D = diameter.

t = thickness.

2 The minimum operating temperature is that for which the material is normally suitable withoutimpact testing other than required in the material specification. For lower temperatures, seeClause 2.11 for necessary impact tests.

3 Stresses at intermediate temperatures may be obtained by linear interpolation.

4 Stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory foraverage service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage over a long period without re-tightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the relativeflexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation properties.

5 Between minimum temperature shown and 200°C, stress values equal to the lower of thefollowing will be permitted: 20 percent of the specified tensile strength, or 25 percent of thespecified minimum yield strength.

6 Materials listed are normally used because of their corrosion resistance.

7 Stresses are permitted for material which has been carbide-solution treated.

8 At temperatures over 525°C, stress values apply only when the carbon is 0.04 percent or higher.

9 For temperatures above 525°C, stress values may be used only if the material has been heattreated at a temperature of 975°C minimum.

10 Austenitic steel bolts for use in pressure joints should not be less than 10 mm diameter.

11 For all design temperatures, the maximum hardness shall be Rockwell C35 immediately underthe thread roots. The hardness shall be taken on a flat area at least 3 mm diameter prepared byremoving threads. No more material than necessary shall be made at the same frequency astensile tests.

12 For temperatures above 525°C, stress values may be used only if the material has been heattreated at a temperature of 1075°C minimum.

13 The maximum operating temperature is arbitrarily set at 250°C, because harder temperadversely affects design strength in the creep-rupture temperature range.

14 Design strengths for the cold-drawn temper is based on hot-rolled properties until required dataon cold drawn are available.

15 Copper-silicone alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain media and hightemperatures, particularly steam above 100°C. The user should verify that the alloy selected issatisfactory for the service for which it is to be used.

16 The stress values given for this material are not applicable when either welding or thermalcutting is employed.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 184

TABLE G1

DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH FOR FLANGE BOLTING

Material

Notes

Min.oper-ating

temp. °C(Note 2)

Design tensile strength, MPa

Type Specific-ation Grade Temper

Dia.or size(mm)

(Note 1)

For design temperatures not exceeding °C (Note 3)

Min.temp.to 50

100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650

CARBONSTEELS

AS/NZS 1110AS B 148AS 2465

4.6Class 2

A,B

AllAllAll

−30 60 60 60 60 50

AS/NZS 1110 5,8 All −30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

AS 2465 All −30 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85

AS/NZS 1110 8,8 All −30 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160

AS 2465AS/NZS 1252

S—

AllAll

−30 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130

LOW ALLOYSTEELS1Cr-0.2Mo

ASTM A 320 L7, L7AL7B, L7C

≤63 4,5 −100 172 172 172 (200° max.)

ASTM A 193 B7≤63

4,5−30 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 163 145 121 93 69 43

3<t≤102 −30 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 153 138 115 92 69 435Cr-1/2Mo ASTM A 193 B5 ≤192 4,5,6 −30 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 129 104 78 59 45 34 26 19 13 8.61Cr−1/2Mo-V ASTM A 193 B16 ≤63

4,5 −30172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 163 147 121 92 61 36

63<t≤102 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 146 131 113 90 61 35

HIGHALLOYSTEELS13Cr

ASTM A 193 B6(410) ≤102 4,6 −30 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 134 107 89

18Cr-8Ni ASTM A 193 B8(304) Soln.Trtd.

All 4,7,89,10,11

−200 129 106 96 88 85 79 78 77 76 75 73 71 70 69 68 67 65 59 53 42

18Cr-8Ni-Ti ASTM A 193 B8T(321) Soln.Trtd.

All 4,7,810,11,

12

−200 129 109 97 89 84 79 77 76 75 75 74 73 73 73 72 68 58 45 34 25

18Cr-9Ni-Nb ASTM A 193 B8C(347) Soln.Trtd.

All 4,7,810,11

−200 129 118 110 104 98 94 92 90 89 88 88 87 87 87 87 84 78 59 42 30

18Cr-12Ni-2Mo

ASTM A 193 B8M(316) Soln.Trtd.

All 4,7,89,10,11

−200 129 110 101 92 87 83 80 79 78 77 76 75 75 74 74 73 72 69 64 51

See start of this Appendix for Notes. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

185 AS 4041—1998

TABLE G1 (continued)

Material

Notes

Min.oper-ating

temp. °C(Note 2)



Dia.or size(mm)

(Note 1)


Min.temp.to 50

75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 450 500 550 600 650

NICKELANDNICKELALLOYSNickel

ASTM B 160

200 Annealed All −200 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26

200 Hotfinished

All −200 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 25 24

200 Colddrawn

All −200 69 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 65 65 64

Low CNickel

ASTM B 160 201 Annealedor hot

finished

All −200 17 17 17 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 15 14 13 11 8

Nickel-Copper

ASTM B 164 400–405 Annealed All −200 43 40 39 37 36 35 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 33

400 Hotfinished

Allexcept

hexagons>54

−200 69 67 66 66 65 64 62 61 59 59 59 59 59 59 58 45

400 Hotfinished

Hexagon>54

−200 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 45 45 45 45 45 44 43 36

405 Hotfinished

Rounds≤76

−200 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 52 52 52 52 51 41

400 CD stressrel

All 13 −200 86 83 82 80 79 78 78 78

400 CD stressequaliz.

Rounds≤90 13 −200 121 118 116 114 112 109 107 107 106

400 CD stressequaliz.

Othersizes,shapes

13 −20095 91 89 88 87 86 86 85 85

405 Colddrawn

All 13 −200 95 91 89 88 87 86 86 85 85

400 Colddrawn

All 13 −200 86 84 82 81 79 78 77 77 77

Nickel-Chromium-Iron

ASTM B 166 600 Annealed All −200 60 57 56 55 54 54 53 53 52 52 52 51 51 50 50 48 47 41 20 14

600 Hotfinished

Rounds>76

Shapes,all sizes

−200 60 59 58 57 56 56 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 54 52 51 50 48 38

See start of this Appendix for Notes. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 186

TABLE G1 (continued)

Material

Notes

Min.oper-ating

temp. °C(Note 2)



Dia.or size(mm)

(Note 1)


Min.temp.to 50

75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 450 500 550 600 650

Nickel-Chromium-Ironcontinued

ASTM B 166continued

600 Hotfinished

Rounds≤76

−200 69 67 65 64 64 63 63 63 63 63 63 62 62 61 61 60 59 56 49 38

600 Colddrawn

All 13,14 −200 69 67 65 64 64 63 63 63 63

Nickel-Moly

ASTM B 335 B Annealed All −200 79 72 69 68 68 68 65 63 62 61 60 58 57 57 57 57

COPPERANDCOPPERALLOYSCopper

AS/NZS 1567102, 110120, 122 O All −200 17 15 14 13 13 11 11

Copper-Silicon

AS/NZS 1567 655 OM

6<D≤706<D≤2020<D≤50

151515

−200 266560

266560

266459

266257

266156

245954

Aluminium-Bronze

AS/NZS 1567 623 < 6<D≤50 −200 55 55 55 55 54 54 53 52 52

ALUMIN-IUM ANDALUMIN-IUMALLOYSA1-4Cu-Mn-Si

ASTM B 211 2014 T63<D≤200 16 −200 90 83 78 70 50 31 21

ASTM B 211 2024 T4 12<D≤110

16 −200 72 70 68 65 54 43 34

A1-4Cu-1.5Mn

AS/NZS 1865 6061 T6 10<D≤150

16 −200 52 Not available

6062 <10 16 −200 58 56 54 51 43 34 24

ASTM B 211 6061 T6 3<D≤200 16 −200 58 56 54 51 43 34 24

6062 T6 welded 3<D≤200 — −200 33 32 31 30 27 24 19

See start of this Appendix for Notes.

COPYRIGHT

187 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX H

LODMAT ISOTHERMS

(Normative)

ISOTHERMS IN DEGREES CELSIUS

LODMAT (lowest one day mean ambient temperature) based on records 1957-1971 suppliedby the Australian Bureau of Meteorology and prepared by the WTIA in February 1975.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 188

APPENDIX I

DETERMINATION OF DESIGN STRENGTH

(Normative)

I1 GENERAL This Appendix sets out the basis for the determination of design strengthof materials specified in this Standard. Design strength is to be taken as the maximumprimary membrane stress, and does not include any allowance for weld joint efficiency, pipeclass factor or casting quality factor. These allowances are provided in the appropriate clausesof this Standard.

This Appendix treats the subject under two major headings:

(a) Design strength for piping Classes 1, 2A and 3.

(b) Design strength for piping Class 2P.

I2 DESIGN STRENGTH FOR PIPING CLASSES 1, 2A and 3

I2.1 General The origins of the basis for determination of design strength are as follows:

(a) For steel . . mainly BS 806—1986, Amendment No. 4 and BS 806, Enquiry Cases.

Table D2 indicates the source for each pipe specification.

(b) For other materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ANSI/ASME B31.3.

The source is indicated in the headings of Tables D6, D7, D8, D9 and D10.

The API 5L X42, X52 values at 50°C are derived fromRm values. The API 5L X42, X52values for temperatures above 150°C, use the Grade B values taken from BS 806.

I2.2 Calculation of design strength The source documents BS 806 andANSI/ASME B31.3 are comprehensive for pipe specifications. The following notes in thisAppendix may be useful for users who need to allocate a design strength to a pipespecification not listed in either BS 806 or ANSI/ASME B31.3.

It is reasonable and convenient to base design strengths directly on the characteristic materialproperties (yield/proof strength or creep strength values), but there are cases where this wouldgive a design strength not justified by previous experience or current understanding ofstructural behaviour. Adjustment has been made in such cases and also where design strengthbased on the simple relationships (factors) would result in an unwarranted variation in anestablished design strength.

Except for low ductility cast irons, design strengths are based on the assumption thatmaterials are ductile and capable of reasonable plastic deformation at stress concentrationsabove the permitted range of service temperatures. This assumption is met for materials listedin Tables D2 to D7 provided fabrication procedures comply with this Standard and do notsignificantly reduce the properties of the material.

I2.3 Notation The notation for material properties is as follows:

Rm = specified minimum tensile strength at room temperature for the grade ofmaterial concerned (tested in accordance with AS 1391 or equivalent)

RmT = tensile strength at a temperatureT for the grade of material

Re = specified minimum yield strength at room temperature for the grade of material(tested in accordance with AS 1391 or equivalent)

Where a material standard specified minimum values ofReL or Rp0.2 (Rp1.0 foraustenitic steels), these values are taken as corresponding toRe

COPYRIGHT

189 AS 4041—1998

ReT = specified minimum value ofRe or Rp0.2 (Rp1.0 for austenitic steels) at atemperatureT for the grade of material (tested in accordance with AS 2291,BS 3920 or equivalent). ThusReT is measured at slow strain rate whileRe ismeasured at high strain rate. At 20°CRe is therefore higher thanReT.

SRt = mean value of the stress required to produce rupture in timet (at temperatureT)for the particular grade of material (tested in accordance with BS 3500 orequivalent)

ScT = mean value of stress at a temperatureT required to produce a creep rate of0.01% in 1000 h

fE = design strength corresponding to the short term tensile strength characteristicsof the material (time-independent)

fF = design strength corresponding to the creep characteristics of the material(time-dependent)

f = design strength, which has been taken as the lesser offE and fF.

These material properties may be obtained from pipe specifications or pipe manufacturers.Design strength for material or product form not listed in Appendix D may be determined byusing this Appendix and Table I1.

I2.4 Design life (see Clause 3.4) Time-dependence of creep and fatigue has beenrecognized by assigning permissible stress levels for different design lifetimes, as follows:

(a) For creep conditions Higher design strengths are permitted for short lifetimes, andlower design strengths are required for very long lifetimes. This is achieved inTable D2 and D5 by listing design strengths for specific lifetimes for those steels whereSRt data are available.

(b) For fatigue conditions The practice of ANSI/ASME B31.3 is followed whereby stressrange reduction factors are applied to design strengths, to cater for the number of stresscycles expected during the design life (see Table 3.11).

I3 DESIGN STRENGTH FOR PIPING CLASS 2P This Standard embraces roomtemperature safe fluids, e.g. water at ambient temperature and provides a Class 2P piping forsuch service.

Industry had used a variety of conventions for selecting wall thickness of steel pipe for suchservice. Two conventions noted for their relatively thin wall are design at 72% of specifiedminimum yield stress modelled on either natural gas and petroleum pipelines to AS 2885 andANSI/ASME B31.8 and design at 80%Re for water mineral slurry piping toANSI/ASME B31.11. A related convention is the optional class in ANSI/ASME B31.3designed on 0.67Re applicable to all metals and suitable for high pressures.

The design strength for Class 2P piping is 0.72 of the normally specified minimum yieldstress (0.72Re). The limits of application of Class 2P piping as follows:

(a) Limited to fluid 4 (Table 1.4).

(b) Limited to application temperatures of 0°C−99°C inclusive.

(c) Limited to carbon and carbon manganese steel pipe up toRm 460 and listed inClause 2.2.

Class 2P piping does not permit cast iron, plastic and non-ferrous pipe nor pipe for elevatedor low temperature application. The design stress for Class 2P piping only applies to pipe.

The design strength for Class 2P piping is not listed in the Tables of Appendix D.

It is noted that for the steels included in piping Class 2P, the design at 0.72Re is inherentlythe lesser of 0.72Re and Rm/1.75 even though this is not a requirement in the source fromwhich Class 2P was derived and it is not a requirement of this Standard.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 190

TABLE I1

DETERMINATION OF DESIGN STRENGTH ( f) (Note 1)

MaterialDesigntemper-ature °C

f (being lesser offE and fF)Design strength (time-independent) (fE) (being

the lowest of A, B, C and D) Design strength (time-dependent) (fF)

A B C D For indefinite designlifetime (Note 2)

For specific designlifetime, of t(hours)

(Note 4)1 Ferritic steels

All ≤50°Re

1.5—

Rm

2.35— — —

All >50<150 Linear interpolation offE between 50 and 150°C — —

ReT specified ortested ≥150 —

ReT

1.5

Rm

2.35—

SR 100 000

1.5

SRt

1.3

ReT not specified ortested ≥150 —

ReT

1.6

Rm

2.35—

SR 100 000

1.5

SRt

1.3

2 Austenitic steels

All ≤50Re

1.5—

Rm

2.35— — —


ReT specified ortested

≥100 —Ret

1.35

(Note 3)

Rm

2.5—

Lesser of:

SR 100 000

1.5and

SCT 0.01 1000h

1.0

SRt

1.3

ReT not specified ortested

≥100 —Ret

1.45

(Note 3)

Rm

2.5—

Lesser of:

SR 100 000

1.5and

SCT 0.01 1000h

1.0

SRt

1.3

3 Ferritic austenitic steels

All ≤50Re

1.5—

Rm

2.35— — —


ReT specified ortested ≥150 —

ReT

1.5

Rm

2.35—

SR 100 000

1.5

SRt

1.3


ReT

1.6

Rm

2.35—

SR 100 000

1.5

SRt

1.3


ReT

1.6

Rm

2.35—

SR 100 000

1.5

SRt

1.3

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

191 AS 4041—1998

TABLE I1 (continued)

MaterialDesigntemper-ature °C

f (being lesser offE and fF)Design strength (time-independent) (fE) (being

the lowest of A, B, C and D) Design strength (time-dependent) (fF)

A B C D For indefinite designlifetime (Note 2)

For specific designlifetime, of t(hours)

(Note 4)4 Non-ferrous metals

AllRe

1.5

ReT

1.5

Rm

3

RmT

3

Lesser of:

SR 100 000

1.5and

ScT 0.01 1000h

1.0

SRt

1.3

5 Iron castings

SME ≥ 15%(Note 6)

All — —Rm

3

RmT

3— —

Ductile ironSME < 15%≥ 7% All — —

Rm

5

RmT

5— —

Grey iron andMalleable iron All — —

Rm

10

RmT

10— —

6 Bolting

AllRe

1.5

ReT

1.5

Rm

4

(Note 5)

RmT

4

Lesser of:

SR 100 000

1.5and

ScT 0.01 1000h

1.0

SRt

1.3

7 Class 2P steel pipe

0 to 99 0.72 Re —Rm

1.75— — —

NOTES:

1 Re, RmT, Rm andRmT are based on standard short-term tensile tests whileSR andSCT are based on long-term tests.

2 Indefinite means the design lifetime is undefined, but should provide a useful life in the range 150 000 h to 200 000h, provided thatthe design metal temperature is not exceeded. This should be used where reliable, time-dependent properties (SRt) are not available.

3 In this instances (austenitic stainless steels) the factors 1.35 and 1.45 apply toReT values based onRp1.0.

For austenitic steels and certain nickel alloys, the value in Column B may be replaced by 0.9ReT. Such increased stress is notrecommended for flanges or gasketed joints, or other applications where slight deformation can cause leakage or malfunction.

4 Where creep deformation is to be limited, an agreed lower value offF may be necessary.

5 Where the strength of bolting has been increased by heat treatment or strain hardening, the value offE shall not exceed the lesser

of exceptfE need not be lower than the value for the annealed condition.Rm

5and

Re

4

6 SME is the specified minimum elongation on gauge length 4√So.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 192

APPENDIX J

DESIGN PRESSURE FOR SAFETY VALVE DISCHARGE PIPING

(Normative)

J1 GENERAL This Appendix gives a method of determining the design pressure for asafety valve discharge piping system.

Pressures calculated from the Equations J2 and J3 should be increased by 25 percent whereused as a design pressure.

J2 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE The absolute pressure (p) in a pipe carrying a compressiblefluid is that calculated by the following equation:

. . . J2where

p = absolute pressure in pipe, in megapascals

r = velocity of fluid in pipe, in metres per second

=

G = mass flow rate per unit area, in kilograms per square metre per second

B = a factor (see Table J1) depending upon the ratio (k) of the specific heats duringthe expansion and upon the ‘friction length’ of the pipe

po = absolute pressure at rest in originating vessel, in megapascals

o = density of fluid in originating vessel, in kilograms per cubic metre.

J3 FRICTION LENGTH The friction length (l f) equals 4fl/d where 4f is the normalfriction coefficient in the incompressible flow equation and the pressure loss is that calculatedby the following equation:

Pressure loss = . . . J3

where

l = length, in metres

d = internal diameter, in metres

v = velocity, in metres per second

That usual allowances for bends and fittings shall be included in determining the resistancethrough any silencer that might be fitted, and the calculation shall take into account theReynolds number,Gd/µ, where µ is the dynamic viscosity (in N.s/m2), and the piperoughness. The friction length shall be measured from the point at which a critical pressurewould develop with the approximate values forG andk.

The value of the critical pressure (pc) is given by Equation J2 using forB the value atl f = 0,and where the ambient pressure (pa) around the outlet of a pipe exceedspc, a lengthl f ′ shallbe added tol f to obtain the value ofB from which to calculate the pressure at any point.

lf ′ is to correspond toBa =

COPYRIGHT

193 AS 4041—1998

J4 EXAMPLE This tabulated example shows calculation of the pressurep1 at theupstream end of a straight pipe of diameter 0.125 m and length 20 m, exhausting steam toatmosphere from a safety valve mounted at a superheater outlet. The absolute pressureis 7 MPa and the steam temperature 500°C, and the maximum quantity delivered by the valveis Case (a), 7 kg/s and Case (b), 1 kg/s.

ItemCase (a),

7 kg/sCase (b),

1 kg/s

r, m/sG, kg/m2/sk

580570

1.3

58081.51.3

pa, MPaBa

l f′ corresponding toBa

0.10.09150. (asBa < Bc)

0.14.4752.342

l f, (4f = 0.016)l f + l f′CorrespondingBp1, MPa

2.5602.5604.7430.72

2.5604.9027.4700.129

J5 PIPE JUNCTIONS The pressure in a small bore pipe discharging into a pipe of largerbore may be calculated from Paragraph J3. The ambient pressure (pa), may be taken as thepressure at the upstream end of the larger pipe, including an allowance for the suddenenlargement. This allowance will be conservative if estimated on the conventional basis offluid incompressibility. A critical pressure may occur at the exit of the small-bore pipe or atany enlargement.

J6 MASS FLOW DISCHARGE OF EXHAUST PIPE For the purposes of exhaust pipedesign, the mass flow discharge,M (kg/s) from a safety valve is that calculated by thefollowing equation:

. . . J6

This mass flow may be higher than the rating of the valve specified.Av is the smallest area,in square metres, available for flow through the valve.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 194

TABLE J1

COMPRESSIBLE FLOW FACTORS

k = 1.000(see Note)

k = 1.100 k = 1.200 k = 1.300 k = 1.400

00.010.02

1.0001.1481.214

0.8661.0101.074

0.7580.8990.961

0.6690.8070.868

0.5950.7890.789

0.030.040.05

1.2651.3101.350

1.1251.1691.208

1.0111.0541.092

0.9170.9590.996

0.8370.8780.915

0.060.070.08

1.3881.4221.455

1.2451.2791.311

1.1281.1621.193

1.0311.0641.095

0.9500.9821.013

0.090.100.12

1.4861.5161.573

1.3421.3711.427

1.2131.2521.307

1.1251.1531.207

1.0421.0701.123

0.140.160.18

1.6261.6771.726

1.4791.5291.577

1.3581.4071.454

1.2581.3061.352

1.1731.2211.266

0.200.300.40

1.7721.9862.179

1.6231.8332.023

1.5001.7071.895

1.3971.6021.787

1.3101.5131.695

0.500.600.70

2.3582.5282.689

2.2002.3672.527

2.0692.2342.393

1.9592.1232.280

1.8662.0282.184

0.800.901.00

2.8462.9983.146

2.6822.8332.979

2.5462.6952.841

2.4322.5802.724

2.3352.4812.624

1.201.401.60

3.4343.7113.982

3.2643.5393.807

3.1233.3963.662

3.0043.2753.539

2.9023.1713.434

1.802.002.5

4.2464.5055.136

4.0694.3264.953

3.9224.1774.800

3.7974.0514.671

3.6913.9434.560

345

5.7496.9378.091

5.5626.7437.891

5.4056.5807.724

5.2726.4437.582

5.1596.3257.461

678

9.22210.3411.44

9.01710.1311.22

8.8469.952

11.05

8.7019.803

10.89

8.5769.676

10.76

91015

12.5313.6118.94

12.3113.3918.71

12.1313.2118.52

11.9813.0518.35

11.8412.9118.20

203040

24.1934.5444.80

23.9434.2844.53

23.7423.0744.31

23.5733.8944.12

23.4233.7343.95

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

195 AS 4041—1998

TABLE J1 (continued)

k = 1.000(see note)

k = 1.100 k = 1.200 k = 1.300 k = 1.400

506070

55.0165.1875.32

54.7364.8975.03

54.5064.5574.79

54.3064.4574.58

54.1364.2874.40

8090

100

85.4595.56

105.7

85.1595.26

105.4

84.9095.00

105.1

84.6994.79

104.9

84.5194.61

104.7

150200300

156.1206.3306.7

155.7206.0306.4

155.5205.7306.1

155.2205.5305.8

155.0205.3305.6

5001 000

507.21 008

506.51 008

506.31 007

506.31 007

506.01 007

NOTE: Or isothermic.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 196

APPENDIX K

TYPICAL FORGED BRANCH FITTINGS

(Normative)

NOTE: The butt-welded connection is illustrated; socket welding or threading is permitted.

COPYRIGHT

197 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX L

REINFORCEMENT OF A BRANCH AND AN OPENING

(Normative)

L1 GENERAL This Appendix sets out a method based on that specified in BS 806 forcalculating the reinforcement required for an opening in a pipe or a branch to a pipe.

Branches shall not be welded to any main at an included angle less than 60° for this method.

This method of branch shall be used if flexibility analysis to Appendix R is chosen.

This method, or the methods in Clauses 3.19.8 and 3.19.9, may be used with flexibilityanalysis to Clause 3.27.

L2 BRANCH CONNECTIONS TO MITRED GUSSETED BENDS Branch connectionsshall be made to segments only if their inside diameters do not exceed 10 percent of thediameter of the main. Branches shall be designed in accordance with Paragraph L3 andParagraph L4. The distance measured from the intersection of the bore of the branch with thatof the main to the centre-line of the nearest mitred joint shall be not less than the greater of:

1.833√(rt)or

. . . L2

where

r = mean radius of the pipe based on the mean thickness, in millimetres

t = mean thickness of the main, in millimetres

d02 = mean inside diameter of the branch, in millimetres

γ = angle between the branch and the main, in degrees

NOTE: The dimensional parameters are illustrated in Figure L1.

L3 REINFORCEMENT AND BRANCH THICKNESS Whenever possible, the form ofthe reinforcement provided shall be by either Item (a) or (b):

(a) When the thickness of the main is not predetermined, by providing main and branchin accordance with Paragraph L5.

(b) When the thickness of the main is predetermined, by providing a branch in accordancewith Paragraph L6.

When reinforcement in accordance with either Item (a) or (b) cannot be provided, othermeans of reinforcement, the use of which has been substantiated by adequate relevant serviceexperience or by experimental or theoretical analysis, shall be agreed between the partiesconcerned.

When branch connections are reinforced in accordance with either Item (a) or (b), the ratioof branch thickness to main thickness shall comply with the following limitation:

. . . L3

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 198

where

D1 = mean outside diameter of the main, in millimetres

D02 = mean outside diameter of the branch, in millimetres

t1 = mean wall thickness of the main, in millimetres

t2 = mean wall thickness of the branch, in millimetres

In no case shall the thickness of the main or branch be less thantf, the minimum calculatedthickness.

It is preferable for main and branch to be of the same material, but in no case shall branchmaterial have an allowable stress of less than 75 percent of that of the material of the main.No credit shall be taken where the branch material has an allowable stress that is greater thanthat of the main.

The minimum branch thicknesstm2, determined from Equation L5(5), assumes the samematerial for branch and main. If the branch is of a material having a lower allowable stressthan the main, then the branch thickness shall be increased in the ratio of allowable stress.

Branches designed in accordance with Paragraph L5 or L6 shall be ‘set-on’ full penetrationwelded, or non-protruding ‘set in’ full penetration welded, or shall be of homogeneousconstruction.

L4 BRANCH SYSTEMS In assessing main and branch thickness in accordance withParagraph L5 and Paragraph L6, it shall be determined whether branches effect each otherby calculation of—

. . . L4

where

L = distance between perpendiculars projected from the openings of adjacentbranches to the centre-line of the main, in millimetres (see Figure L2);

d02m d02n = inside diameters of the branches under consideration, in millimetres. Thesubscripts m and n represent the branch suffixes a, b and c, etc. (SeeFigure L2.)

Branches shall be considered to affect each other if the value calculated from expression L4is less than one; they shall be considered not to affect each other if the value is greater thanor equal to one.

In calculating the thickness required, each branch shall be considered in turn together withall the branches by which it is affected (see Figure L2 for typical examples).

L5 REINFORCEMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH L3(a)

L5.1 Branch not affected by any other branch The minimum thicknesses of the branchtm2, in millimetres and the maintm1, in millimetres shall be determined from Equations L5(1)and L5(3) or L5(2) and L5(4).

. . . L5(1)

or

. . . L5(2)

COPYRIGHT

199 AS 4041—1998

. . .L5(3)

or

. . . L5(4)

where

p = design pressure, in newtons per millimetre squared

D1 = mean outside diameter of the main, in millimetres

D2 = mean outside diameter of the branch multiplied by 1/sinγ, whereγ is the anglebetween the branch and the main (in degrees), in millimetres

d1 = mean inside diameter of the main, in millimetres

d2 = mean inside diameter of the branch multiplied by 1/sinγ, in millimetres

f1 = allowable design stress of the main, in newtons per millimetres squared

f2 = allowable design stress of the branch, in newtons per millimetre squared, butnot greater thanf1

e1 = joint efficiency factor particular to the main

x = factor from Figure L3 read againstd2/d1

Whered2/d1 does not exceed 0.3; thex value derived from Figure L3 shall be usedonly to determine main thickness, and the branch thickness shall be determined byusing anx factor of 1.0.

NOTES:

1 The minimum calculated branch thicknesses are a function of the branch inside or outsidediameter used in the calculation according to the equation used. If availability requires that thebranch inside or outside diameter be increased above the value used in the calculation, thentm2

has to be recalculated.

2 The values oftm1 and tm2 are minimum thicknesses and further provision has to be made forminus tolerance.

L5.2 A branch affected by one or more other branches The thickness of the main shallbe determined from Equations L5(3) or L5(4), using thex factor applicable to the largestd2

of the group.

NOTE: Whered2/d1 ratio exceeds 0.8, in order to limit iteration it is suggested that the mainthickness obtained from Equation L5(3) or L5(4) be multiplied by the factor 1.25d2/d1.

The thickness of each branch shall be obtained from Equation L5(5), except that whered2/d1

≤ 0.3 and the mean diameter of the branch (d2 + tf) complies with the limitation of inequality(L5(8)), the branch minimum thicknesstm2 shall betf, the minimum calculated thickness (seeClause 3.14.3):

. . . L5(5)

where

. . . L5(6)

in which . . . L5(7)

d2 + tf ≤ hδ . . . L5(8)

in which δ = (2ta (d1 + ta))1/2 or (2ta (D1 − ta))

1/2 . . . L5(9)

Z is read from curve Figure L4 by entering atxa and reading from the appropriated2/d1 line

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 200

xa is as defined in Equation L5(12)

n = g1g2g3 for each group of branches considered (see Equation L5(10))

ta is the actual minimum thickness of the main at its junction with a branch, i.e.minimum measured thickness where pipe is available, or ordered thickness lesstube maker’s tolerance, in millimetres

h is read from curve Figure L5 by entering atZn

g1 = 1 − C1(1 − Y) . . . L5(10)

g2 = 1 − C2(1 − Y)

g3 = 1 − C3(1 − Y)

Y = . . . L5(11)

whered1, f1 ande1 are in accordance with Paragraph L5.1

C1, C2, C3 are functions of the distances between the branch being considered and the branchor branches affecting that branch (theC value is obtained from Table L1).

L = distance between projections of branch inside diameters,d2m andd2n, where thesubscripts m and n represent the branch designations under consideration (seeFigures L2(b) to L2(d),

xa = . . . L5(12)

J = 2.2 except whered2/d1 ≤ 0.3, whenJ = 2.5

Y is as calculated from Equation L5(11)

Wherexa is less than 2.5, the main thickness,ta is inadequate and shall be increased.

TABLE L1

FACTOR C

C (see note)

1 or greater0.90.8

00.100.34

0.70.60.5

0.660.800.90

0.40.30.2

0.940.970.98

0.10

0.991

NOTE: Intermediate values may be obtained by linearinterpolation.

COPYRIGHT

201 AS 4041—1998

L6 REINFORCEMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH L3(b) (branchreinforcement when the thickness of the main is predetermined)

L6.1 Branch not affected by any other branch The branch thickness shall be determinedfrom Equation L5(5) or inequality L5(8) (see Paragraph L5.2) in conjunction withEquation L5(12), using a value ofn = 1 for these equations.

L6.2 Branch affected by one or more other branches All branch thicknesses shall bedetermined from Equation L5(5) or inequality L5(8) in conjunction with Equations L5(10),L5(11) and L5(12).

L7 LENGTH OF BRANCH REINFORCEMENT The additional thickness of the branchdetermined from Equations L5(1), L5(2) and L5(5) for reinforcement shall extend for adistance not less than (D02tm2)

1/2 measured from the outside diameter of the main along thecentre-line of the branch (see Figure L2).

L8 MAINS (See Figure L2) The additional thickness of a main for branch reinforcementshall, in the case of a branch not affected by any other branch, extend on each side of thebranch for a distance that is not less than the inside diameter of the branch (d2). The distanceshall be measured from the periphery of the branch inside diameter.

Where the branch is affected by one or more other branches, the main reinforcement distanceshall be as shown in Figure L2.

FIGURE L1 DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS FOR BRANCH CONNECTIONSTO MITRED GUSSETED BENDS

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 202

FIGURE L2 (in part) TYPICAL BRANCH

COPYRIGHT

203 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE L2 (in part) TYPICAL BRANCH

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 204

FIGURE L3 REINFORCEMENTOF BRANCH PIPES (x: f1/p)

COPYRIGHT

205 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE L4 REINFORCEMENT OF BRANCH PIPES (xa: Z)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 206

FIGURE L5 REINFORCEMENT OF BRANCH PIPES (h: Zn)

COPYRIGHT

207 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX M

TYPICAL BRANCH WELDS

(Normative)

This Appendix shows typical weld preparations and the assembly of set-on and set-inbranches where an arc welding process is used.

The details of preparation and assembly are typical and are applicable to ferritic andaustenitic steel. Discretion is needed in applying the maximum and minimum dimensionsgiven, as these depend on the welding procedure, but the gap between a set-in branch pipeand the main pipe shall not exceed 3 mm.

NOTE: Gaps greater than 3 mm increase the tendency for spontaneous cracking during welding,particularly for joints with thick sections.

The minimum preparation angle should apply with a maximum radius or gap and, conversely, theminimum radius or gap should apply with a maximum preparation angle.

On Class 1 piping fillet-welds attaching branches or reinforcement to the main pipe shall have toeswith an included angle of not less than 135° (see Figure M8).

FIGURE M1 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-ON 90-DEGREEBRANCHES WITHOUT BACKING

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 208

FIGURE M2 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-ON SLOPINGBRANCHES WITHOUT BACKING

COPYRIGHT

209 AS 4041—1998

NOTES:

1 Root run in each corner in all cases. The backing ring to be removed after welding.

2 In some cases a recessed backing ring may be required.

3 A collapsible copper backing bar may be used as an alternative to a backing ring.

FIGURE M3 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-ON 90°BRANCHES WITH TEMPORARY BACKING

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 210

NOTES:

1 Root run in each corner in all cases. The backing ring to be removed after welding.

2 A recessed backing ring may be necessary in some cases.

3 A collapsible copper backing bar may be used as an alternative to a backing ring.

FIGURE M4 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-ON SLOPINGBRANCHES WITH TEMPORARY BACKING

COPYRIGHT

211 AS 4041—1998

NOTE: This Figure shows branches where access from the inside of the pipe is available. Where access is notavailable, full penetration welds from the outside are acceptable with variation to suit the weld procedure.

FIGURE M5 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-IN BRANCHES

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 212

FIGURE M6 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-IN 90°BRANCHES SUITABLE FOR CLASS 3 PIPING

COPYRIGHT

213 AS 4041—1998

NOTE: Root run in each corner in all cases. For Classes 1 and 2, the backing is ring is removed after welding,but it may be left in position for Class 3.


FIGURE M7 TYPICAL PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF SET-ON 90°BRANCHES SUITABLE FOR CLASS 1 AND 2 PIPING

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 214

NOTE: If the weld makes an angleα less than 135° at either toe, the weld is to blend with a minimum radiusof 5 mm.

FIGURE M8 WELD TOE DETAIL AT BRANCHES

COPYRIGHT

215 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX N

WELD DETAILS

(Normative)

NOTES:

1 For these welds the misalignment shall comply with the requirements of AS 4458 and Figure N2.

2 30° = 1 in 220° = 1 in 314° = 1 in 4

FIGURE N1 WELD PREPARATION FOR BUTT WELDS IN PIPESOF DIFFERENT THICKNESS

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 216

NOTES:

1 The combined internal and external transition of thickness shall not exceed an included angle of 30° at anypoint within 1.5tn of the land.

2 For these welds the misalignment shall comply with the requirements of AS 4458.

FIGURE N2 TYPICAL BUTT-WELD ALIGNMENT TOLERANCESAND ACCEPTABLE SLOPES FOR UNEQUAL INTERNAL

DIAMETER AND OUTSIDE DIAMETER

COPYRIGHT

217 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE N3 (in part) TYPICAL WELD DETAILS FOR CLASS 3 PIPINGIN LOW HAZARD SERVICE (SEE CLAUSE 3.24.2.6)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 218


COPYRIGHT

219 AS 4041—1998


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 220


NOTE: The root face may be zero when the interrupted arc technique is used for the root run or where suchprocedure qualification has been established.

FIGURE N4 BUTT JOINT PREPARATIONS FOR METAL-ARC WELDING(WITHOUT BACKING RING)


FIGURE N5 BUTT JOINT PREPARATIONS FOR MANUAL GTAW-WELDING(WITH OR WITHOUT FILLER WIRE)

COPYRIGHT

221 AS 4041—1998

millimetres

TIG-welded root runsRoot gap G

Figure (a) Figure (b) Figure (c)

Without insert of filler wire Nil Nil —

Using filler wire 1 to 3 1 to 3 1.5 to 3

Using fusible insert To suit type and make of fusible insert used


FIGURE N6 BUTT JOINT PREPARATIONS FOR GTAW-WELDING OF ROOT RUN(WITH OR WITHOUT FILLER WIRE OR WITH FUSIBLE INSERT)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 222


FIGURE N7 BUTT JOINT PREPARATIONS FOR OXY-ACETYLENEWELDING OF ROOT RUN

COPYRIGHT

223 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX O

FILLET-WELDED SOCKETS

(Normative)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 224

APPENDIX P

SLEEVE JOINT

(Normative)

NOTES

1 Sleeve to be centred over gap.

2 Ls shall be 6tn minimum but it is recommendedLs be not less than twice the depth of equivalent socket.

COPYRIGHT

225 AS 4041—1998

APPENDIX Q

NOTES ON PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS

(Normative)

Q1 METHODS OF FLEXIBILITY ANALYSIS—SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS Of themany simplifying assumptions made in flexibility analysis, one of the most common is thatof ‘square corners’, where the flexibility factor and geometry of curved members are ignored.This assumption enables the piping system to be analysed by normal structural methods. Themaximum stress will in general be overestimated or underestimated, depending on whetherthe stress intensification factors are included or ignored. End reactions will almost always beoverestimated by the assumption of square corners.

Another simplified method, which tends to be considerably more accurate than the above,corrects the square corner length of the system by adding a virtual length representing theexcess flexibility of all the elbows, and distributing it uniformly over the system. These twosimplified methods are typical of the many that have been developed, mainly for use withsimple single plane systems. Visual comparison with a similar configuration which has beenanalysed may also be considered a simplified method.

Q2 COLD-SPRING Cold-spring (or cold-pull) is a procedure which uses a reduced lengthof the piping system by an amount up to 100 percent of the calculated expansion in threecoordinate directions (including thermal movements of terminal points).

The intention of this is to reduce the piping terminal reactions, flexural stresses and distortionin operating conditions.

When cold-spring is used, a pipe system shall be erected initially with a space insertedbetween the pipe ends at a selected joint (the final joint to be made). This spacer separatesthe pipe ends by the calculated components of cold spring for the system. After thecompletion of all joints, excluding the final joint, the spacer is removed and the pipe endsare brought together. In principal this must be done without permitting rotation of one pipeend relative to the other in any plane. The pipe end rotations can be controlled (with varyingdegrees of success) by the application of moments to the pipe ends or the application ofcontrolled displacements at selected points of the pipe system. The measurement ofparallelism between the planes prior to closing the gap is critical and shall be performedwithin very close tolerances.

Before deciding to use cold-spring, designers should consider the following points:

(a) The ideal of zero relative rotation of pipe ends cannot be achieved. Rotationalmisalignments will occur and these will cause stresses and reactions of unknownmagnitude. It is possible for errors (which are too small to measure) to create stressesand end reactions which exceed allowable values.

(b) Piping expansion stresses are self-limiting. Self-springing (refer to Q3.1) will limit themagnitude of the stresses in both the hot and cold condition.

(c) Piping operating in the creep range and erected without cold-spring will approach astress condition equivalent to 100 percent cold-spring in a relatively short time.

(d) For piping operating at moderate temperatures, cold-spring can be used to reduce themagnitude of terminal reactions on plant but it should be applied with caution.

(e) Procedures for the application of cold-spring add significant time to a constructionprogram, often without achieving the intended results.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 226

In general, cold-spring should be used only in single plane piping systems and a momentshould be applied during the cold-springing to ensure that no rotation occurs between theclosing ends of the pipe. It is found that cold-springing of a multi-planed pipe is not possiblein practice without considerable difficulties during erection. An attempt to impose thenecessary moment and forces with a sufficient degree of accuracy is unlikely to becompletely successful and for this reason the factor of two-thirds is used inEquation 3.27.6(1).

Q3 STRESSES AND REACTIONS IN A PIPING SYSTEM

Q3.1 Thermal and sustained stressesThermal stresses in piping systems are essentiallycyclic and the initial hot stresses, if they are of sufficient magnitude, will decrease with timebecause of plastic strains and will reappear as a stress of reversed direction when the pipecools. This phenomenon forms the basic difference between thermal stresses and pressure orweight stresses. Plastic strains can release the magnitude of thermal stresses by a change inthe shape of the pipe centreline. This change in shape has no effect on the sustained pressureor weight stresses. For this reason, sustained stresses are limited to the design stress atmaximum normal operating temperature. The phenomenon is called ‘self-springing’ of thepipe and is similar in its effect to cold-springing. The degree of self-springing will dependon the magnitude of the initial hot stresses and the temperature, so that, whereas the hotstress will in general decrease with time, the sum of the hot and cold stresses will stay aboutthe same. This sum is called the displacement (or expansion) stress range and is, therefore,independent of any cold-spring applied during erection, and no credit for cold-spring is givenin the evaluation of the displacement stress range. The concept of a constant displacementstress range leads to the selection of an allowable displacement stress range, i.e. the designstress range (fa). Since, in general, when self-springing has taken place, maximum stresseswill occur in the cold condition, the calculation of the displacement stress range is based onthe as-installed Young modulus.

Q3.2 Resultant stress range and stress differenceFor materials below the creep rangethe allowable stresses are 62.5 percent to 66.7 percent of the yield stress, so that a reasonablyconservative estimate of the bending stress at which plastic flow starts at an elevatedtemperature is 1.6fh, and by similar reasoning 1.6fc will be the stress at which flow wouldtake place at the minimum temperature. Hence, the sum of these stresses represents themaximum stress range to which a system could be subjected without flow occurring in eitherthe hot condition or the cold condition, i.e.

fmax = 1.6(fc + fh) . . . Q3.2(1)

wherefc and fh are as defined in Clause 3.11.7.

However, this Standard limits the stress range to 78 percent of the yield stress; therefore thetotal stress range is as shown in the following equation:

fa = 1.25F(fc + fh) . . . Q3.2(2)

whereF is a reduction factor for cyclic conditions.

From this total stress range, 0.5fh is deducted for pressure stresses and 0.5fh for weight andother sustained stresses, leaving a stress range for thermal expansion as shown in thefollowing equation:

fa = F(1.25fc + 0.25fh) . . . Q3.2(3)

Q3.3 End reactions Although the sum of the hot and the cold stresses is used as thecriterion for piping failure, it is the maximum hot and cold reactions which shall beconsidered when their effect on connected equipment is being examined.

COPYRIGHT

227 AS 4041—1998

The expressions forRm andRa in Clause 3.27.6.2 take into account any cold-spring and areapproximately equal to the maximum hot and cold values to be used where expansion effectson pumps, compressors, turbines and similar equipment which could be damaged by a singleoverload are being considered.

For critical layouts, where unequal amounts of cold-spring are used in each of the coordinatedirections, separate calculations should be made for the hot and cold conditions usingtwo-thirds of the cold-spring amounts to be stipulated on the piping system.

Q4 PLASTIC STRAINS Plastic strains are caused during the relaxation of the initial hotexpansion stresses, and may be reduced by cold-spring. With ductile materials and normalconfigurations of the piping, these plastic strains are not important and usually need not beconsidered. Service conditions and special configurations may in some cases cause excessiveplastic strains, e.g. in systems involving pipes of different diameter or wall thickness, whereplastic straining of the weaker section may be followed by further strain due to the releaseof elastic forces in the stronger section. Plastic strains can be of importance in certainmaterials, in particular in certain austenitic stainless steels at temperatures of about 600°Cand higher, because of the limited capacity of the material to withstand them withoutstress-to-rupture failures.

It is recommended that 100 percent cold-spring be incorporated in austenitic piping systemsoperating above 400°C and the displacement stress range be reduced to 1.25fc to avoid plasticself-springing, susceptibility to plastic flow accumulation, and failure at stress concentrationsdue to fatigue or stress.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 228

APPENDIX R

METHOD OF ASSESSING FLEXIBILITY

(Normative)

R1 GENERAL This Appendix gives details of one comprehensive method of assessingflexibility of piping systems, and is based on the method given in BS 806. Data for shorterlives than given in Tables R10(B) to (G) should be obtained from relevant materialspecifications.

This method is recommended where a comprehensive analysis is required, and where the pipematerials used comply with an Australian or a British Standard. The method is appropriatewhere fatigue and seismic loads are of minor significance. Clause 3.27 gives an alternativemethod that is appropriate where fatigue and seismic loads are significant.

The design strengths given in Appendix D may be used without verification of theReT values,provided that the heat treatment of completed pipes is in accordance with Table R10(H).

If this method of flexibility analysis is chosen, then the branch design shall satisfyAppendix L.

Computer programs which carry out flexibility analysis to BS 806, including flexibility andstress intensification factors but with design strengths to this Standard, also satisfy thisStandard.

R2 CALCULATION OF STRESS LEVELS

R2.1 General In the calculation of stress levels, the following items shall be included (seeTable R2.1):

(a) Pressure stress.

(b) Thermal expansion and cold spring.

(c) Deadweight stress.

(d) Stress caused by external loads.

A worked example of a stress calculation of a typical sectionalized piping system is givenin Appendix S.

TABLE R2.1

ALLOCATION OF LOADS

Loading Stress range Hot stress Sustained stress

PressureThermal

DeadweightCold-spring

XX——

XXXX

X—X—

R2.2 Maximum stress range The maximum stress range shall be determined as follows:

(a) Combined stress In the calculation of the combined stresses to determine themaximum stress range, all expansion between cold and hot shall be used in thecalculation of the bending stress, and the Young modulus for the as-installed conditionshall apply.

COPYRIGHT

229 AS 4041—1998

(b) Sectionalized piping systemWhere a piping system can be sectionalized so that anypoint can be subject to fluctuating temperatures, i.e. other than an ‘all hot’ or ‘all cold’condition, the following shall apply. In addition to calculating the stress range asspecified in Item (a), the maximum stress range based on the maximum differencebetween bending moments, in each plane at that point, when combined with the highestpressure stress associated with these moments, shall not exceed the product of 0.9multiplied by the 0.2 percent proof stress at the temperature at each end of theapplicable cycle. The Young modulus for the lowest temperature shall apply.

R2.3 Maximum hot stress The maximum hot stress shall be determined as follows:

(a) Combined stress In the calculation of the combined stress to determine the maximumhot stress, the displacement between the hot condition and the cold condition minus theamount calculated for the theoretical cold-pull shall be used in the calculation of thebending stress. The Young modulus at the hot condition shall apply.

(b) Sectionalized piping systemWhere a piping system can be sectionalized so that anypoint can be subject to fluctuating temperatures, i.e. other than ‘all hot’ or ‘all cold’conditions, then the higher value of the maximum moment, or the maximum differencebetween the maximum moment and one half the minimum moment in any plane undereach hot condition of operation, shall be considered in addition to that calculated fromItem (a). The Young modulus at the hot condition shall apply.

R2.4 Sustained stress The sustained stress (see Paragraph R7(c)) is that produced bypressure and deadweight only.

For the determination of sustained stress, only the bending stress derived fromEquations R4.2(2), R4.3(2) and R4.3(3) and the torsional stress derived from Equation R4.4,and attributable to the deadweight bending moment, shall be used.

R3 ANALYSIS CALCULATION Wherever possible, a piping system shall be treated asa whole with its anchor points. The analysis of flexibility of a piping system shall includethe following:

(a) Linear and rotational restraining forces.

(b) Linear and rotational behaviour of the equipment to which the piping is connected.

(c) Flexibility factors for bends, determined from Figures R1 and R2.

(d) Longitudinal stress factors for bends, determined from Figures R3, R4 and R8.

(e) Transverse stress factors for bends, determined from Figures R5, R6 and R8.

(f) Stress intensification correction factors for a flanged bend, other than a mitre bend,determined from Figure R7.

(g) Stress factors for forged tees, un-reinforced branches and reinforced branches,determined from Figure R10.

(h) Pressure/stress multipliers for use with branch connections, determined from Figure R9.

(i) Changes in length due to temperature changes, determined from Appendix E.

(j) Young modulus, determined from Appendix F.

(k) Poisson ratio, determined from Clause 3.27.4.

(l) Effects of pipe on equipment to which it is connected, with a sign convention for theforces and moments imposed on the equipment.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 230

(m) Pipe wall thickness and diameter used in a flexibility analysis shall be the meanthickness based on the thickness tolerances detailed in the relevant pipe specificationand the nominal outside diameter, or the inside diameter which shall be the nominaloutside diameter minus twice the mean wall thickness.

(n) Where it is necessary to make assumptions to simplify and reduce the complexity ofthe flexibility analysis, the particulars of these assumptions shall be recorded.

(o) The basis of the calculation shall be recorded as follows:

(i) Whether the dead weight has been taken into account.

(ii) Whether the basis is on expansion alone, or cold pull alone.

(iii) How allowances that have been included take into account the variations of anycold-pull, tolerances on pipe dimensions, movement of pipe supports, theconfiguration of the system, and other relevant factors.

R4 STRESS EVALUATION ON STRAIGHT PIPE AND A BEND

R4.1 Combined stress The combined stress (fc) on a straight pipe and a bend, other thana mitre bend, shall be determined from the following equation:

fc = (F2 + 4fs2)1/2 . . . R4.1

where

fc = combined stress, in megapascals

F = the greater offT and fL, in megapascals

fs = torsional stress, in megapascals

fT = transverse stress (i.e. the sum of transverse pressure stress and transverse bendingstress), in megapascals

fL = longitudinal stress (i.e. the sum of longitudinal pressure stress and longitudinalbending stress), in megapascals.

R4.2 Transverse stress The transverse stress (fT) shall be determined as follows:

(a) The transverse pressure stress(fTp) in a straight pipe or a bend, other than a mitre bend,shall be determined from the following equation:

. . . R4.2(1)

where

fTp = transverse pressure stress, in megapascals



t = mean thickness, in millimetres.

(b) The transverse bending stress(fTB) on straight pipe shall be taken as zero.

(c) The transverse bending stress(fTB) at a bend, other than mitre bend, shall bedetermined from moments as shown in Figure 3.27.5(B) and from the followingequation:

. . . R4.2(2)

COPYRIGHT

231 AS 4041—1998

where

fTB = transverse bending stress, in megapascals

r = mean radius of the pipe, in millimetres

I = second moment of area about the axis through the centroid normal tothe axis of the pipe, in millimetres to the fourth power

Mi = maximum in-plane bending moment, in newton millimetres

FTi = in-plane transverse stress intensification factor determined fromFigure R5

Mo = maximum out-of-plane bending moment, in newton millimetres

FTo = out-of-plane transverse stress intensification factor determined fromFigure R6.

R4.3 Longitudinal stress The longitudinal stress (fL) shall be determined as follows:

(a) The longitudinal pressure stress(fLp) on both a straight pipe and a bend shall bedetermined from the following equation:

. . . R4.3(1)

(b) The longitudinal bending stress(fLB) on a straight pipe shall be determined from thefollowing equation:

. . . R4.3(2)

(c) The longitudinal bending stress(fLB) on a bend shall be determined from the followingequation:

. . . R4.3(3)

where

FLi = in-plane longitudinal stress intensification factor taken from Figure R3

FLo = out-of-plane longitudinal stress intensification factor taken fromFigure R4

Other symbols are as given in Paragraph R4.2.

R4.4 Torsional stress The torsional stress (fs) on a straight pipe or a bend shall bedetermined from the following equation:

. . . R4.4

where

Mt = torsional moment, in newton millimetres.

Other symbols are defined in Paragraph R4.2.

R5 STRESS EVALUATION OF A MITRE BEND

R5.1 Combined stress The combined stress (fc) on a mitre bend shall be determined fromEquation R4.1.

NOTE: For a mitre bend designed to comply with this Standard,fT must be greater thanfL.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 232

R5.2 Transverse stress The transverse stress (fT) shall be determined as follows:

(a) The transverse pressure stress (fTp) on a mitre bend shall be determined from thefollowing equation:

. . . R5.2

where

fTp = transverse pressure stress, in megapascals



t = mean thickness, in millimetres

a = angle of mitre, in degrees.

(b) The transverse bending stress (fTB) on a mitre bend shall be determined fromEquation R4.2(2).

R5.3 Longitudinal stress The longitudinal stress (fL) shall be determined as follows:

(a) The longitudinal pressure stress (fLp) on a mitre bend shall be determined fromEquation R4.3(1).

(b) Longitudinal bending stress (fLB) on a mitre bend shall be determined fromEquation R4.3(3).

R5.4 Torsional stress The torsional stress (fs) in a mitre bend shall be determined fromEquation R4.4.

R6 STRESS EVALUATION AT A BRANCH CONNECTION

R6.1 Combined stress The combined stress (fCB) at a branch connection shall beconsidered separately at connections 1, 2, and 3 shown in Figure 3.27.5(C), and shall bedetermined from the following equation:

. . . R6.1

where

fCB = combined stress, in megapascals

q = relaxation factor used for evaluation of hot stress conditions only (seeParagraph R2.3) shall be either 0.44 where ratiod2/d1 ≤ 0.3, or 0.5 whereratio d2/d1 > 0.3

fB = sum of the transverse pressures stress at the junction and the non-directionalbending stress, in megapascals

fSB = torsional stress at the junction, in megapascals

d2 = inside diameter of the branch pipe, multiplied by 1/sinα, in millimetres

d1 = inside diameter of the main pipe, in millimetres

α = angle between the branch pipe and the main pipe, in degrees.

R6.2 Transverse pressure stress The transverse pressure stress (fTp) at the branch junction(see Note below) shall be determined from the following equation:

. . . R6.2(1)

COPYRIGHT

233 AS 4041—1998

where

ta = the actual minimum thickness of the main pipe at the branch junction, i.e. theminimum measured thickness where the pipe is available for measurement or,where it is not, the nominal thickness less the greatest minus tolerance onthickness specified in the pipe specification, in millimetres

m = stress multiplier.

The stress multiplier (m) shall be determined as follows:

(a) For a branch where bothr2/r1 and t2/t1 ≤ 0.3, the value ofm shall be determined fromthe following equation:

. . . R6.2(2)

where

r1 = mean radius of the main pipe at the junction, based on the mean thickness,in millimetres

r2 = mean radius of branch pipe at the junction, based on the mean thickness,in millimetres

t1 = mean thickness of main pipe at the junction with the branch pipe, inmillimetres

n = 1 for branch pipes deemed to be not interacting in accordance withParagraph L3.

Where branch pipes are deemed to be interacting the value ofn shall be determined inaccordance with Paragraph L5.2.

(b) For a branch pipe where either or both of the ratios r2/r1 and t2/t1 > 0.3, the value ofmshall be taken from Figure R9, using a value forZ derived from the following equation:

. . . R6.2(3)

where

t2 = mean thickness of the branch pipe at the junction of the main pipe, inmillimetres

Other symbols are as defined for Equation R6.2(2).

Equation R6.2(1) incorporates a stress multiplier (m). This Equation applies for a fabricatedfull-penetration welded branch pipe, a non-protruding set-in branch, and a homogeneousbranch where any necessary reinforcement for pressure containment is incorporated in thethickness of the main pipe, or the branch pipe, or both.

Where one or more of these conditions do not apply, the value ofm shall be the estimatedstress at peak pressure at the junction, divided by the hoop stress that would occur at themean diameter of the unpierced main pipe.

Where the peak stress cannot be defined from theoretical analysis or experimental data, thetransverse pressure stress shall be taken as not less than either 2.5f where ratiod2/d1 ≤ 0.3,or 2.2f where ratiod2/d1 > 0.3, f being the design strength.

The value of the resultant transverse pressure stress is not intended to indicate the actualmaximum peak stress existing, but is used to limit the external loading carried by thejunction.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 234

Use of other forms of reinforcement is to be substantiated by experience gained in service,or by experimental or theoretical analysis, and subject to agreement by the parties concerned.

Stiffening pads may be used to reduce bending stresses.

R6.3 Non-directional bending stress The non-directional bending stress at a junctionshall be 1. The maximum value applicable to connections 1, 2, and 3 (see Figure 3.27.5(C))shall be determined as follows:

(a) The bending stress (fBB) at the branch junction from the connections 1 or 2 shall bedetermined from the following equation:

. . . R6.3(1)

where

= bending stress at branch junction from connection 1 or 2 as

selected, in megapascals

r1 = as defined in Equation R6.2(2)

I = second moment of area applicable to the branch about an axisthrough the centroid normal to the axis of the pipe, in millimetresto the fourth power

Mi = in-plane moment from the relevant connection 1 or 2, in newtonmillimetres

Bi = in-plane stress intensification factor determined from Figure R10(see Note)

Mo = out-of-plane moment from the connection 1 or 2, in newtonmillimetres

Bo = out-of-plane stress intensification factor determined fromFigure R10 (see Note).

NOTE: Stiffening pads may be used to reduce bending stresses.

(b) The bending stress (fBB) at the junction from connection 3 shall be determined frommoments as shown in Figure 3.27.5(C) and the following equation:

. . . R6.3(2)

r2 = as defined in Paragraph R6.2(a)

I = second moment of area applicable to the branch about an axis throughthe centroid normal to the axis of the branch, in millimetres to thefourth power.

To calculate this value the lesser of main pipe thickness and the branchpipe thickness multiplied byBo should be used, i.e. the lesser oft1 andt2Bo

Other symbols are as defined for Equation R6.3(1).

R6.4 Torsional stress The torsional stress (fSB) at the branch junction shall be the valueapplicable to connection 1, connection 2, or connection 3, (see Figure 3.27.5(C), and shallbe determined from the following equation:

. . . R6.4

where

t, d, and I are applicable to the connections 1, connections 2 or connections 3 underconsideration.

COPYRIGHT

235 AS 4041—1998

R7 ALLOWABLE STRESS CRITERIA For the purposes of this Appendix, the stresscriteria for piping when cold, or at any operating condition within the design limits, shall beas follows:

(a) Maximum stress rangeThe maximum stress range shall be the lesser of the following:

(i) The sum ofH × 0.2% proof stress at room temperature, andH × 0.2% proofstress at design temperature.

(ii) The sum ofH × 0.2% proof stress at room temperature, and the mean stress torupture for the design life at design temperature.

where

H = 0.9, for all cases and branches where ratiod2/d1 > 0.3

= 1.0, where ratiod2/d1 ≤ 0.3

d1 = inside diameter of main pipe, in millimetres

d2 = inside diameter of the branch pipe, in millimetres multiplied by 1/sinα,whereα is the angle between the branch pipe and main pipe.

(b) Maximum hot stress Where the criterion of the maximum stress range is that specifiedin Paragraph R7(a)(ii), the maximum hot stress determined in accordance withParagraph R2.3 shall not exceed the mean stress to rupture for the design life at thedesign temperature.

(c) Sustained stressThe sustained stress in the piping when either cold or at anyoperating condition within the design limits, shall not exceed the lesser of—

(i) 0.2 percent proof stress × 0.8; and

(ii) the creep rupture design strength.

Where the non-intensified dead load stress at the junction does not exceed 15 percentof the design strength, a sustained stress analysis at branch connections designed tocomply with this Appendix need not be made.

The sustained stress due to the hydrostatic test pressure of a completed system and themass of the fluid shall not exceed 0.9 × 0.2% proof stress at test fluid temperature.

R8 REQUIREMENT FOR FLEXIBILITY ANALYSIS A flexibility analysis shall bemade where the designer has doubt regarding the ability of the system to comply with thedesign requirements. Where interpretation of a simplified analysis indicates that any of theeffects listed in the design requirement may occur, a comprehensive analysis shall be made.Piping in low-temperature service shall be subject to a flexibility analysis.

R9 BASIS OF FLEXIBILITY ANALYSIS The flexibility between anchor points of apiping system shall be calculated. Anchor points may be the pipe anchors, or relativelyinflexible pieces of equipment to which the pipe is connected, e.g. a pump, heat exchangeror a large vessel. The piping between anchor points shall be treated as a whole, and theeffects of any movement at the anchor points and the effects of any intermediate restraintsshall be included if they restrict the free expansion of the piping system.

R10 VALUES OF PROOF STRESS, RUPTURE STRESS, AND DESIGNSTRENGTH Values for proof stress and rupture stress which are to be used in calculationsare noted in Tables R10(A) to R10(H). Values of design strength are given in Appendix D.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 236

TABLE R10(A)

0.2% PROOF STRESS FOR PIPES

Standard Grade

0.2%, Proof stress, MPa

Temperature, °C

≤20 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550

BS 3601 320360410

176195220

172192217

168187210

158176199

147165188

125145170

100122149

91111137

88109134

———

———

———

BS 3602 360410460490Nb

212242270338

207237264328

198227251309

187213237286

170193220263

150172202240

132155182217

120142168200

112135159184

108128150172

————

————

BS 3604 1 Cr-1/2 Mo 620:440 (N + T)1 Cr-1/2 Mo 620:460(N)1 1/4 Cr-1/2 Mo 621 (N + T)

287180272

276180261

264180248

253180237

245180228

236180218

192180174

182180165

174180157

168174152

166169150

163166149

1/2 Cr-Mo-V 660 (N + T)2 1/4 Cr-Mo 662 (N + T)12 Cr-Mo-V 762 (N + T)

297272468

289268453

282261439

276253413

267245384

241236362

225230351

216224345

209218337

203205322

200189296

197167—

API 5LASTMA 106

Grade BGrade B

——

——

——

203203

183183

165165

149149

136136

128128

——

——

——

ASTMA 335

Grade P11Grade P12

——

——

——

205205

194194

184184

157157

138138

135135

133133

128128

——

ASTMA 335 Grade P22 (N + T) — — — 163 155 146 142 138 133 123 114 —

ASTMA 335 Grade P22 (Annealed) — — — 104 96 90 85 82 77 74 70 62

COPYRIGHT

237 AS 4041—1998

TABLE R10(B)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3602,GRADE 360 AND GRADE 410, API 5L, GRADE B,

AND ASTM A 106, GRADE B

TemperatureAverage rupture stress, MPa

Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000

380390400

171*155*141*

164*149*134*

159*144*130*

155*140*126*

410420430

127*114*102*

121*108*96*

116*104*92*

113*101*89*

440450460

90*78*67*

84*73*62*

80*69*58*

77*66*55*

470480490

57*47*36*

52*41*29*

48*37*23*

45*34*—

* Value with extended time extrapolation.

TABLE R10(C)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3602GRADE 460 (Mn ≥0.8%) AND GRADE 490 Nb


Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000200 000

(see Note)250 000

(see Note)

380390400

227203179

215190167

206*181*157*

199*174*150*

410420430

157136117

144124105

135*115*97*

128*108*91*

440450460

1008573

897665

82*70*60*

77*66*56*

470480490

6355

47†

5649†42†

52*44*†37*†

48*†41*†32*†

500510

41†32†

34†—

——

——


† Value with extended stress extrapolation.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 238

TABLE R10(D)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3604, GRADE 620AND GRADE 621, ASTM A 335, GRADE P11 AND GRADE P12


Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000

480490500

210177

146*

194*161*132*

180*148*122*

170*139*114*

510520530

1219981

108*87*71

99*79*64*

91*74*59*

540550560

675443

574638

52*42*34*

48*39*32*

570 35 31† 28*† 26*†



TABLE R10(E)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3604, GRADE 660


Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000

480490500

218191170

205179156

194*169*146*

185*160*138*

510520530

150131116

136119101

127*109*91*

119*101*83*

540550560

1008572

857057

76*61*

48*†

68*54*

42*†

570580

5946†

45†35†

37*†28*†

32*†—



COPYRIGHT

239 AS 4041—1998

TABLE R10(F)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3604, GRADE 622,ASTM A 335, GRADE P22 (N + T) AND GRADE P22 (ANNEALED)


Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000

450460470

221*204*186*

209*192*175*

203*186*169*

198*181*164*

480490500

170*153*137*

158141*126*

152*135*119*

147*130*113*

510520530

122*107*

93

110*95*82*

103*89*77*

98*84*74*

540550560

796959

73*63*54*

68*58*50*

64*55*47*

570580

5144

4740

43*37*†

41*35*†



TABLE R10(G)

AVERAGE RUPTURE STRESS FOR PIPE TO BS 3604, GRADE 762


Design life, h

°C 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000

500510520

248225202

239*219*197*

234*213*190*

229*208*185*

530540550

180159139

175*150*128*

167*143*122*

161*137*117*

560570580

12110488

110*94*80*

104*89*76*

100*84*72*

590600

7563

68*57*

64*53*

60*50*


COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 240

TABLE R10(H)

HEAT TREATMENT OF COMPLETED PIPES

Standard numberand grade

Heat treatment temperature, °C

Normalized Tempered Annealed

API 5L, Grade BASTM A 106, Grade BASTM A 335, Grade P12

880 to 940880 to 940900 to 960

——

650 to 720

———

ASTM A 335, Grade P11ASTM A 335, Grade P22 (N + T)ASTM A 335, Grade P22 (Annealed)

900 to 960900 to 960

—

620 to 720650 to 750

—

——

900 to 960

FIGURE R1 IN-PLANE AND OUT-OF-PLANE FLEXIBILITY FACTOR FOR A BEND,OTHER THAN A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

241 AS 4041—1998

NOTE: K = 1 for single mitre bends.

FIGURE R2 IN-PLANE AND OUT-OF-PLANE FLEXIBILITY FACTOR FORA MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 242

FIGURE R3 IN-PLANE LONGITUDINAL STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTOR FOR ABEND OTHER THAN A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

243 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE R4 OUT-OF-PLANE LONGITUDINAL STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORFOR A BEND, OTHER THAN A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 244

FIGURE R5 IN-PLANE TRANSVERSE STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORFOR A BEND OTHER THAN A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

245 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE R6 OUT-OF-PLANE TRANSVERSE STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORFOR A BEND, OTHER THAN A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 246

NOTE: For flange on the correction factor isλ1⁄ 6; for two flanges the correction factor isλ1⁄3.

FIGURE R7 STRESS INTENSIFICATION AND FLEXIBILITYCORRECTION FACTORS FOR A FLANGED BEND

COPYRIGHT

247 AS 4041—1998

NOTE: See Figure R7 for correction factors for flanges. The product of factors in Figures R7 and R8 shall notbe taken as less than unity.

FIGURE R8 STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORS FOR A MITRE BEND

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 248

FIGURE R9 PRESSURE/STRESS MULTIPLIER FOR BRANCHES

COPYRIGHT

249 AS 4041—1998

FIGURE R10 MAXIMUM NON-DIRECTIONAL STRESS FACTORS FOR BRANCHES

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 250

APPENDIX S

EXAMPLE OF STRESS CALCULATION IN ASECTIONALIZED PIPING SYSTEM

(Normative)

S1 GENERAL The calculation of bending moments and the identification of themaximum moment or the maximum combined moments where various modes of operationapply can be a lengthy exercise when undertaken manually. Recourse to computer analysisemploying a program incorporating the requirements of this Standard will be expedient.

This Appendix shows how data on moments can be obtained, and uses Appendix R as a basis.It is based on BS 806.

A typical configuration is considered and the data on moments are tabulated to facilitate thevarious combinations of moments that are needed for calculations specified in the Standard.One particular point of maximum stress is investigated in detail, and values are calculatedfor hot stress and the stress range under all the modes of operation. The limiting values forthe stress range and the hot stress are identified and calculated.

It will be seen that for the example given, and for the point considered in detail, many of thesteps are not necessary, e.g. in every case the combined transverse stress is more than thecombined longitudinal stress, and the latter need not be calculated after solving the first case.

Details of the piping used for the example are shown in Figure S1, and the ordinates ofreference are shown in Figure S2.

S2 IDENTIFICATION OF PLANES The point considered in detail is on a bend, wherethe in-plane and out-of-plane directions are easily identified. In-plane and out-of-planedirections are also easily identified at branch junctions, but there is no apparent planar logicto be applied to a straight pipe.

Calculation of stress levels at points that are subject to varying modes of operation requireinclusion of moments which do not occur simultaneously, and a terminology is necessary forthe identification of planes in straight sections. The following separation of planes in astraight pipe may be of assistance:

(a) Where a plane is taken as lying between a straight pipe and the vertical axis, this planeis defined as ‘in-plane’.

(b) Where a vertical straight pipe is considered, take the planar direction as that of theupper end bend or junction. Where there is no upper end bend or junction, use thelower end bend or junction to identify the plane of the vertical straight pipe.

S3 MODES OF OPERATION Five modes of operation are considered for this exampleas follows:

(a) Pipe 1 cold (20°C), pipes 2 and 3 hot (450°C); and all at 1.3 MPa.

(b) Pipe 2 cold (20°C), pipes 1 and 3 hot (250°C), all at 1.3 MPa.

(c) Pipe 2 cold (20°C), pipe 1 hot (340°C) and 1.3 MPa, pipe 3 hot (450°C), and 1.3 MPa.

(d) All pipes cold (20°C).

(e) All pipes at 1.3 MPa, with pipe 1 hot (340°C), pipe 2 and pipe 3 hot (450°C).

COPYRIGHT

251 AS 4041—1998

S4 BENDING AND TORSIONAL MOMENTS Table S5(A) to (D), show the values andcombinations of bending and torsional moments.

S5 DETERMINATION OF MOMENTS Table S5(A) shows moments determined on thebasis of complete thermal expansion from the all pipes cold Item (d) to all pipes hot Item (e)mode.

TABLE S5(A)

MOMENTS FOR STRESS RANGE FROM COLD TO HOT(No cold-pull allowance, see Paragraph R2.2, Item (a))

Mode of operation(see Paragraph S3)

Position

Moment,kN.m

Mx M y Mz

Item (d) and Item (e) A1A2A3

1.61.20.4

0.51.00.5

2.00.81.2

BCD

1.30.81.6

0.30.40.2

1.00.80.3

Design conditions

Identification Pressure, MPa Temperature, °C

123

Tee A1, Tee A2, Tee A3

1.31.31.31.3

340450450450

Design life : 100 000 h

Pipe material : BS 3602, Grade 410

Pipe dimensions :

(a) Pipes 1 and 2— outside diameter 168.3 mm, pipe wall thickness 8 mm, and tee piece wallthickness 9.5 mm.

(b) Pipe 3 — outside diameter 114.3 mm, pipe wall thickness 6.3 mm, and tee piece wall thickness7.1 mm.

FIGURE S1 DETAILS OF EXAMPLE PIPING

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 252

FIGURE S2 ORDINATES OF REFERENCE

In this case, there is only one ‘all hot’ condition. Where there is more than one ‘all hot’condition, or when there is no ‘all hot’ condition, each cold to hot mode would need to beconsidered separately and the most adverse condition at any point established.

NOTE: Where there is no cold to hot mode, or where there is more than one cold to hot mode, themaximum moment in each plane for all modes (in the case of no cold to hot mode) and ‘all hot’modes (in the case of more than one ‘all hot’ mode) should be considered first. Where the limit isnot exceeded, then the limits will not be exceeded under any individual mode. This will ensure thatthe necessity to identify the worst case which will apply only where the limit is exceeded.

The moments tabulated in Table S5(A) are used in calculating the maximum stress range asdefined in Paragraph R2.2, Item (a), in order to comply with the limitations ofParagraph R7(a), Item (i) and Item (ii).

Table S5(B), shows the moments determined on the basis of complete thermal expansion forthe combined modes of operation specified in Paragraph S3, Items (a), (b), (c) and (e). Nocredit is given for cold-pull.

COPYRIGHT

253 AS 4041—1998

TABLE S5(B)

MOMENTS FOR STRESS RANGE:SECTIONALIZED SYSTEM, MAXIMUM DIFFERENCE

(No cold-pull allowance, see Paragraph R2.2, Item (b))


PositionMoment, kN.m

Mx My Mz

Item (a) A1A2A3BCD

+1.5+0.5−2.0+1.2−0.2+1.7

+0.4+0.2−0.6+0.2+0.2+0.4

+2.6−0.3−2.3+1.0+0.8+0.5

Item (b) A1A2A3BCD

+2.0−0.5−1.5+1.6−2.00.3

−0.2−0.4+0.6−0.4+0.3+0.4

−2.0+1.5+0.5+1.2−0.5+1.5

Item (c) A1A2A3BCD

−1.3+1.0+0.3−1.5+1.2−2.0

−0.3−1.0+1.3+0.1+0.3−0.3

−0.5+2.0−1.5−0.2+1.3+1.2

Item (e) A1A2A3BCD

+1.6−1.2−0.4+1.3+0.8+1.6

+0.5−1.0+0.5−0.3+0.4−0.2

+2.0−0.8−1.2+1.0+0.8+0.3

Item (f)Greatest difference

A1A2A3BCD

3.32.22.33.11.43.7

0.81.21.90.60.20.7

4.62.82.81.41.81.2

NOTE: Boxed values are the greatest positive and greatest negative values for each point, and for eachmoment. These are used to obtain greatest difference of moments.

Example:

Greatest difference inMx at Position A1.

(a) Maximum positive moment occurs in mode Item (b) =+2.0

(b) Maximum negative moment occurs in mode Item (c) =−1.3

(c) Therefore maximum difference =3.3

Paragraph R2.2(b) requires that where a piping system can be sectionalized so that any pointcan be subject to conditions other than ‘all hot’ or ‘all cold’ then, in addition to the stressrange calculation based on the movements in Table S5(A), the maximum stress range basedon the maximum difference between bending movements in each plane shall be calculated.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 254

The moments tabulated in Table S5(B) are combined to show the maximum difference ineach of the three planes (shown in Table S5(B)) and these differences are used in thecalculation specified in Paragraph R2.2(b).

Paragraph R7 states that at no point in the pipes under cold or any operating condition withinthe design limits shall the lower of the values derived from Paragraph R7(a), Item (i) orItem (ii) be exceeded. In addition, the limiting requirements specific to the sectionalizedsystem, as defined in Paragraph R2.2(b), shall be met.

Table S5(C) shows moments calculated on the basis of complete thermal expansion of the allhot mode specified in Paragraph S3(e) minus the therorectical cold-pull.

TABLE S5(C)

MOMENTS FOR HOT STRESS ‘ALL HOT’(Hot expansion, minus cold-pull, see Paragraph R2.3, Item (a))

Mode of operation (seeParagraph S3)


Mx My Mz

Item (e)(All hot)

A1A2A3BCD

0.60.50.80.50.30.6

0.20.40.20.10.20.1

0.80.30.50.40.30.1

The moments tabulated in Table S5(C) are used to calculate the hot stress as defined inParagraph R2.3(a) in order to comply with the limitation of Paragraph R7(b). This calculationis required only if the limitation of Paragraph R7(a), Item (ii) is more onerous than that ofParagraph R7(a), Item (i).

NOTE: This all hot mode need not be calculated for a sectional system where Paragraph R2.3,Item (b) has to be calculated, as it should always be less than this latter value, and has to complywith the same limiting value.

COPYRIGHT

255 AS 4041—1998

TABLE S5(D)

MOMENTS FOR HOT STRESS, SECTIONALIZED SYSTEM,HIGHEST FOR DIFFERENCE

(Hot expansion, minus cold-pull, see Paragraph R2.3, Item (b))



Mx My Mz

Item (a) A1A2A3BCD

−0.3*+0.1+0.2*+0.8†+0.3†−0.2

+0.2†+0.1*−0.3†−0.1+0.2+0.1

+1.2†−0.2−1.0†−0.2*+0.3−0.2*

Item (b) A1A2A3BCD

+0.6+0.2*−0.8†−0.1+0.2*−0.3

+0.2−0.1−0.1+0.2†+0.1+0.1*

−0.1+0.2*−0.1+0.5†+0.1*+0.2

Item (c) A1A2A3BCD

+0.3−0.1−0.2−0.3*+0.2−0.4*

−0.2*−0.1+0.3*−0.1−0.1*−0.2†

−0.8*+0.2+0.6*+0.1+0.8†+0.7†

Item (e) A1A2A3BCD

+0.6†−0.5†−0.2+0.5+0.3+0.6†

+0.2−0.4†+0.2−0.1*+0.2†−0.1

+0.8−0.3†−0.5+0.4+0.3+0.1

Item (f)Highest moment(regardless or sign)

A1A2A3BCD

0.60.50.80.80.30.6

0.20.40.30.20.20.2

1.20.31.00.50.80.7

Item (g)Algebraic difference ‡

A1A2A3BCD

0.750.60.90.950.20.8

0.30.450.450.250.250.25

1.60.41.30.60.750.8

* Moment which, when combined with highest moment, gives the greatest algebraic difference.

† Highest moment for each position.

‡ Maximum values from Items (a) to (e) would be used in stress calculation, and are shown shaded.

Table S5(D), Items (a) to (e) show the moments calculated on the basis of complete thermalexpansion for combined modes of operation specified in Paragraph S3, Items (a), (b), (c),and (e) minus the theoretical cold-pull in each case.

Paragraph R2.3, Item (b) requires that where a piping system can be sectionalized so that anypoint can be subject to conditions other than all hot or all cold, the higher value of either themaximum moment or the maximum difference between the maximum moment and 0.5 times

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 256

the minimum moment in each plane under any hot condition of operation shall be consideredin addition to the basic cold to hot condition pertaining to the moments in Table S5(C).

The moments tabulated in Table S5(D), Items (a) to (e) are therefore combined to show, ineach plane, the maximum difference obtained from any two moments in that plane, but withonly 0.5 × the smaller of the two considered. The results are given in Table S5(D) Item (g).

This difference is compared with the highest moment in each plane as given in Table S5(D),Item (f), and the higher of the two values is used in the calculations to comply withParagraph R2.3, Item (b).

This calculation is required only if the limitation of Paragraph R7(a)(ii) is more onerous thanthat of Paragraph R7(a)(i).

S6 LIMITS

S6.1 General In a sectionalized system, the limits applicable to one point in that systemneed not necessarily apply to another point.

To illustrate the derivation of limits and combined stresses, consider point B of the typicalconfiguration (Figure S1).

S6.2 Stress range limitation The stress range limitation is to be determined as follows:

(a) By the application of Paragraph R7(a)(i) and (ii), the stress range for all cold to all hotis determined as follows:

(i) 0.9 × 0.2% proof stress at 450°C = 115.2 MPa.

(ii) 0.9 × 0.2% proof stress at room temperature = 217.8 MPa.

(iii) Mean stress to rupture in the design life (100 000 h) at design temperature(450°C) = 78.0 MPa.

Item (ii) plus Item (iii) is less than Item (ii) plus Item (i), therefore limit forthis mode (see Table S5(A)) = 217.8 + 78 = 295.8 MPa.

NOTE: The limitations of Paragraph R7(a)(ii) are more onerous than those ofParagraph R7(a)(i).

(b) Stress range for modes of operation other than all hot should not exceed the all hotlimit (295.8 MPa) and, in addition, should not exceed the sum of 0.9 × 0.2% proofstress at the temperature at each end of the application cycle.

For this additional limit, it is necessary to identify the temperatures specific to themoments used in the sectionalized system calculation. In this case, at point B(see Table S5(D))—

(i) Mx moments used apply to modes of operation, Item (b) and Item (c);

(ii) My moments apply to modes of operation, Item (a) and Item (b); and

(iii) Mz moments apply to modes of operation Item (b) and Item (c).

At point B mode Item (a) the temperature = 450°C

At point B mode Item (b) the temperature = 250°C

At point B mode Item (c) the temperature = 450°C

Therefore the temperature at each end of the cycle used in the calculation is250°C and 450°C respectively.

0.9 × 0.2% proof stress at 450°C = 115.2 MPa

0.9 × 0.2% proof stress at 250°C = 154.8 MPa.

As 154.8 MPa + 115.2 MPa is less than the all hot stress range limit (295.8 MPa),270.0 MPa becomes the limit for sectionalized stress range other than all hot.

COPYRIGHT

257 AS 4041—1998

S6.3 Hot stress limitation The hot stress limitation is to be determined as follows:

(a) All hot limit is defined by Paragraph R7(b)

Mean stress to rupture in the design life (100 000 h) at design temperature(450°C) = 78.0 MPa.

(b) Hot stress for modes other than all hot should not exceed the all hot limit,i.e. 78.0 MPa.

NOTE: The hot stress calculation is necessary only where the stress range limiting criterion isdetermined by Paragraph R7(a), Item (ii).

S6.4 Calculation of combined stress levels at point B Point B is on a bend.Paragraph R4.1 defines stress evaluation on straight and bends.

Combined stress = . . . S6.4(1)where

F = the greater offT and fL, in megapascals

fs = torsional stress, in megapascals

fT = the sum of the transverse pressure stress and the transverse bending stress, inmegapascals

fL = the sum of longitudinal pressure stress and the longitudinal bending stress, inmegapascals.

At point B, the transverse stress = . . . S6.4(2)

where

d is 101.7 mm,t is 6.3 mm,p is 1.3 MPa.

At point B, longitudinal pressure stress

. . . S6.4(3)

At point B, the transverse bending stress

. . .S6.4(4)

where

r = 54.0 mm

I = 3.1467 × 106

Mi = the in-plane moment, in newton millimetres

FTi = transverse stress intensification factor in-plane

= 1.8 (see Figure R5)

Mo = out-of-plane moment, in newton millimetres

FTo = transverse stress intensification factor out-of-plane

= 1.9. (see Figure R6)

Moments at point B:

Mt = Mz (see torsional stress)

Mo = My

Mi = Mx

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 258

Case 1 Consider the cold to hot stress range in the modes of operation Item (d) to Item (e).The moments are derived from Table S5(A) and are—

(a) Mo = 0.3 × 103 N.m

(b) Mi = 1.3 × 103 N.m

The transverse bending stress for this mode = 41.3 MPa

and fT = (41.3 + 11.07) = 52.37 MPa.

At point B, Longitudinal bending stress

. . . S6.4(5)

where symbols are as above and—

FLi and FLo = the in-plane and out-of-plane stress intensification factors

andFLi is 1.6, andFLo is 1.7.

Hence the longitudinal bending stress for this mode = 36.73 MPa

and fL = (36.73 + 4.935) = 41.67 MPa.

As fT is greater thanfL, thenF = fT = 52.37 MPa.

At point B, the torsional stress . . . S6.4(6)

Mt = Mz = 1.0 × 103 N.m (from Table S5(A)).

The torsional stress for this mode of operation = 9.0 MPa.

The combined stress at point B for cold to hot stress range modes of operation Item (d) toItem (e) = 55.38 MPa.

The stress range limit for this mode of operation = 295.8 MPa.

Case 2 Consider the stress range at point B of the sectionalized system for modes ofoperation other than ‘all hot’.

The moments derived from Table S5(B), Item(f) are—

(a) Mt = 1.4 × 103 N.m;

(b) Mo = 0.6 × 103 N.m; and

(c) Mi = 3.1 × 103 N.m

These values are used in Equation S6.4(4), Equation S6.4(5) and Equation S6.4(6) and arecombined with pressure stresses from Equation S6.4(2) and Equation S6.4(3) for use inEquation S6.4(1).

The combined stress at point B, stress range for modes of operation other than cold tohot = 108.9 MPa.

The stress range limit for this mode of operation = 270.0 MPa.

Case 3 Consider the hot stress at point B for ‘all hot’ mode of operation Item (e).

NOTE: If Case 4 (see below) has to be calculated, this Case need not be calculated.

The moments are derived from Table S5(C) and are—

(a) Mt = Mz = 0.4 × 103 N.m;

(b) Mo = My = 0.1 × 103 N.m; and

(c) Mi = Mx = 0.5 × 103 N.m

COPYRIGHT

259 AS 4041—1998

These values are used in Equation S6.4(4), Equation S6.4(5), and Equation S6.4(6) and arecombined with pressure stresses from Equation S6.4(2) and Equation S6.4(3) for use inEquation S6.4(1).

The combined hot stress at point B for the all hot mode of operation Item (e) = 27.72 MPa.

The hot stress limit = 78.0 MPa.

Case 4 Consider the hot stress at point B of the sectionalized system for combined modesof operation Items (a), (b), (c), and (e).

The moments are derived from Table S5(D), Item (g), and are—

(a) Mt = Mz = 0.6 × 103 N.m;

(b) Mo = My = 0.25 × 103 N.m; and

(c) Mi = Mx = 0.95 × 103 N.m

These values are used in Equation S6.4(4), Equation S6.4(5), and Equation S6.4(6) and arecombined with pressure stresses from Equation S6.4(2) and Equation S6.4(3) for use inEquation S6.4(1).

The combined hot stress at point B for combined modes of operation Items (a), (b), (c)and (e) = 42.9 MPa.

The hot stress limit = 78.0 MPa.

S6.5 Conclusion The stress range and hot stress levels at point B are acceptable.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 260

APPENDIX T

STANDARD PIPING DESIGN

(Normative)

The material selections, thicknesses and ratings listed in this Appendix (T) are deemed tomeet the requirements of this Standard (AS 4041) without the need for specific designcalculations for pressure containment or pipe flexibility for the fluids specified and the designconditions nominated.

It is the users responsibility, however, to design the supporting structures to meet all expectedloading conditions including earthquake and wind loads to AS 1170 and ensure that loadsimposed on equipment such as pumps and vessels are within acceptable limits.

Standard Piping Design : AS 4041 Spec. TA and TBBasic Material : Steel Type A1, A2Corrosion Allowance : 1.5 mmFluid Types : AS 3920.1 Type 5.4 Gas and LiquidFlange Rating Spec. TA : AS 2129 Table DService Limit Spec. TA : 0 MPa to 0.7 MPa at 0°C to 65°CFlange Rating Spec. TB : AS 2129 Table EService Limit Spec. TB : 0 MPa to 1.4 MPa at 0°C to 65°CAS 4041 Class : Class 3

NOTES:

1 Support spacings in accordance with Table 3.28.2.

2 Fabrication and welding to AS 4041 - Sections 4 and 5.

3 Testing and inspection to AS 4041 - Section 6.

4 Protective systems and devices to AS 4041 - Section 7.

5 Quality assurance and inspection to AS 4041 - Section 8.

6 Commissioning and operation to AS 4041 - Section 9.

7 Valves and in-line equipment shall be selected to meet the service limits above.

COPYRIGHT

261 AS 4041—1998

TABLE T1

MATERIAL SELECTION AND THICKNESS FOR VARIOUS TYPESOF PIPING COMPONENTS

PIPE

Size ThicknessMaterial

Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤150 Medium Heavy AS 1074

DN ≤150 Sch40 Sch40 ASTM A53B, API 5LB, ASTM A106B

200 ≤DN ≤400 Sch10 Sch20 ASTM A53B, API 5LB, ASTM A106B

450 ≤ DN ≤600 Sch10 Std wt ASTM A53B, API 5LB, ASTM A106B

SCREWED FITTINGS


Spec. TA Spec. TB

D ≤150 Heavy Heavy AS 3672, AS 3673 Scrd BSP T/P

DN ≤50 3000# 3000# ANSI B16.11/ ASTM A105

SOCKETWELD FITTINGS


Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤50 3000# 3000# ANSI B16.11/ ASTM A105

BUTTWELD FITTINGS


Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤150 Sch40 Sch40 ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

200 ≤ DN ≤400 Sch10 Sch20 ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

450 ≤ DN ≤600 Sch10 Std wt ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

FLANGES

Size FacingMaterial

Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤150 Table ‘D’ Flat Face Table ‘E’ FlatFace

AS 2129 Screwed BSP T/P

DN ≤600 Table ‘D’ Flat Face Table ‘E’ FlatFace

AS 2129 Slip on Welded Type 6 Weld

DN ≤600 150# Raised Face ANSI B16.5/ ASTM A105

GASKET

Size ThicknessType/material

Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤600 3 mm Table ‘D’ 1.5 mm Table ‘E’ Full face, asbestos free

DN ≤600 — 1.5 mm 150# Flat ring, asbestos free

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 262

FLANGE BOLTING


Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤600 Bolts and nutsTable ‘D’

Bolts and nutsTable ‘E’

AS/NZS 1111 Gr 4.6 andAS/NZS 1112Gr 5

DN ≤600 150#Studs and nuts

Bolts and nuts

ASTM A193 B7/ ASTM A194 2H Nuts

AS/NZS 1111 Gr 4.6 andAS/NZS 1112Gr 5

BRANCHES/TEE FITTINGS

Size ThicknessForm/material

Spec. TA Spec. TB

DN ≤150 Heavy Heavy Screwed/AS 3672, AS 3673, Scrd BSPT/P

DN ≤50 3000# 3000# Threadolet/ANSI B16.11/ ASTM A105

DN ≤50 3000# 3000# Sockolet/ANSI B16.11/ ASTM A105

DN ≤600 Std wt Std wt Weldolet/ANSI B16.11/ ASTM A105

DN ≤150 Sch40 Sch40 ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

200 ≤DN ≤400 Sch10 Sch20 ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

450 ≤ DN ≤600 Sch10 Std wt ANSI B16.9/ ASTM A234 WPB

COPYRIGHT

263 AS 4041—1998

TABLE T2

FILLET SIZES AND REINFORCING PAD SIZES FOR WELDED BRANCHES TO FIGURE M6millimetres

Main sizes

Branchsizes

≤20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

Fillet sizes and reinforcing pad sizes

≤20 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

25 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6−TA6+6×14−TB

32 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7−TA7+6×18−TB

40 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7−TA7+6×21−TB

50 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7−TA7+6×27−TB

65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10−TA10+6×31−TB

80 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10−TA10+6×38−TB

100 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12−TA11+6×50−TB

150 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12−TA13+6×76−TB

200 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12−TA12+6×103−TB

250 12 12 12 12 12 12 12−TA12+6×130−TB

300 12−TA12+6× 155−TB

12 12 12 12−TA12+6×155−TB

12−TA12+6×155−TB

350 12 12 12 12−TA12+6×171−TB

12−TA12+6×171−TB

400 12 12 12−TA12+6×197−TB

12−TA12+6×197−TB

450 12 12−TA12+6×220−TB

12−TA12+6×220−TB

500 12−TA12+6×243−TB

12+6×248−TA12+6×243−TB

600 12+6×300−TA12+6×294−TB

NOTE: Fillet sizes are the same for Spec. TA and TB unless otherwise noted in the table.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 264

APPENDIX U

EXAMPLES OF CALCULATION OF HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE

(Normative)

U1 GENERAL This Appendix gives examples of the calculation of the hydrostatic testpressure of various piping types.

NOTE: Because this Standard (AS 4041) uses higher design stresses for steel pipe than previously(e.g. Re/1.5 and 0.72Re), the previous test pressure of 1.5 P no longer applies to steel piping.

U2 FERRITIC, AUSTENITIC AND FERRITIC-AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPING,CLASS 1, 2A AND 3 The minimum hydrostatic test pressure shall be determined from thefollowing equation:

. . . U2(1)

where

Ph = hydrostatic test pressure, in megapascals

P = design pressure, in megapascals

Re = specified minimum yield strength at test temperature, in megapascals

f = design strength at design temperature, in megapascals.

NOTE: This equation U2(1) is based on BS 806. Some values ofRe and f are listed inAppendix D.

In addition the actual hoop stressfa during the pressure test shall not exceed 90 percentof the specified minimum yield strength at test temperature when calculated from thefollowing equation:

. . . U2(2)

where

fa = actual hoop stress during pressure test, in megapascals

D = measured (or maximum per purchase specification) outside diameter ofpipe, in millimetres

t = measured (or minimum per purchase specification) wall thickness, inmillimetres

Example 1:

Pipe specification = API 5L B

Size = 273 × 4.8 (Class 1)

Re = 241 MPa

Rm = 415 MPa

f = 160 MPa

P = 5.62 MPa

Ph = 0.83

= 1.25 P

COPYRIGHT

265 AS 4041—1998

= 7 MPa

(wheneverf = )

Example 2:

Pipe specification = API 5L X42

Size = 273.1 × 4.8 (Class 1)

Re = 289 MPa

Rm = 415 MPa

f = 176 MPa

P = 6.2 MPa

Ph = 0.83

= 1.36 P

= 8.5 MPa

Example 3:


Size = 273.1 × 9.3 (Class 1 and 3 with considerable excess ofthickness)

Re = 289 MPa

Rm = 415 MPa

f = 176 MPa

P = 0.6 MPa

Ph = 0.83

= 1.36 P

= 0.82 MPa

Example 4:

Pipe specification = AS 1074 (Class 3)

Size = 165.1 × 5.4 (excess of thickness)

Re = 195 MPa

Rm = 320 MPa

f = 130 MPa (depends on )

P = 2 MPa

Ph = 0.8

= 1.25P

= 2.5 MPa

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 266

Example 5:


Size = 273.1 × 4.8

Re = 385 MPa

Rm = 455 MPa

f = 194 MPa (depends on )

P = 6.8 MPa

Ph = 0.83

= 1.53 P

= 10.4 MPa

Hoop stress = 10.4 ×

= 296 MPa

= 83% of Re

Example 6:


Size = 273.1 × 4.8

Re = 385 MPa,Ret = 202

Rm = 455 MPa

f = 135 MPa

P = 4.7 MPa

This test is at room temperature

Ph = 0.83

= 2.2 P which is above 1.5P

= 10.3 MPa

Hoop stress = 10.3 ×

= 293 MPa

= 82% of Re which complies with 90% limit(albeit aboveRet = 202 MPa)

(The stress limit is more fundamental than an arbitrary 1.5P limit.)

U3 FERRITIC STEEL PIPING CLASS 2P The minimum hydrostatic test pressure forpiping to Class 2P isPh = 1.25P. . . . U3(1)

The actual hoop stress shall not exceed 90 percent of the specified minimum yieldstrength calculated as in equation U2(1).

COPYRIGHT

267 AS 4041—1998

Example 7:


Size = 273.1 × 4.8 (Class 2P)

Re = 289 MPa

Rm = 415 MPa

f = 208 MPa

P = 7.3 MPa

Ph = 1.25P

= 9.1 MPa

Hoop stress = 259 MPa

= 89.6% Re

NOTE: 1.25 × 0.72 = 0.90.

U4 NON FERROUS METALS (TAKEN FROM ANSI/ASME B 31.3) The minimumhydrostatic test pressure shall be determined from the following equation:

Ph = 1.5P . . . U4(1)

except that shall not exceed 6.5.

where

ft = design strength at test temperature, in megapascals

f = design strength at design temperature, in megapascals

The actual hoop stress calculated as in Equation U2(2) shall not exceed 90 percent ofthe specified minimum yield stress.

U5 PIPING AND PRESSURE VESSELS TESTED TOGETHER For piping attachedto a pressure vessel where the test pressure is not more than the test pressure for the vessel,the piping may be tested with the vessel at the test pressure of the piping.

Where the test pressure of the piping is greater than the vessel test pressure and it is notpracticable to isolate the piping from the vessel, the piping and the vessel may be testedtogether at the test pressure of the vessel provided that—

(a) the owner agrees; and

(b) the test pressure of the vessel is not less than 77 percent of the piping test pressureadjusted for temperature (see Paragraphs U2, U3 and U4).

U6 PIPING SUBJECT TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE Piping subject to external pressurein service shall be hydrostatic-tested internally at a test pressure of 1.5 times the differentialdesign pressure, but not less than 100 kPa.

U7 JACKETED PIPING The internal piping of jacketed piping shall be pressure-testedaccording to the internal or external design pressure, whichever is critical. The test shall, ifnecessary, be performed before completion of the jacket so that any joints of the internalpiping can be visually inspected.

The jacket shall be pressure tested in accordance with Paragraph U2, U3 and U4 andaccording to the design pressure of the jacket, unless otherwise limited in the design.

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041—1998 268

INDEX

Clause Clause

Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1, 1.18

Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3

Allowancescorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.3erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.3grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4manufacturing tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.2mechanical strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.5threading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4

Alternative Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

Alternative tests to hydrostatic and pneumatic tests . . 6.8

Attachmentsintensity of radial loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23.4thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23.3welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23.2

Bearing stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.4

Bell and spigot socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix O

Bifurcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17

Blowdownsystems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9.6, 3.9.7vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9.6.3

Boiler feed water piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.5

Bolting, design tensile strength. . . . . . . . . . Appendix G

Branch fittings, forged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix K

Branch connections and openingsapplication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.1extruded outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.9location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.5material for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.6reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.6, Appendix Lreinforcement required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.8reinforcement not required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.7shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.3size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.4types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.2welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix M

Brazed piping joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.8

Brazing materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.8

Butt welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.1

Cast, pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.5

Casting quality factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.4

Caulked piping joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.6

Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11

Class design factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3

Classificationof fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4of piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3

Closures for pipe ends and branches. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21

Cold spring . . . . . . . . 1.7.3, 3.27.2.3, 4.3.5, Appendix Q

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1

Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.4

Componentscorrosive service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3

identification (see Identification of materials andcomponents)limitations (seeLimitations on materials and components)qualification of (see Qualification of materials andcomponents)

Compression piping joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5

Compressive stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2

Continuous pipe bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.2

Control equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9, 9.1.4

Control piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.3

Corrosionallowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.3definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.5protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4

COPYRIGHT

269 AS 4041—1998

Clause

Corrosive servicecomponent for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7materials for. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Crease pipe bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.3

Creep-fatigue interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.8

Cut-and-shut, pipe bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.5

Definitionsaccessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1agreed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2cold spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.3component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.4corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.5design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.6designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.7design strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.8extruded outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.9fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.10fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.11fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.12hydrostatic test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.13inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.14inspection body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.15installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.16may . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.17mitre bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.18mitre joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19nominal pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.20nominal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.21owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.22parties concerned. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.23pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.24pipe support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.25pressure piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.26pressure, design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.27proprietory components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.28service conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.29shall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.30should . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.31socket welded joint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.32strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.33temperature, design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.1temperature, material design minimum. . . . . . 1.7.34.2temperature, minimum operating. . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.4temperature, maximum operating. . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.3testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.35thickness, actual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.1thickness, design pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.2thickness, nominal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.4thickness, required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.3verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37weld joint factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.38

Designagainst failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18

Clause

approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2criteria

normal operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.2pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1variations in normal operating conditions . . . 3.10.3

definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.6factors

casting quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.4class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3weld joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.2

life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4other methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3other pressure-retaining components. . . . . . . . . . . 3.22parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Dpressure, design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

blowdown systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.6, 3.9.7boiler feed water piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.5condition for safety valve discharge piping. . . . 3.9.8drain systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.6, 3.9.7main steam piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1, 3.9.9reduced pressure systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3reheat piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2

specific piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.25steam piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.4strength

bearing stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.4compressive stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2creep-fatigue interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.8definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.8, 1.7.33determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Ilongitudinal stress, occasional loads. . . . . . . 3.11.6longitudinal stress, sustained. . . . . . . 3.11.5, 3.11.6pressure retaining components. . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1shear stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.3stress range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.7

temperatureexternally insulated piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3heated piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5internally insulated piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4uninsulated piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2

Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.7

Drainsystems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9.6, 3.9.7vessels

for boilers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.2for high pressure steam piping. . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.2

Drainage systems of steam piping. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.1

Dynamic loads and forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6

Erosion allowance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.3

Examination and testingfor qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 270

Clause

non-destructive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2

Expansionfittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18, 3.27.2.1linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D

External pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.4

Extruded outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.9 3.19.9

Fabricationdefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.10inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4

Fillet-welded sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix O

Fire protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.11

Flange bolting, design tensile strength. . . . . Appendix G

Flanged joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.4

Flared piping joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5

Flareless piping joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5

Flexibilityanalysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27, Q1method of assessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix R

Flexible hose assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18

Fluiddefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.12

Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Forged branch fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix K

Grooving allowance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4

Gusseted pipe bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.5

Human contact protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9

Hydrostatic test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.13, 6.7

Hydrostatic test calculation examples. . . . . . Appendix U

Identification, materials and components. . . . . . . . . 2.5

Impact, protection from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

Impact tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.6

Clause

Information to be supplied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29

In-process examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3

Initial service leak test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2

Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.14

Inspection body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.15

Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 8

Inspectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.16, 4.3

Instrument piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.3

Interference, protection from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13

Internal pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.3

Isolation protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11

Joint, sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix P

Joints (seePiping joints)

Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8

Limitation on materials and components. . . . . . . . . 2.3

Limits on applicationambient and high temperature service

aluminium and aluminium alloys. . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.6carbon and low and medium alloy steels. . . . 2.6.3.2copper and copper alloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.5ductile iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.4high alloy steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.3iron castings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.4nickel and nickel alloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.7steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.3.2titanium and titanium alloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3.8

AS 1074 pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.10bolting for flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.7deterioration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4for forming and bending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.9flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.6gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.8valves

bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.5.2bypasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.5.6drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.5.3spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.5.5trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.5.4

Linear expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E

COPYRIGHT

271 AS 4041 — 1998

Clause

Load-supporting structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28.5

Loadmat isotherms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix H

Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Longitudinal stress, occasional loads. . . . . . . . . . 3.11.6

Longitudinal stress, sustained. . . . . . . . . . 3.11.5, 3.11.6

Low temperature (seeMaterials for low temperature service)

Machining allowance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4

Manufacturing tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.2

Manufacturer’s data report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1

Materialproperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Dreference thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.5tensile strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D

Materialsbrazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24.8corrosive service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7dissimilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5limitations (seeLimitations on materials and components)low temperature service

alloy steels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.3bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.6cast iron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.5groups A1 and A2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.2non-ferrous metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.3non-metallic materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.7pipes, thin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.4tubes, thin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.2.4

propertiesmechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2Poisson ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5thermal expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3weldability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.6Young Modulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4

qualification of (see Qualification of materials andcomponents)

May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.17

Mechanical strength, allowance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.5

Minimum operating temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.3

Mitre bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.18, 3.15.4

Mitre joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.19

Clause

Movement at supports, anchors and terminals. . . . . . 3.8

Newdesigns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16fabrication methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16

Nominal sizes of pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B

Non-metallic piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14

Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

Opening, reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix L

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2

Outside diameter of pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B

Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.22

Parties concerned. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.23

Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.24

Pipe bendscontinuous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.2wrinkle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.3crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.3mitre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.4cut-and-shut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.5gusseted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.5

Pipe support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.25, 3.28, 9.1.6

Piping classfast track selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3mixing classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5

Pipingcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.26.1instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.26.2sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.26.3joints

brazed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.8caulked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.6compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.9flanged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.4flared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5flareless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.5propriety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.10soldered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.7special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.10threaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.3welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6

COPYRIGHT

AS 4041 — 1998 272

Clause

Plastic strains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q4

Pneumatic testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1

Pressure control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2

Pressuredesign (seeDesign pressure)regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9, 9.1.4

Pressure-limiting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9, 9.1.4

Pressure relief systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3

Pressure relief valve discharge piping. . . . . . . . . 3.25.4

Pressure tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6

Pressure tests, alternatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8

Proof hydrostatic test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.4

Proprietarycomponents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.28piping joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.10

Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2

Qualification of materials and componentsalternative product form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3complying with nominated Standards. . . . . . . . . 2.2.1complying with Standards not nominated. . . . . . 2.2.2for which there are no Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3not fully identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.7reclaimed components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6specially tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.10structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4

Quality assurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8

Radiography, exemption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1

Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27.6, Q3

Reduced pressure systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1.3

Reducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16

Referenced documents. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10, Appendix A

Reheat piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2

Reinforcementbranch connection and openings. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.8of a branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Lof an opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix L

Relief valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9, 9.1.4

Clause

Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11,6.10

Required material design minimum temperature . . 2.11.4

Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

Risk analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6

Safety valve discharge piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.8

Safety valve discharge piping, designpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix J

Sampling piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.3

Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

Service conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.29

Shall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.30

Shear stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.3

Should . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.31

Shut down systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3

Size of pipes basis for determining. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1

Sleeve joint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix P

Socketfillet-welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Owelded joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.32

Soldered piping joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.7

Special piping joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.10

Specified minimum tensile strength. . . . . . . . . . 1.7.33.1

Specified minimum yield strength. . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.33.2

Standard piping design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix T

Static loads and forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Steam pipingdesign temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9.4drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25.1main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1

Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.33

Stress analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27, 3.27.3, Appendix Q

Stress calculation in a piping system. . . . . . Appendix S

Stresses in a piping system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q3

COPYRIGHT

273 AS 4041 — 1998

Clause

Support attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28.4

Temperaturecontrol systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2design, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.1design (seeDesign temperature)material design minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.2maximum operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.3minimum operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.34.4

Tensile strengths of materials. . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.35

Thermaleffects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4

Thicknessactual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.36.1design pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.2nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.4required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.36.3

Threadedallowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.3

Tolerances, dimension and mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17

Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.37

Clause

Wall thickness of straight pipecast pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.5external pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.4internal pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.3nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.2required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.1

Welddetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix Njoint factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.2joint factor, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.38

Welded branch connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20

Welded piping jointsbell and spigot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.5butt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24.2.1fillet welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.2partial penetration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.6sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24.2.4socket welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.3stress corrosion cracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24.2.7

Weldingbacking rings

permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.4temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.5

fusible inserts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9.3

Welds, branch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix M

Wrinkle pipe bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15.3

Young modulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F

COPYRIGHT

australian standard - roobuck 404… · as 4041—1998 australian standard™ pressure piping...

Documents